application technology controller

from V 5.6-F

01/2013 EN

APPLICATIONTechnology Controller FUNCTIONS

DETAILS

PARAMETER5th Generation of STÖBER Inverter

Table of Contents

Technology Controller

ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK

i

Table of Contents

1. Notes on Safety ...................................................... 1 1.1 Software ................................................................................. 6

1.2 Presentation of notes on safety .............................................. 7

2. Function Description .............................................. 8 2.1 Overview ................................................................................. 8

2.1.1 Technology Reference Value and Actual Value ………........... 9

2.1.2 Technology Controller ………………........................................ 10

2.1.3 Speed/Torque Control ……………………................................ 11

2.1.4 Additional Range Control ……………………........................... 12

2.2 Interface ................................................................................... 13

2.2.1 Binary Input Signals ……………..……..................................... 13

2.2.2 Analog Input Signals ……………............................................. 14

2.2.3 Output Signals …………………………………………............... 14

2.2.4 Process Data Imaging ……………………................................. 15

2.3 Assistent for Entering Parameters ........................................... 16

3. Details ………………………..................................... 17 3.1 PID Controller ……………………………………....................... 17

3.2 Speed Controller …….............................................................. 20

3.3 Local Operation …………….................................................... 21

3.4 A45 Quick Stop End …………….............................................. 22

3.5 EMERGENCY OFF Activation ……......................................... 23

3.6 Torque Limit ………………...................................................... 24

3.7 Analog Inputs/Outputs ……..................................................... 25

3.7.1 Analog Inputs……………..…................................................... 25

3.7.2 Analog Outputs ....................................................................... 25

3.8 Application Events ………........................................................ 26

3.9 Communication with CAN ……………………………………..… 26

3.10 Communication with PROFIBUS ……………………………..… 27

Table of Contents


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e


i

3.11 Communication with EtherCAT …………………………………. 28

3.12 Communication with PROFINET ……………………………….. 28

3.13 Technology Controller Structure …………………….………….. 29

4. Used Parameters ……………………….................... 31 4.1 Parameter Legend ……………………………………................ 31

4.2 Parameter List …….................................................................. 32

Table of Contents


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e


i

- This page was purposely left blank -

Notes on Safety


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

1


01

1 Notes on Safety When in operation, inverters from STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG may have energized or rotating parts depending on their protection rating.

Surfaces may heat up. For these reasons, comply with the following:

The safety notes listed in the following sections and points

The technical rules and regulations

In addition, always read the mounting instructions and the short commissioning instructions. STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG accepts no liability for

damages caused by non-adherence to the instructions or applicable regulations. Subject to technical changes to improve the devices without prior notice.

This documentation is purely a product description. It does not represent promised properties in the sense of warranty law.

Component part of the product

The technical documentation is a component part of a product.

Since the technical documentation contains important information, always

keep it handy in the vicinity of the device until the machine is disposed of.

If the product is sold, disposed of, or rented out, always include the technical documentation with the product.

Operation in accordance with its intended use

In the sense of DIN EN 50178 (previously VDE 0160), the POSIDRIVE®

FDS 5000 and MDS 5000 and the POSIDYN® SDS 5000 model series represent the electrical equipment of power electronics for the control of power flow in high-voltage current systems. They are designed exclusively to power:

Servo motors (MDS 5000, SDS 5000)

Asynchronous motors (FDS 5000, MDS 5000 and SDS 5000)

Operation for purposes other than the intended use include the connection of other electrical loads! Before the manufacturer is allowed to put a machine on the market, he must

have a danger analysis prepared as per machine guideline 98/37/EG. This analysis establishes the dangers connected with the use of the machine. The danger analysis is a multi-stage, iterative process. Since this documentation

cannot begin to provide sufficient insight into the machine guidelines, please carefully study the latest standards and legal situation yourself. After the drive controller has been installed in machines, it cannot be commissioned until it

has been determined that the machine complies with the regulations of EG guideline 98/37/EG.

Notes on Safety


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

2


01

Ambient conditions

Model series POSIDRIVE® FDS 5000 and MDS 5000 and POSIDYN® SDS 5000 are products of the restricted sales class as described in IEC 61800-3. This product may cause high-frequency interference in residential zones and

the user may be asked to take suitable measures. The inverters are not designed for use in public low-voltage networks which

power residential areas. High-frequency interference must be expected when the inverters are used in such a network. The inverters are only intended for use in TN networks.

The inverters are only designed for use on supply current networks which can delivery at the most a maximum of symmetrical rated short circuit current at 480 Volts as per the following table:

Device family Size Max. symmetrical rated short circuit

current

FDS 5000, MDS 5000,

SDS 5000

BG 0 and BG 1

5000 A

MDS 5000 SDS 5000

BG 2 5000 A

BG 3 10000 A

Install the inverter in a switching cabinet in which the permissible maximum surrounding air temperature is not exceeded (see mounting instructions).

The following applications are prohibited:

Use in potentially explosive areas

Use in environments with harmful substances as per EN 60721 (e.g., oils,

acids, gases, fumes, powders, irradiation)

Use with mechanical vibration and impact stresses which exceed the information in the technical data of the mounting instructions

Implementation of the following applications is only permitted when STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG has been contacted first for permission:

Use in non-stationary applications

Qualified personnel

Since the drive controllers of the model series POSIDRIVE® FDS 5000, POSIDRIVE® MDS 5000 and POSIDYN® SDS 5000 may harbor residual risks,

all configuration, transportation, installation and commissioning tasks including operation and disposal may only be performed by trained personnel who are aware of the possible risks.

Notes on Safety


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

3


01

Personnel must have the qualifications required for the job. The following table lists examples of occupational qualifications for the jobs:

Activity Possible occupational qualifications

Transportation and storage Worker skilled in storage logistics or comparable training

Configuration Graduate engineer (electro-technology or electrical power technology)

Technician (m/f) (electro-technology)

Installation and connection Electronics technician (m/f)

Commissioning (of a standard application)

Technician (m/f) (electro-technology)

Master electro technician (m/f)

Programming Graduate engineer (electro-technology or electrical power technology)

Operation Technician (m/f) (electro-technology)

Master electro technician (m/f)

Disposal Electronics technician (m/f)

In addition, the valid regulations, the legal requirements, the reference books, this technical documentation and, in particular, the safety information contained

therein must be carefully:

read

understood and

complied with.

Transportation and storage

Immediately upon receipt, examine the delivery for any transportation damages. Immediately inform the transportation company of any damages. If damages are found, do not commission the product.

If the device is not to be installed immediately, store it in a dry, dust-free room. Please see the mounting instructions for how to commission an inverter after it has been in storage for a year or longer.

Installation and connection

Installation and connection work are only permitted after the device has been

isolated from the power! The accessory installation instructions allow the following actions during the installation of accessories:

The housing of the MDS 5000, SDS 5000 and FDS 5000 in the upper slot can be opened.

The housing of the MDS 5000 and SDS 5000 in the bottom slot can be

opened. Opening the housing in another place or for other purposes is not permitted.

Notes on Safety


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

4


01

Use only copper lines. For the line cross sections to be used, see table 310-16 of the NEC standard for 60 oC or 75 oC.

Protect the device from falling parts (pieces of wire, leads, metal parts, and so on) during installation or other tasks in the switching cabinet. Parts with con-ductive properties inside the inverter can cause short circuits or device failure.

The motor must have an integrated temperature monitor with basic isolation in acc. with EN 61800-5-1 or external motor overload protection must be used. The permissible protection class is protective ground. Operation is not

permitted unless the protective conductor is connected in accordance with the regulations. Comply with the applicable instructions for installation and commissioning of

motor and brakes.

Commissioning, operation and service

Remove additional coverings before commissioning so that the device cannot overheat. During installation, provide the free spaces specified in the mounting instructions to prevent the inverter from overheating.

The housing of the drive controller must be closed before you turn on the supply voltage. When the supply voltage is on, dangerous voltages can be present on the connection terminals and the cables and motor terminals

connected to them. Remember that the device is not necessarily de-energized after all indicators have gone off. When network voltage is applied, the following are prohibited:

Opening the housing

Connecting or disconnecting the connection terminals

Installing accessories

Proceed as shown below to perform these tasks: 1. Disable the enable (X1). 2. Turn off the supply voltage (power pack and controller power supply

as well as any auxiliary voltages for encoder, brake, etc.). 3. Protect the supply voltages from being turned on again. 4. Wait 5 minutes (time the DC link capacitors need to discharge).

5. Determine isolation from the voltage. 6. Short circuit the network input and ground it. 7. Cover the adjacent, voltage-carrying parts.

You can then start your work on the drive controller. Repairs may only be performed by STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH +

Co. KG. Send defective devices together with a fault description to:

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG

Abteilung VS-EL Kieselbronner Str. 12 75177 Pforzheim

GERMANY

Notes on Safety


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

5


01

Disposal

Please comply with the latest national and regional regulations! Dispose of the individual parts separately depending on their nature and currently valid regulations such as, for example:

Electronic scrap (PCBs)

Plastic

Sheet metal

Copper

Aluminum

Residual dangers

The connected motor can be damaged with certain settings of drive controllers. Longer operation against an applied motor halting brake

Longer operation of self-cooled motors at slow speeds Drives can reach dangerous excess speeds (e.g., setting of high output frequencies for motors and motor settings which are unsuitable for this).

Secure the drive accordingly.

Notes on Safety


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

6


01

1.1 Software

Using the POSITool software

The POSITool software package can be used to select the application and adjust the parameters and signal monitoring of the 5th generation of STÖBER inverters. The functionality is specified by selecting an application and

transmitting these data to an inverter. The program is the property of STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG and is copyrighted. The program is licensed for the user.

The software is only provided in machine-readable form. STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG gives the customer a non-exclusive right to use the program (license) provided it has been legitimately

obtained. The customer is authorized to use the program for the above activities and functions and to make copies of the program, including a backup copy for

support of this use, and to install same. The conditions of this license apply to each copy. The customer promises to affix the copyright notation to each copy of the program and all other property

notations. The customer is not authorized to use, copy, change or pass on/transmit the program for purposes other than those in these regulations. The customer is

also not authorized to convert the program (i.e., reverse assembly, reverse compilation) or to compile it in any other way. The customer is also not authorized to issue sublicenses for the program, or to rent or lease it out.

Product maintenance

The obligation to maintain refers to the two latest program versions created by

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG and approved for use. STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG will either correct program errors or will provide the customer with a new program version. This choice will

be made by STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG. If, in individual cases, the error cannot be immediately corrected, STÖBER ANTRIEBS-TECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG will provide an intermediate solution which may

require the customer to comply with special operation regulations. A claim to error correction only exists when the reported errors are reproducible or can be indicated with machine-generated outputs. Errors must be reported in

a reconstructable form and provide information which is useful to error correction. The obligation to correct errors ceases to exist for such programs which the customer changes or edits in any way unless the customer can prove that such

action is not the cause of the reported error. STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG will keep the respective valid program versions in an especially safe place (fireproof data safe, bank deposit

box).

Notes on Safety


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

7


01

1.2 Presentation of notes on safety

Notice

means that property damage may occur if the stated

precautionary measures are not taken.

Caution

with warning triangle means that minor injury may occur if

the stated precautionary measures are not taken.

Warning

means that there may be a serious danger of death if the

stated precautionary measures are not taken.

Danger

means that serious danger of death exists if the stated

precautionary measures are not taken.

Information

indicates important information about the product or a

highlighted portion of the documentation which requires

special attention.

CAUTION

WARNING

DANGER

NOTICE

Function Description


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

8


02

2 Function Description The Technology Controller application allows a motor to follow a reference value (command variable) via a PID controller with speed or torque control.

The following functions are available:

Depending on the configured selection, the command variable can be specified via terminals, fieldbus (CAN, PROFIBUS, EtherCAT or

PROFINET) or serial (USS).

Reference value negation via binary signal (terminal, fieldbus or serial).

Actual value recording via terminals, fieldbus or serial.

Variable range control

Quick stop either via bus or terminal.

Integrated reference value generator for speed control optimization.

2.1 Overview This chapter explains how the Technology Controller application is designed. The application is divided into four main blocks:

Reference value-actual value comparison

Technology Controller with PID function

Speed/torque control

Working range control

The reference value-actual value comparison is used to calculate the control error which is sent to the Technology Controller. The PID controller is used to calculate the set value as per the transfer

function. The set value and the feed forward value of torque control are used for speed/torque control.

Working range control takes place independently of these signal paths. The blocks will now be described in detail below.

+

Mn

Figure 1.1: Design of the Technology Controller application

Reference value for feed forward torque control

Control error Set value

Speed/torque/ control

Reference-actual calibration


Working range control

Reference value for feed forward speed control



ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

9


02

2.1.1 Technology Reference Value and Actual Value

The technology reference values and actual values are provided by selection parameters. G132 determines the source for the reference value. The

reference value can be negated with the source selected in G100. Parameter G133 defines the source of the technology actual value.. Three analog inputs are provided as interfaces for reference values and actual

values. Parameters are provided for fieldbus operation. The reference value is written to G232 via the fieldbus. The parameter entered in G12 as the source is used for the actual value (preset: G233). This allows different parameters to be

set for the feedback. A low pass with the time constant G11 is available to filter the actual value. The reference and actual status are scanned with the parameters G332 and

G333. The reference value for the feed forward of torque control is taken from the reference value path. The control error is indicated in G180.

(-1)

G332

G300

G180

G333

G132

G100

G133

G232

G210 Bit 2

0%

0%

0

AE1

AE1

1

AE2

AE2

AE3

AE3

BE1BE1

BE13

...

G11

+

-

Figure 1.2 Reference-actual comparison

Technology reference value

Source Technology ref. value

Read value of the parameter entered in G12

StatusTechnology ref. value

Technology actual value

PID controllerControl error Technology

actual value Low pass

Source Negate technology

ref. value

Source Technology actual value

StatusNegate technology reference value

Ref. value for feed forward torque control

Control error



ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

10


02

2.1.2 Technology Controller

The control error is sent to the PID controller. First, a global gain takes place there with the parameter G00 (loop gain). Then the P, I and D parts are

calculated. The P part is determined by the parameter G06. G18 provides a response message of this controller path.

The I part is calculated with the parameter G02. In certain situations such as the initialization of the PID or the PID controller limits are reached, the I part is set to different values than the ones calculated with G02 (for details see chap.

2.1). G19 contains the current I part. The control error is first filtered by a low pass in the D path (time constant G07). The D part is then calculated with the parameter G03.

After the addition of the P, I and D part, the values are restricted to the values in G08 and G09. The signal PIDoff sets the controller value to 0. The source of the signal is selected in G101. The set value of the PID controller is sent to the

speed/torque control.

0

G06

G02G00

G07 G03

G19

G18P

I PID

D

Figure 1.3: Technology Controller with PID function

Control error

PID controller Kp 2 PID

P part

PID off (Source selection G101)

P part

PIDI part

PID controllerKd

I part

D part

PID controller Ki

PID controller Low pass

D part

Loop gain

Set value

Calculation

depends on

PID mode and

PID limits

(G08, G09)

See chap. 2.1



ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

11


02

2.1.3 Speed/Torque Control

C61 can be used for optimal process adjustment to decide whether the PID set value will affect the torque or the speed.

Torque control (C61=1): When the motor torque is to be used as the set value, G15 can be used to weight the feed forward (0 - 100%). The set value is weighted with G16 (0 -

400%). Feed forward and set value are added and then sent as reference value for the torque controller.

Speed control (C61=0):

A separate branch is used for the feed forward for speed control. The signal is selected with D130. The ratio of the set value is handled by G16 (0 - 400%). The sum of feed forward and set value is scaled with D02. The

direction can then be reversed with a binary signal (source selection D100). The thus calculated reference value is sent to the speed controller.

(-1)

+

+

+

+

G15

G16

C61D02 D100

G185

Figure 1.4: Switching between torque and speed control

Technology ref. value Torque

Reference value for M feed foward

Set value

Relative RV Ref. value for feed forward Speed control Source selection D130

PID ratio

n speed limiter

n(ref. value max.)

Speedsource

M controller

PID set value

n controller



ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

12


02

2.1.4 Additional Range Control

Any parameter with the format I16 can be selected as the source in selection parameter C41. The parameter C42 scales its end value to the upper and lower

limit values. The low pass with the time constant C43 filters the signal which can be monitored with the parameter C49. The parameter C44 decides whether the range to be controlled is to be monitored absolutely or

symmetrically to 0. The signal is compared with the lower limit C45 and the upper limit C46. The result of the comparison is available in parameter C48.

C43C46

C45

C44

C41

C49C180

C181

C48

C42

Figure 1.5: Range control

Read value of the parameter entered in C41

Range control factor

Range control

low pass Range control actual value

Range control mode

Comparator 0:C45<In<C46 1:In<C45 2:In>C46

Range control status

Range control source

Range control upper

limit

Range controllower limit

Range control upper limit reached

Range control lower limit reached



ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

13


02

2.2 Interface The device controller is selected during step 4 of the configuration assistant (POSITool). Depending on this selection, the controller of the inverter is

connected via terminals or via a fieldbus system. The selection of a device controller does not mean that the control and status signals are available exclusively via the selected controller. Fieldbus systems

always permit mixed operation with control via terminals. For this reason the origin of the control and status signals for each application must be set in the particular selection source (see table).

When the setting Parameter is selected as the selection source for the input signals, the value is calculated from the Fieldbus Image (see table). These parameters can be used to transfer values via a fieldbus system. The Display

Parameters (see table) can be used to monitor whether the signal path is set correctly. (Caution! Display parameters are only visible in POSITool during online operation!)

For the control of the signals, see operating manual of the inverter.

2.2.1 Binary Input Signals

Signal Function Selection

Source

Image on

Fieldbus

(Bit)

Display

Parameter

Direction Regardless of the sign of the reference value in speed mode the signal reverses the current direction.

D100 G210 Bit 0 D300

External fault Trigger external fault. D101 G210 Bit 1 D301

Tech. reverse

Negate the technology reference value. G100 G210 Bit 2 G300

Turn off PID controller

Block the PID controller (output = 0). G101 G210 Bit 3 G301

Set PID controller

Set the PID controller as per G14. G102 G210 Bit 4 G302



ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

14


02

2.2.2 Analog Input Signals


Source

Image on

Fieldbus

(Bit)

Display

Parameter

n-reference, relative

Speed feed forward which is added

together with the PID controller to the speed reference value.

D130 D230 D330

Technology

reference value

Technology reference value (command variable)

G132 G232 G332

Technology actual value

Technology actual value G133 G233 G333

M-Max Torque limit C130 C230 C330

2.2.3 Output Signals


Source

Image on

Fieldbus

(Bit)

Display

Parameter

Zero ramp reached

Signal is logical 1 when the motor speed drops below the value specified

in C40.

F61 bis

F70 (depend. on which

option board is used)

G200 Bit 0 D180

Reference

value Signal is logical 1 when n-reference E06 equals the n-master value E161.

G200 Bit 1 D181

Torque limit Signal is logical 1 when the speed controller requests a greater torque

than is specified in E62, E66.

G200 Bit 2 D182

PIDLim+ Signal is logical 1 when the PID controller reaches the upper control

G200 Bit 3 G181

PIDLim- Signal is logical 1 when the PID controller reaches the lower control

G200 Bit 4 G182

RngeLim+ Signal is logical 1 when the upper range limit is reached.

G200 Bit 5 G183

RngeLim- Signal is logical 1 when the lower range limit is reached.

G200 Bit 6 G184

The parameters listed in the Display Parameter column can be circuited to an

output based on the type of signal (analog or binary). See F40, F50, F61 … F70.



ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

15


02

2.2.4 Process Data Imaging

The primary parameters for process data imaging

Below are some important process data imaging parameters for fieldbus operation:

A180 Device control byte

E200 Device status byte

G210 Controlbyte Technology controller

G200 Statusbyte Technologycontroller

C230 Mmax

D230 n-reference, relative

G232 Technology reference value

G233 Technology actual value

Diverse display parameters (e.g., E.. -group)

Parameters for fieldbus scaling

The following parameters define whether the values transferred via fieldbus are to be written in internal inverter format (raw values) or scaled.

For PROFIBUS A100

For CAN A213

For EtherCAT A213

For PROFINET A100



ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

16


02

2.3 Assistent for Entering Parameters Assistants give you a quick and well-organized list of the primary parameters selected from the many parameters available.

After the project assistant is exited, the following screen listing all available assistants appears.

The assistant for the technology controller can be started from this dialog or

directly from the project view. The following settings are predefined with the help of the assistant:

Binary signal sources

Analog signal sources

Reference values

Ramps

Binary outputs

Analog outputs

Bus interface

You can also use the assistant in “online” mode.

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

17


03

3 Details

3.1 PID Controller There are three states for the PID controller: 1. Initialization

2. Control mode 3. Deactivated - output permanently on zero.

Deactivated

Using the source selected in the parameter G101, the output of the PID controller can be forced to 0 %. In this case the torque or speed controller

connected afterwards (see parameter C61) is activated via the set feed forward source. When the output of the PID controller is deactivated, the P, I and D part continue to be calculated. The output of the PID controller is deactivated even

when the enable (A900=0) is missing. When the output is enabled again, the output and the I part are set to the value of G13 (PID initialization value).

Control mode

If the PID controller was not initialized with the source selected in the parameter G102, the output is calculated based on the control error G180 and

the set control parameters. Following the calculation, the PID controller output is limited via the parameters G08 (upper limit) and G09 (lower limit). After the limitation becomes active, the I part is set based on the following conditions:

If the upper limit has been reached (G08) and the sum of the P and D part is less than G08, then I=G08-P-D is valid.

If the lower limit has been reached (G09) and the sum of the P and D part is

greater than G09, then I=G09-P-D is valid.

If the upper limit has been reached and G08-P-D is less than 0 or the lower limit has been reached and G09-P-D is greater than 0, then the I part is set

to 0.

Information

The PID controller output can only be forced to a value when this

value is within the limits G08 and G09.

Example:

When the PID controller has been deactivated but the lower limit

G09 is greater than 0 %, the output is forced to the lower limit

value G09 and not to 0 %.

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

18


03

Initialization The selector G102 set source PID controller specifies which signal path sets

the PID controller (Preset). The PID controller is also set with a falling edge of PID controller disable (monitoring parameter G301) and with a rising edge of the enable (parameter A900). However, this setting procedure differs from the

initialization via PID controller set. The PID controller output and the I part are always set with G13 PID initialization value due to the enable and PID controller disable. With PID controller set, the PID controller is initialized based

on the setting of the parameter G14 PID mode. The setting of G14 is used to influence the output of the PID controller and the reactions of the I part to conform to the application during initialization.

Es können folgende Einstellungen getroffen werden:

0:Normal

1:Output = I part = 0

2: Output = I part l= G13

3: Output = G13; I part = output – P

4: Output = PID; I part = G13

G14 = 0: Normal

With G14=0, no initialization is performed due to PID controller set during

control mode.

G14 = 1: Output = I part = 0

With G14=1, the output and the I part are held at 0 % when the PID controller set signal is active.

Practical application: The PID controller set signal is present before the enable and remains set. The enable is given and the motor is energized. Regardless of the difference in

control, the PID output and the I part remain at 0 %. Only the feed forward is used to run the motor. When the system is stable and there is no oscillation, the PID controller can then be activated by switching off the PID controller set

signal.

G14 = 2: Output = I part = G13

With G14=2, the output and the I part are held to the value entered in G13 PID initialization value when the PID controller set signal is present.

Practical application: During control mode the output and the I part can be reset to the original condition via the PID controller set signal the same as with Enable on.

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

19


03

G14 =3: Output = G13; = I part = output – P

With G14=3, when the PID controller set signal is present, the output is held at the value entered in G13 PID initialization value and the I part adjusts to the value PID - P.

Practical application: During control mode, the output is frozen by the PID controller set signal to the

value in G13 and the I part adjusts accordingly to the P part. Control mode can be resumed with relatively little jerking.

G14 = 4: Output = PID; I part = G13 stop

With G14=4, the output is calculated based on the control error G180, the P gain G06 and a fixed I part (G19=G13) when the PID controller set signal is

present. The I part is held to the value entered in G13 PID initialization value. Practical application:

During control mode, the PID controller set signal and G13=0 % can be used to switch off the I part and control with the P part only. This can be useful when analyzing oscillation.

G08

G09

G08

G14

PID=P+I+D

PID=0I=0

1

0

1

0

2

3

4

PID=I=

G13G13

PID=I= - P

G13G13

PID=P+ +DI=

G13G13

Figure 3.1: Initialization of the PID controller

PID mode

PID controller upper limit

Source PID controller set (G102)

PID controller lower limit

PID

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

20


03

3.2 Speed Controller For optimal behavior, the speed controller must be adjusted to the actual load conditions. POSITool offers a scope and a reference value generator for this

(see chapter 5 of the application manual, ID 441691). A flowchart of the speed controller is shown below for better comprehension of the technical control behavior

C34

C31

C32

C33

C37 C36

E161 E170E07

E91

Figure 3.2: Structure of the speed controller The dynamics of the speed controller primarily depend on the parameters C31

proportional gain n-controller and C32 integral time n-controller. They determine the proportional and integral gain of the speed controller. Too high a gain causes the motor to vibrate. Too low a gain reduces the dynamics. The

default setting can usually be retained. If necessary, C31 is adjusted first. C32 affects the "load rigidity." The torque signal is filtered by C36. Parameter C37 can be used to set which

percentage portion of the signal will be filtered. When C37=0, the T-reference value is not filtered. When C37=100, the entire signal is filtered.

n-rmpg

Proportional gain

n-controller Low pass

reference speed

Integral timen-controller

Reference torque filter

Low pass filterRef. torque low

T-reference n-post-ramp

n-motor low pass

n-motor

Ref. value speed

Act. valuespeed

100% - C37

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

21


03

3.3 Local Operation The technology controller application offers the following functions via the operator panel.:

Error acknowledgment with the ESC key.

Parameter entry

Local operation with the key.

To access local operation, press the key. The following functions can then be implemented on the keyboard.:

The I/O key is used to enable and disable the controller.

When the ESC key is pressed, the motor stops.

The keys are used to move at the speed specified in A51 as long as the key is pressed. The value specified in A52 applies to acceleration and

deceleration ramp.

The keys are used to simulate a motor potentiometer. The value specified in A52 applies to acceleration and deceleration ramp.

Local mode can only be used with speed control.

If you want to switch to local mode, always set

C61=0:inactive.

If the device remains in device status switchon

disable since the state is reached with a given enable (with bus operation, enable and additional enable),

and if a change is then made to local operation, the inverter is enabled when local operation is exited!

This can cause the drive to move.

NOTICE

NOTICE

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

22


03

3.4 A45 Quick Stop End The parameter A45 defines the quick stop end. The following settings are available:

0: standstill

1: no stop With the selection 0:standstill the quick stop is concluded when the motor has

stopped. With the setting 1:no stop the quick stop is concluded immediately as soon as the quick stop signal is no longer present.

Figure 3.3: Quick stop end based on how parameter A45 is set

Q-stop

n-mot

at A45=0

n-mot at A45=1

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

23


03

3.5 EMERGENCY OFF Activation STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK suggests the following control procedure to turn off the drive with EMERGENCY OFF:

Please remember: Only devices with the option "/L" (24-V supply) can still be accessed via serial interface or fieldbus after an emergency off.

1

2

3

4

7

Figure 3.4 Control of the inverter during EMERGENCY OFF (suggestion of

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK)

Q-stop

n-mot

Release

Power

UZK

A35

E48 Released

Quick stop active

Ready for switch-on

Switch-on disabled

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

24


03

Procedure

To obtain a defined process, the EMERGENCY OFF signal should trigger a quick stop. If the speed is zero, the release should be removed. The power supply can then be switched off. The diagrams Udc and E48 device control

state show the resulting states of the inverter. When the power supply is switched off, the DC link voltage Udc will drop. When it reaches the value set in A35, the inverter changes to the device state switch-on disable.

3.6 Torque Limit The dynamics of the torque change can be restricted with the torque limitation. Several mechanisms act as torque limitations.

The signal selected in C130 Torque limit source.

The parameters C03 and C05.

The i2t model of the inverter (model for calculation of device heat-up).

The maximum permitted torque that is calculated internally:

o For asynchronous motors from the breakdown slip (B63) o For servo motors from the maximum permitted current before the servo

motor is demagnetized (B82)

o From the absolute current limit of the inverter The values entered at these positions are compared. The lowest value is used for the torque limitation.

The binary parameters E180 and E181 indicate whether the required torque is above the maximum permitted torque (C330).

Figure 3.5: Torque limits

Torque limit source

Statuspos. T-Max

limit reached

T-reference

Act. pos. T-max

T-Max

T-Min

Act. neg. T-max

min

max Status

neg. T-Maxlimit reached

Factortorque limit

Negator

max. permitted torque

max. permitted torque

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

25


03

3.7 Analog Inputs/Outputs

3.7.1 Analog Inputs

E10

E11

E74

X100.1

X100.4

AE1

AE2

AE3

X100.3

X100.5

X102.2

F11

F21

F31

F12

F22

F32

X102.1*

* Only when used with XEA 5001 Figure 3.6: Structure of the analog inputs

3.7.2 Analog Outputs

E16

E28

F40

F50

F41

F51

F42

F52

Figure 3.7: Structure of the analog outputs

AE1-level AE1-offset AE1-gain

16384 = 100%max = ±200%

16384 = 100%max = ±200%

16384 = 100%max = ±200%



Analog- output1- source

Analog- output1-gain

Analog-output2- source

Analog- output1-offset

Analog-output1-level

Analog- output2-gain

Analog- output2-offset

Analog-output2-level

AA1 X100.6

AA2 X100.7

in % in V

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

26


03

3.8 Application Events In the technology controller application, event 44:external fault can be triggered via an external signal. Triggering can take place via bus or a binary input

(selection parameterselector D101).

Nr: Name Description

External fault: Fault 44:Text from U180

Trigger Application-specific or via free programming option

Level: Fault

Acknowledgment: Switch on/off device or programmed acknowledgment

Other: Should only be used for application events which may not be set lower than the "fault" level..

Event counter: Z44

3.9 Communication with CAN The following are available via the CAN fieldbus interface:

EDS file

Two PDO channels (tx / rx).

One SDO channel (tx / rx).

If necessary, three additional SDO channels (tx / rx). Cf. operating manual CANopen®, ID 441686. Below is a simple mapping example for CANopen®.

Receiving area of the inverter Controller Inverter

Setting Length

[Byte] Meaning

A225.0 = A180 1 Device control byte

A225.1 = G210 1 Control byte, technology controller

A225.2 = G232 2 Technology reference value

A225.x Space for additional data up to a total length of 8 bytes

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

27


03

Sending area of the inverter Inverter Controller

Setting Length

[Byte] Meaning

A233.0 = E200 1 Device status byte

A233.1 = G200 1 Status byte, technology controller

A233.2 = G233 2 Technology actual value

A233.x Space for additional data up to a total length of 8 bytes

The switch between raw value and scaled bus operation is handled by parameter A213 (for more information, see operating manual CANopen®, ID 441686).

3.10 Communication with PROFIBUS The following are available via the PROFIBUS fieldbus interface:

GSD file

PPO 1: 4 PKW, 2 PZD

PPO 2: 4 PKW, 6 PZD

PPO 3: 0 PKW, 2 PZD

PPO 4: 0 PKW, 6 PZD

PPO 5: 4 PKW, 10 PZD

Support of the DP-V1 protocol. Cf. operating manual PROFIBUS DP, ID 441687.

Below is a simple mapping example for PROFIBUS. Receiving area of the inverter Controllert Inverter

Setting Length

[Byte] Meaning




A90.x Additional data may be added here.


Setting Length

[Byte] Meaning





Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

28


03

The switch between raw value and scaled bus operation is handled by parameter A100. Operation with raw values is recommended for time-optimized

behavior (for more information, see operating manual PROFIBUS DP, ID 441687). A sample project for a Siemens S7 controller which illustrates communication

and the handshake is provided by STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK.

3.11 Communication with EtherCAT The following are available via the EtherCAT fieldbus interface:

Two PDO channels (tx / rx).

One SDO channel (tx / rx). Cf. operating manual EtherCAT, ID 441896

Receiving area of the inverter Controllert Inverter

Setting Length

[Byte] Meaning




A225.x Space for additional data up to a total

length of 8 bytes.


Setting Length

[Byte] Meaning




A233.x Space for additional data up to a total length of 8 bytes.

3.12 Communication with PROFINET The following are available via the PROFINET fieldbus interface:

The device description file in XML format

The transfer of different data lengths

Cf. operating manual PROFINET, ID 442340.

Below is a simple mapping example for PROFINET.

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

29


03

Receiving area of the inverter Controllert Inverter

Setting Length

[Byte] Meaning






Setting Length

[Byte] Meaning





The switch between raw value and scaled bus operation is handled by parameter A100. Operation with raw values is recommended for time-optimized

behavior (for more information, see operating manual PROFINET, ID 442340).

3.13 Technology Controller Structure The complete structure of the Technology Controller appears on the next page.

Details


ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e

30


03

(-1

)

G33

2

G30

0G

180

D33

0

G18

5

G33

3

G10

0

D13

0

G13

3

D10

0

G21

0 B

it 0

0 1 BE

1B

E1

BE

13

...

G11

+

+ ++

+

-

G13

2

G06

G02

G00

G07

G03

G19

G18

P I D

G08

G09

G15

G16

G10

1C

61

D23

0

0%

AE

1A

E2

AE

3

00

1

C43

C42

C44

C49

C48

G21

0 B

it 2

0%

0 AE

1

1 AE

2A

E3

BE

1B

E1

BE

13

...

G23

2

0%

AE

1A

E2

AE

3

(-1)

D02

C41

Sou

rce

tech

nolo

gy

refe

renc

e va

lue

Rea

d va

lue

of

pa

ram

ete

r en

tere

d in

C

41

Ope

ratin

g

rang

e

sour

ce

Sta

tus

te

chno

logy

va

lue

Tec

hnol

ogy

refe

renc

e va

lue

Con

trol

byt

e

Tec

hnol

ogy

cont

rolle

r

Sou

rce

nega

te

tech

nolo

gy

refe

renc

e va

lue

Sta

tus

nega

tive

te

chno

logy

re

fere

nce

valu

e

Sta

tus

actu

al

tech

nolo

gy v

alue

Tau

lo

w p

ass

ac

tual

val

ue

Rea

d va

lue

of

par

amet

er

ente

red

in G

1 2

PID

con

trol

er

ror

PID

clo

sed

loop

gai

n

PID

-con

trol

ler

Kp

2

PID

-con

trol

ler

Ki

PID

- co

ntro

ller

low

pas

s

PID

- co

ntro

ller

Kd

PID

I-

Par

t

PID

P

-Par

t

See

ch

ap.

2.1

PID

con

trol

ler

uppe

r lim

it

PID

con

trol

ler

low

er li

mit

Que

lle

PID

-off

P

ID

ratio

S

peed

lim

iter

PID

set

va

lue

Ref

eren

ce

valu

e so

urce

n-

ref.

valu

e re

lativ

e

n (r

efe

renc

e

valu

e m

ax.)

n-co

ntro

ller

T-c

ontr

olle

r

Tec

hnol

ogy

refe

renc

e va

lue

Tor

que

feed

forw

ard

Sou

rce

sele

ctio

n di

rect

ion

n-re

f. va

lue

rela

tive

Con

trol

byt

e

Tec

hnol

ogy

cont

rolle

r

Com

para

tor

0:C

45

<In

>C

46

1:In

<C

45

2:In

>C

46

Ope

ratin

g ra

nge

stat

us

Ope

ratin

g ra

nge

mod

e

Ope

ratin

g ra

nge

actu

al

valu

e

Ope

ratin

g ra

nge

lo

w p

ass

Ope

ratin

g ra

nge

fact

or

Sou

rce

actu

al

tech

nolo

gy

valu

e

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 31


04

4 Used Parameters

4.1 Parameter Legend Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

C230 Global

r=2, w=2

Torque limit: Specification for the torque limit (absolute value) via fieldbus if the signal source is C130=4:Parameter. Value range in %: -200 to 200 to 200 Fieldbus: 1LSB=1·%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value: 32767 = 200 %); USS address: 03 39 80 00 hex

24E6h 0h

Access level for read (r=2) and write accesses (w=2)

PROFIBUS, PROFINET = PNU (PKW1) CAN-Bus = Index

Value range: Specification of unit, minimum and maximum value The default setting is underlined.

Fieldbus: 1st position: Scaling for integer (PROFIBUS and CAN bus) 2nd position: - PDO – Parameters can be imaged as process data. - Blank – Parameter can only be accessed via PKW (PROFIBUS) or SDO

(CAN bus). 3rd position: Data type. See operating manuals, chapter 3.2. 4th position: Scaling for raw values 5th position: USS address

Global – Parameter is not dependent on axis. Achse – Parameter is axis-specific. Off – Parameter can only be changed when enable is off.

PROFIBUS, PROFINET = Subindex CAN-Bus = Subindex

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 32


04

4.2 Parameter List A.. Inverter Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

A00.0 Global

r=0, w=0

Save values & start: When this parameter is activated, the inverter saves the current configuration and the parameter values in the Paramodul. After power-off, the inverter starts with the saved configuration. If the configuration data on the inverter and Paramodul are identical, only the parameters are saved (speeds up the procedure).

NOTE Do not turn off the power of the control section (device version /L:24V, device version /H: supply voltage) while the action is being executed. If the power is turned off while the action is running this causes incomplete storage. After the device starts up again the fault "*ConfigStartERROR parameters lost" appears on the display. Approx. 1000 storage procedures are possible per Paramodul. When this limit has almost been reached, result 14 is indicated after the storage procedure. When this happens, replace Paramodul as soon as possible.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 00 00 00 hex

2000h 0h

A00.1 Global

read (0)

Process: Shows the progress of the "save vales" action in %.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 00 00 01 hex

2000h 1h

A00.2 Global

read (0)

Result: Result of the "save values" action

0: error free 10: write error while opening a file: No Paramodul is installed or Paramodul is full or is damaged. 11: The inverter's configuration memory area that is to be saved is not written 12: write error while write-accessing Paramodul. Paramodul was removed, is full or is damaged. 14: Warning. Paramodul has already been write-accessed many times. The memory chip is

reaching the end of its ability to be write-accessed without errors. Error-free saving is still possible. Replace the Paramodul as soon as possible!


2000h 2h

A09.0 Global,

OFF

r=3, w=3

System reset & start: A reset of the microprocessor in the inverter is triggered if the parameter is activated. A restart occurs as it does after switching off/on the control part supply (device version /L: 24 V, device version /H: power supply).


2009h 0h

A09.1 Global

read (3)

Progress: displays the progress of the action System Reset in %. As the action causes a restart of the control part, no action progress can be observed. The value is always 0 %.


2009h 1h

A09.2 Global

read (3)

Result: Result of action System Reset. As the action causes a restart of the control part, no action result can be calculated. The value is always 0:error free.


2009h 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 33


04

A.. Inverter Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

A10.0 Global

r=0, w=0

Userlevel: Specifies the access level of the user for the parameters via the "Display" communication path. Each parameter has one level for read or write accesses. A parameter can only be read or changed with the necessary access level. The higher the set level the more parameters can be accessed. Possible settings: 0: Monitor; The elementary indicators can be monitored. General parameters can be changed. 1: Standard; The primary parameters of the selected application can be monitored and changed. 2: Extended; All parameters for commissioning and optimization of the selected application can be

monitored and changed. 3: Service; Service parameters. Permit a comprehensive diagnosis.

Value range: -32768 ... 1 ... 32767

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 02 80 00 hex

200Ah

Array

0h

A10.1 Global

r=0, w=0

Userlevel: Specifies the access level of the user for the parameters via the RS232 (X3) communication path. Each parameter has one level each for read or write accesses. A parameter can only be read or changed with the necessary access level. The higher the set level the more parameters can be accessed. Possible settings: 0: Monitor; The elementary indicators can be monitored. General parameters can be changed. 1: Standard; The primary parameters of the selected application can be monitored and changed. 2: Extended; All parameters for commissioning and optimization of the selected application can be


Value range: -32768 ... 3 ... 32767


200Ah

Array

1h

A10.2 Global

r=0, w=0

Userlevel: Specifies the access level of the user for the parameters via the CAN-bus (SDO) communication path. Each parameter has one level each for read or write accesses. A parameter can only be read or changed with the necessary access level. The higher the set level the more parameters can be accessed. Possible settings: 0: Monitor; The elementary indicators can be monitored. General parameters can be changed. 1: Standard; The primary parameters of the selected application can be monitored and changed. 2: Extended; All parameters for commissioning and optimization of the selected application can be


Value range: -32768 ... 3 ... 32767


200Ah

Array

2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 34


04


address

A10.3 Global

r=0, w=0

Userlevel: Specifies the access level of the user for the parameters via the PROFIBUS communication path with the PKW0 or PKW1 protocol. Each parameter has one level each for read or write accesses. A parameter can only be read or changed with the necessary access level. The higher the set level the more parameters can be accessed. Possible settings: 0: Monitor; The elementary indicators can be monitored. General parameters can be changed. 1: Standard; The primary parameters of the selected application can be monitored and changed. 2: Extended; All parameters for commissioning and optimization of the selected application can be


Value range: -32768 ... 3 ... 32767


200Ah

Array

3h

A10.4 Global

r=0, w=0

Userlevel: Specifies the access level of the user for the parameters via the "system bus" communication path. Each parameter has one level each for read or write accesses. A parameter can only be read or changed with the necessary access level. The higher the set level the more parameters can be accessed. Possible settings: 0: Monitor; The elementary indicators can be monitored. General parameters can be changed. 1: Standard; The primary parameters of the selected application can be monitored and changed. 2: Extended; All parameters for commissioning and optimization of the selected application can be


Value range: -32768 ... 3 ... 32767


200Ah

Array

4h

A11.0 Global

r=1, w=1

Edited Axe: Specifies the axis to be edited via device display. Axis to be edited (A11) and active axis (operating indicator, E84) must not be identical (e.g., axis 1 can be edited while the inverter continues with axis 2).

Value range: 0 ... 0: axis 1 ... 3

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 02 C0 00 hex

200Bh

Array

0h

A11.1 Global

r=1, w=1

Edited Axe: Selects the axis to be parameterized which is addressed with CANopen® with SDO channel 1 or with PROFIBUS DP-V0. The axis to be edited (A11) and the active axis (operation indicator, E84) must not be identical (e.g., axis 1 can be edited while the inverter continues with axis 2). With PROFIBUS DP-V0, a distinction can be made between two axes with the PKW service. Axis 1 or axis 2 is selected with A11.1 = 0. Axis 3 or axis 4 is selected with A11.1 = 1.



200Bh

Array

1h

A11.2 Global

r=1, w=1

Edited Axe: Selects the axis to be parameterized which is addressed with CANopen® with SDO channel 2. The axis to be edited (A11) and the active axis (operation indicator, E84) must not be identical (e.g., axis 1 can be edited while the inverter continues with axis 2).



200Bh

Array

2h

A11.3 Global

r=1, w=1




200Bh

Array

3h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 35


04


address

A11.4 Global

r=1, w=1




200Bh

Array

4h

A12 Global

r=1, w=1

Language: Language on the display.

0: German; 1: English; 2: French;


200Ch 0h

A21 Global,

OFF

r=1, w=2

Brake resistor R: Resistance value of the brake resistor being used.

Value range in Ohm: 100.0 ... 100 ... 600.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1Ohm; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 05 40 00 hex

2015h 0h

A22 Global,

OFF

r=1, w=2

Brake resistor P: Power of the brake resistor used. A22 = 0 means the brake chopper is deactivated. Only values in 10 W increments can be entered.

Value range in W: 0 ... 600 ... 6400

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1W; Type: I16; (raw value:1LSB=10·W); USS-Adr: 01 05 80 00 hex

2016h 0h

A23 Global,

OFF

r=1, w=2

Brake resistor thermal: Thermal time constant of the brake resistor.

Value range in s: 1 ... 40 ... 2000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1s; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 05 C0 00 hex

2017h 0h

A29 Global

r=2, w=2

Fault quick-stop: If the parameter is inactive, the power section is turned off when a fault occurs. The motor coasts down. If the parameter is active, a quick stop is executed when a fault occurs if the event permits (see event list). When the enable signal is LOW during a fault quick stop, the quick stop is interrupted and the motor coasts down. This also applies when A44 enable quick-stop is active.

0: inactive; Coast down (disable power section immediately). 1: active; Execute quick stop.


201Dh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 36


04


address

A34 Global

r=2, w=2

Auto-start: When A34 = 1 is set, the device state "switch-on disable" to "ready for switch-on" is exited both during first startup and after a fault reset although the enable is active. With fault reset via enable, this causes an immediately restart! A34 is only supported with standard device state machines and not with DSP402 device state machine. WARNING Before activation of auto-start with A34 = 1, check to determine whether an automatic restart is allowed (for safety reasons). Only use auto-start under consideration of the standards and regulations which are applicable to the plant or machine.

0: inactive; After power on, a change of the enable from L-level to H-level is necessary to enable the drive ( message "1:switch-on disable"). This prevents an undesired startup of the motor (machine safety).

1: active; If auto-start is active, the drive can start running immediately after power on and existing enable.


2022h 0h

A35 Global,

OFF

r=2, w=2

Low voltage limit: When the inverter is enabled and the DC link voltage goes lower than the value set here, the inverter triggers the indication of the event "46:Low voltage." A35 should be approximately 85 % of the applied power voltage so that the possible failure of a network phase is absorbed.

Value range in V: 180.0 ... 350 ... 570.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 08 C0 00 hex

2023h 0h

A36 Global,

OFF

r=2, w=2

Mains voltage: Maximum voltage which the inverter provides to the motor. Usually the power (mains) voltage. Starting with this voltage, the motor runs in the weak field range.

Value range in V: 220 ... 400 ... 480

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 2317 V); USS-Adr: 01 09 00 00 hex

2024h 0h

A37.0 Global

r=2, w=2

Reset memorized values & start: The six different memorized values E33 to E37 and E41 (max. current, max. temperature, and so on) are reset.


2025h 0h

A37.1 Global

read (2)

Process: Progress of the reset-memorized-values action in %.


2025h 1h

A37.2 Global

read (2)

Result: After conclusion of the reset-memorized-values action, the result can be queried here.

0: error free;


2025h 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 37


04


address

A38 Global

r=2, w=2

DC power-input: This parameter is effective for the following inverters: SDS 5000 SDS 5000A MDS 5000A FDS 5000A With this parameter you set whether the inverter is only supplied via the intermediate circuit with direct voltage. Also observe the DC-link connection section in the projecting manuals SDS 5000 (ID 442277), MDS 5000 (ID 442273) and FDS 5000 (ID 442269). Groups 2 and 3 are exclusively powered via the DC link. Set A38 = 1:active for these inverters. Set A38 = 1:inactive for group 1 inverters. If you do not set a DC link coupling at all, always set parameter A38 to 0:inactive.

0: inactive; Inverter is powered by the three-phase network. 1: active; Inverter is powered with direct current exclusively via the terminals U+ and U- (size 0 to

size 2) or ZK+ and ZK- (MDS size 3).

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 09 80 00 hex

2026h 0h

A39 Global

r=2, w=2

t-max. quickstop: Maximum time available to a quick stop during enable=LOW or in the device state "fault reaction active." After this time expires, the motor is de-energized (A900 = low). This switch-off also occurs even when the quick stop has not yet been concluded.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 400 ... 32767

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 09 C0 00 hex

2027h 0h

A41 Global

read (1)

Axis-selector: Indicates the selected axis. The selected axis does not have to be the active axis.

0: Axis 1; 1: Axis 2; 2: Axis 3; 3: Axis 4; 4: inactive; The last selected axis was axis 1. 5: inactive; The last selected axis was axis 2. 6: inactive; The last selected axis was axis 3. 7: inactive; The last selected axis was axis 4.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 0A 40 00 hex

2029h 0h

A43 Global

r=3, w=3

Enable off delay: For suppression of short low-pulses on the X1.Enable. This finction is required for the connection of safety devices which use OSSD pulses for the diagnosis of switching cabability. WARNING The delay time is set always causes an A43-delayed reaction to the switch-off of the X1.Enable. This Time must be considered when a stopping distance is calculated.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 0 ... 10.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 32.8 ms); USS-Adr: 01 0A C0 00 hex

202Bh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 38


04


address

A44 Global

r=2, w=3

Enable quick-stop: If the parameter is inactive, the power pack is turned off immediately when enable = LOW. The motor coasts down. When A44 is active, a quick stop is executed when enable = LOW.

0: inactive; 1: active;

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 0B 00 00 hex

202Ch 0h

A45 Global

r=2, w=2

Quickstop end: When this parameter is set to "0:Standstill," the quick stop ends with standstill. With the setting "1:no stop," the quick stop ends when the quick stop request is deleted.

0: standstill; 1: no stop;


202Dh 0h

A51 Global

r=2, w=2

Local reference value: When local mode has been activated with the Hand key of the operator panel, the local reference value A51 is used for tipping (inching) (arrow key ">" ref. value = +A51, arrow key "<". ref. value = -A51). If the reference value potentiometer is activated with the "up/down" arrow keys, A51 is the maximum reference value speed which can be achieved.

Value range in rpm: 0 ... 300 ... 8191

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 8191 rpm); USS-Adr: 01 0C C0 00 hex

2033h 0h

A52 Global

r=2, w=3

Local accel: Reference value acceleration and braking ramp for local mode. The speed change during tipping is not dependent on the ramp settings of the next ramp generator.

Value range in rpm/s: 0 ... 1000 ... 8191

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm/s; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 8191 rpm/s); USS-Adr: 01 0D 00 00 hex

2034h 0h

A55 Global

r=2, w=3

Key hand function: With A55 = 1, the "HAND" key is enabled for turning local mode on/off. During local mode, the device enable is granted with the "I/O" key. Local mode is indicated on the display with an "L" at the bottom right. The arrow keys on the operator panel can be used to traverse with the drive enabled with "I/O." The speed reference value is calculated during speed mode from A51. In positioning applications, this corresponds to the hand speed I12. NOTE In local mode the regular enable via terminals or from the fieldbus is ignored!

0: inactive; - key has no function. 1: active; - key enabled for activation of local mode.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 0D C0 00 hex

2037h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 39


04


address

A60 Global,

OFF

r=1, w=1

Additional enable source: The additional enable signal functions the same as the enable signal on terminal X1. Both signals are AND linked. The power end state of the inverter is only enabled when both signals are HIGH. The A60 parameter specifies where the additional enable signal comes from. The selection "1:High" has the same meaning as a fixed value. With A60 = 1:High, only the enable via the terminal is active. With A60 = 3:BE1 ... 28:BE13-inverted, the additional enable is fed by the respective binary input (either direct or inverted). With A60 = 2:Parameter, the signal comes from bit 0 in parameter A180 Device Control Byte (global parameter).

1: High; 2: parameter; 3: BE1; 4: BE1-inverted; 5: BE2; 6: BE2-inverted; 7: BE3; 8: BE3-inverted; 9: BE4; 10: BE4-inverted; 11: BE5; 12: BE5-inverted; 13: BE6; 14: BE6-inverted; 15: BE7; 16: BE7-inverted; 17: BE8; 18: BE8-inverted; 19: BE9; 20: BE9-inverted; 21: BE10; 22: BE10-inverted; 23: BE11; 24: BE11-inverted; 25: BE12; 26: BE12-inverted; 27: BE13; 28: BE13-inverted;

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 0F 00 00 hex

203Ch 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 40


04


address

A61 Global,

OFF

r=1, w=1

Fault reset source: The fault reset signal triggers a fault reset. If the inverter has a malfunction, a change from LOW to HIGH resets this fault. The fault reset is not possible as long as A00 Save values is active or the cause of the fault still exists. Remember that not every fault can be acknowledged. The A61 parameter specifies where the fault reset signal comes from. With "0:Low" and "1:High," a fault reset is only possible with the <ESC> key at the device operator panel or with a LOW-HIGH-LOW change of the enable. With A61 = 3:BE1 ... 28:BE13-inverted, faults can be reset via the selected binary input. With A61 = 2:Parameter, the signal comes from bit 1 of parameter A180 Device Command Byte (global parameter).

0: Low; 1: High; 2: parameter; 3: BE1; 4: BE1-inverted; 5: BE2; 6: BE2-inverted; 7: BE3; 8: BE3-inverted; 9: BE4; 10: BE4-inverted; 11: BE5; 12: BE5-inverted; 13: BE6; 14: BE6-inverted; 15: BE7; 16: BE7-inverted; 17: BE8; 18: BE8-inverted; 19: BE9; 20: BE9-inverted; 21: BE10; 22: BE10-inverted; 23: BE11; 24: BE11-inverted; 25: BE12; 26: BE12-inverted; 27: BE13; 28: BE13-inverted;


203Dh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 41


04


address

A62 Global,

OFF

r=1, w=1

Quick stop source: The quick stop signal triggers a quick stop of the drive. With positioning mode, the acceleration specified in I17 determines the braking time. When the axis is in speed mode, the D81 parameter determines the braking time. (See also A45.) The A62 parameter specifies where the signal is coming from which causes the quick stop. "0:Low" means that no quick stop is executed. "1:High" means that the drive is permanently in quick stop mode. With A62 = 3:BE1 ... 28:BE13-inverted, the quick stop is triggered by the selected binary input. With A62 = 2:Parameter, A180 bit 2 is used as the signal source (global parameter).



203Eh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 42


04


address

A63 Global,

OFF

r=1, w=1

Axis selector 0 source: There are 2 "axis selector 0/1" signals with which one of the max. of 4 axes are selected in binary coding. The A63 parameter specifies where bit 0 for the axis selection is coming from. The possible selections "0:Low" and "1:High" are the same as fixed values. With A63 = 0:Low, the bit is set permanently to 0. With A63 = 1:High, it is permanently set to 1. With A63 = 3:BE1 ... 28:BE13-inverted, the axis selection can be made via the selected binary input. With A63 = 2:Parameter, A180, bit 3 is used as the signal source (global parameter). NOTE - Axis switchover is not possible unless the enable is off and E48 device control state is not 5:fault. - With the FDS 5000, the axes can only be used as parameter records for a motor. The

POSISwitch® AX 5000 option cannot be connected.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 0F C0 00 hex

203Fh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 43


04


address

A64 Global,

OFF

r=1, w=1

Axis selector 1 source: There are 2 "axis selector 0/1" signals with which one of the max. of 4 axes are selected in binary coding. The A64 parameter specifies where bit 0 for the axis selection is coming from. The possible selections "0:Low" and "1:High" are the same as fixed values. With A64 = 0:Low, the bit is set permanently to 0. With A64 = 1:High, it is permanently set to 1. With A64 = 3:BE1 ... 28:BE13-inverted, the axis selection can be made via the selected binary input. With A64 = 2:Parameter, A180, bit 4 is used as the signal source (global parameter). NOTE - Axis switchover is not possible unless the enable is off and E48 device control state is not 5:fault. - With the FDS 5000, the axes can only be used as parameter records for a motor. The




2040h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 44


04


address

A65 Global,

OFF

r=1, w=1

Axis disable source: The axis-disable signal deactivates all axes. The A65 parameter specifies where the signal comes from. With A65 = 3:BE1 ... 28:BE13-inverted, axis selection can be handled with the selected binary input. With A65 = 2:Parameter, A180, bit 5 is the signal source (global parameter). NOTE - Axis switchover is not possible unless the enable is off and E48 device control state is not 5:fault. - With the FDS 5000, the axes can only be used as parameter records for a motor. The




2041h 0h

A80 Global

r=2, w=2

Serial address: Specifies the address of the inverter for serial communication via X3 with POSITool or another USS master.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 31


2050h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 45


04


address

A81 Global

r=1, w=1

Serial baudrate: Specifies the baud rate for serial communication via the X3 interface. Starting with V 5.1, writing to A81 no longer changes the baud rate immediately but now not until after device OFF-ON (previously with A00 save values) or A87 activate serial baud rate = 1 (activate baud rate). This makes the reaction identical to that of the fieldbuses.

0: 9600 Baud; 1: 19200 Baud; 2: 38400 Baud; 3: 57600 Baud; 4: 115200 Baud;


2051h 0h

A82 Global

r=0, w=0

CAN baudrate: Setting of the baud rate with which the CAN-Bus will be operated. Cf. operating manual CAN, ID 441686.

0: 10 kBit/s; 1: 20 kBit/s; 2: 50 kBit/s; 3: 100 kBit/s; 4: 125 kBit/s; 5: 250 kBit/s; 6: 500 kBit/s; 7: 800 kBit/s; 8: 1000 kBit/s;


Only visible when the CAN 5000 option is installed or when CAN 5000 was selected as option module 1 in the device configuration.

2052h 0h

A83 Global

r=0, w=0

Busaddress: Specifies the device address for operation with fieldbus. A83 has no effect on communication via X3 with POSITool or another USS master.

Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 125


2053h 0h

A84 Global

read (0)

PROFIBUS baudrate: When operated with a device of the 5th generation of STÖBER inverters with option board "PROFIBUS DP," the baud rate found on the bus is indicated. Cf. operating manual PROFIBUS DP, ID 441687.

0: Not found; 1: 9.6kBit/s; 2: 19.2kBit/s; 3: 45.45kBit/s; 4: 93.75kBit/s; 5: 187.5kBit/s; 6: 500 kBit/s; 7: 1500kBit/s; 8: 3000kBit/s; 9: 6000kBit/s; 10: 12000kBit/s;


Only visible when a PROFIBUS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

2054h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 46


04


address

A85 Global

read (3)

PROFIBUS diagnostic: Indication of internal inverter diagnostic information on the PROFIBUS DP interface. See operating manual PROFIBUS DP, ID 441687. Bit Name Meaning for bit = 1 0 Shutdown fail Problem when shutting down the PROFIBUS driver software. 1 Data exchange PROFIBUS is in the cyclic data exchange state with this subscriber. 2 Wait for Param Subscriber waits to be configured by the PROFIBUS master. 3 Bus failure Fault in PROFIBUS 4 Acyc. initiate 1 An acyclic connection is established. 5 Acyc. initiate 2 A second acyclic connection is established. 6 MDS configured Subscriber is configured by PROFIBUS master. 7 Driver error Fault in PROFIBUS driver software. 8 Application ready Inverter firmware is ready for connection to PROFIBUS. 9 LED red on The red LED of the DP 5000 lights up. 10 LED green on The green LED of the DP 5000 lights up.



2055h 0h

A86 Global

read (1)

PROFIBUS configuration: The inverter offers various ways (PPO types) to transfer cyclic user data via PROFIBUS DP. These can be configured in the GSD file STOE5005.gsd on the controller (bus master). This indication parameter can be used to check which of the possible configurations was chosen.

0: No data communication via PROFIBUS started 1: PPO1: 4 PKW, 2 PZD 2: PPO2: 4 PKW, 6 PZD 3: PPO3: 0 PKW, 2 PZD 4: PPO4: 0 PKW, 6 PZD 5: PPO5: 4 PKW, 10 PZD 6: PPO2: 4 PKW, 6 PZD consis. 2 W 7: PPO4: 0 PKW, 6 PZD consis. 2 W 8: PPO5: 4 PKW, 10 PZD consis. 2 W



2056h 0h

A87 Global

r=3, w=3

Activate serial baudrate: Starting with V 5.1, writing in A81 no longer changes the baud rate immediately. The change now takes place only after device OFF/ON (previously with A00 save values) or A87 = 1 (activate baud rate). This makes the reaction the same as the reaction of the fieldbuses.


2057h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 47


04


address

A90.0 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD Setpoint Mapping Rx 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged first from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the inverter).

Value range: A00 ... A180 ... A.Gxxx.yyyy (Parameter number in plain text)

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 16 80 00 hex

205Ah 0h

A90.1 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD Setpoint Mapping Rx 2. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged second from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the inverter).

Value range: A00 ... G210 ... A.Gxxx.yyyy (Parameter number in plain text)


205Ah 1h

A90.2 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD Setpoint Mapping Rx 3. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged third from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the inverter).

Value range: A00 ... D230 ... A.Gxxx.yyyy (Parameter number in plain text)


205Ah 2h

A90.3 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD Setpoint Mapping Rx 4. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fourth from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the inverter).



205Ah 3h

A90.4 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD Setpoint Mapping Rx 5. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fifth from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the inverter).


205Ah 4h

A90.5 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD Setpoint Mapping Rx 6. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged sixth from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the inverter).


205Ah 5h

A91.0 Global

r=3, w=3

PZD Setpoint Mapping 2Rx 1. mapped Parameter: If more parameters are to be imaged than can be specified in A90, this parameter offers a possible extension. See A90.0.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 16 C0 00 hex

205Bh 0h

A91.1 Global

r=3, w=3

PZD Setpoint Mapping 2Rx 2. mapped Parameter: For extension of A90, see A90.1.


205Bh 1h

A91.2 Global

r=3, w=3

PZD Setpoint Mapping 2Rx 3. mapped Parameter: For extension of A90, See A90.2.


205Bh 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 48


04


address

A91.3 Global

r=3, w=3



205Bh 3h

A91.4 Global

r=3, w=3



205Bh 4h

A91.5 Global

r=3, w=3



205Bh 5h

A93 Global

read (1)

PZD Setpoint Len: Indicator parameter which indicates the length in bytes of the expected process data with reference values (data from PROFIBUS master to inverter) for the current parameterization.



205Dh 0h

A94.0 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD ActValue Mapping Tx 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged first in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the inverter).

Value range: A00 ... E100 ... A.Gxxx.yyyy (Parameter number in plain text)


205Eh 0h

A94.1 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD ActValue Mapping Tx 2. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged second in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the inverter).



205Eh 1h

A94.2 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD ActValue Mapping Tx 3. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged third in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the inverter).



205Eh 2h

A94.3 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD ActValue Mapping Tx 4. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fourth in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the inverter).



205Eh 3h

A94.4 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD ActValue Mapping Tx 5. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fifth in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the inverter).


205Eh 4h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 49


04


address

A94.5 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD ActValue Mapping Tx 6. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged sixth in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the inverter).


205Eh 5h

A95.0 Global

r=3, w=3

PZD ActValue Mapping 2Tx 1. mapped Parameter: When more parameters are to be imaged than can be specified in A94, this parameter offers a possible extension. See A94.0.


205Fh 0h

A95.1 Global

r=3, w=3

PZD ActValue Mapping 2Tx 2. mapped Parameter: For extension of A94, see A94.1.


205Fh 1h

A95.2 Global

r=3, w=3



205Fh 2h

A95.3 Global

r=3, w=3



205Fh 3h

A95.4 Global

r=3, w=3



205Fh 4h

A95.5 Global

r=3, w=3



205Fh 5h

A97 Global

read (1)

PZD ActValue Len: Indicator parameter which indicates the length in bytes of the current process data with actual values (data from inverter to PROFIBUS master) for the current parameterization.



2061h 0h

A98 Global

r=3, w=3

DP time stamp mode: Currently has no function

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 5



2062h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 50


04


address

A100 Global

r=3, w=3

Fieldbusscaling: The selection is made here between internal raw values and whole numbers for the representation/scaling of process data values during transmission via PZD channel. Regardless of this setting, the representation is always the whole number via PKW channel and the non cyclic parameter channel. CAUTION When "0:integer" is parameterized (scaled values), the runtime load increases significantly and it may become necessary to increase A150 cycle time to avoid the fault "57:runtime usage" or "35:Watchdog." With few exceptions, the PKW channel is always transferred in scaled format.

0: integer without point; Values are transferred as whole number in user units * 10 to the power of the number of positions after the decimal point.

1: native; Values are transferred at optimized speed in the internal inverter raw format (e.g., increments).



2064h 0h

A101 Global

r=3, w=3

Dummy-Byte: This variable is used to replace a piece of process data with the byte length when you want to test deactivation of the process variables via fieldbus. NOTE The parameter is only visible when fieldbus device control was selected in the configuration assistant.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 19 40 00 hex

2065h 0h

A102 Global

r=3, w=3

Dummy-Word: This variable is used to replace a piece of process data with the word length when you want to test deactivation of the process variables via fieldbus. NOTE The parameter is only visible when fieldbus device control was selected in the configuration assistant.


2066h 0h

A103 Global

r=3, w=3

Dummy-Doubleword: This variable is used to replace a piece of process data with the double-word length when you want to test deactivation of the process variables via fieldbus. NOTE The parameter is only visible when fieldbus device control was selected in the configuration assistant.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 19 C0 00 hex

2067h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 51


04


address

A109 Global

r=1, w=1

PZD-Timeout: To keep the inverter from continuing with the last received reference values after a failure of PROFIBUS or the PROFIBUS master, process data monitoring should be activated. The RX block monitors the regular receipt of process data telegrams (PZD) which the PROFIBUS master sends cyclically during normal operation. The A109 PZD-Timeout parameter is used to activate this monitoring function. A time is set here in milliseconds. The default setting is 200 msec. The values 65535 and 0 mean that monitoring is inactive This is recommended while the inverter is being commissioned on PROFIBUS and for service and maintenance work. Monitoring should only be activated for the running process during which a bus master cyclically sends process data to the inverter. The monitoring time must be adapted to the maximum total cycle time on PROFIBUS plus a sufficient reserve for possible delays on the bus. Sensible values are usually between 30 and 300 msec. When process data monitoring is triggered on the inverter, the fault "52:communication" is triggered. * The A109 PZD-Timeout parameter is also used for communication via USS protocol for the USS-PZD telegram.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 200 ... 65535

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 1B 40 00 hex

206Dh 0h

A110.0 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Rx 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged first from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1B 80 00 hex

206Eh 0h

A110.1 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Rx 2. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged second from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



206Eh 1h

A110.2 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Rx 3. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged third from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



206Eh 2h

A110.3 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Rx 4. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fourth from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



206Eh 3h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 52


04


address

A110.4 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Rx 5. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fifth from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.


206Eh 4h

A110.5 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Rx 6. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged sixth from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.


206Eh 5h

A113 Global

read (1)

USS PZD Rx Len: Indicator parameter which shows the length in bytes of the expected process data telegram with reference values of USS master for the current parameterization. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 255

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 1C 40 00 hex

2071h 0h

A114.0 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Tx 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged first in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1C 80 00 hex

2072h 0h

A114.1 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Tx 2. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged second in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



2072h 1h

A114.2 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Tx 3. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged third in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



2072h 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 53


04


address

A114.3 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Tx 4. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fourth in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



2072h 3h

A114.4 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Tx 5. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fifth in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.


2072h 4h

A114.5 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD Mapping Tx 6. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged sixth in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.


2072h 5h

A117 Global

read (1)

USS PZD Tx Len: Indicator parameter which indicates the length in bytes of the process data telegram to be sent with actual values to the USS master for the current parameterization. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 255

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 1D 40 00 hex

2075h 0h

A118 Global

r=1, w=1

USS PZD scaling: The selection is made here between internal raw values and whole numbers for the representation/scaling of parameter values during transmission via the process data telegram. Regardless of this setting, the representation can be selected separately via the read-parameter or write-parameter services. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

0: integer without point; Values are transferred as whole number in user units * number of positions after the decimal point to the 10th power.

1: native; Values are transferred in the internal inverter raw format (e.g., increments).


2076h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 54


04


address

A120 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Address: The IGB address of the device is entered in this parameter. Since up to 32 inverters can be connected to one IGB network, enter a value between 0 and 31 in this parameter. Remember that each IGB address can only be allocated once within an IGB network if you want to utilize the functionality of the IGB Motionbus. This is why you should use the IGB Motionbus Configuration assistant to set this parameter. Remember that the parameter does not exist unless you activate the IGB Motionbus function in step 6 of the configuration assistant.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 31

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 1E 00 00 hex

2078h 0h

A121 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB nominal number: The number of stations expected by the IGB Motionbus is entered in this parameter. If you plan to utilize the IGB Motionbus function, the parameter must be the same for all stations and must be set to the expected number of stations so that the state A155 = 3:IGB Motionbus is achieved. If the parameter is set to 0 or 1, the IGB Motionbus cannot be used.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 32


2079h 0h

A124 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB exceptional motion: When an SDS 5000 is a station on the IGB Motionbus, the device state machine cannot exit the state 1:switch on inhibit (see E48 device state) if the IGB Motionbus cannot be established (A155 IGB-state does not indicate 3:IGB Motionbus). You can activate IGB exceptional motion in A124 so that the axes can still be individually positioned during commissioning and failure of the IGB or the device. When IGB exceptional motion is activated, enabling is possible regardless of A155 IGB-state. Warning When A124 is activated, non-synchronous, undefined movements are possible which can endanger personnel and machines. When you use A124, make sure that the movements cannot injure personnel or cause property damage. Information This parameter cannot be saved. It is preset with 0:inactive each time the device boots.

0: inactive; Normal operation. When an SDS 5000 is a station on the IGB Motionbus, the device state 1:switch on inhibit can only be exited if the IGB Motionbus can be established (A155 IGB-state indicates 3:IGB Motionbus).

1: active; IGB exceptional motion. When an SDS 5000 is a station on the IGB Motionbus, the device state machine can also exit the state 1:switch on inhibit via the IGB exceptional motion (see E48 device state) if the IGB Motionbus cannot be established (A155 IGB-state does not indicate 3:IGB Motionbus). This may be necessary during maintenance, for example, when not all the inverters for the IGB Motionbus are located at the same place.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 1F 00 00 hex

207Ch 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 55


04


address

A126.0 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Producer Mapping 1. mapped Parameter: Every SDS 5000 can cyclically send ("produce") up to six selectable, PDO-capable parameters on the IGB Motionbus. These parameters are entered in the elements of the array parameter A126.x. The first parameter which is sent on the bus is entered in A126.0. Remember that each device can send a maximum of 32 bytes. The first 6 bytes are permanently assigned: - Byte 0: E48 device control state - Byte 1: E80 operating condition - Byte 2: E82 event type - Byte 3: A163.0 IGB systembits element 0 - Byte 4: A163.1 IGB systembits element 1 - Byte 5: reserved The parameters entered in A126.x are transmitted in succession, without gaps and with element 0, beginning with byte 6.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 00 hex

207Eh

Array

0h

A126.1 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Producer Mapping 2. mapped Parameter: Every SDS 5000 can cyclically send ("produce") up to six selectable, PDO-capable parameters on the IGB Motionbus. These parameters are entered in the elements of the array parameter A126.x. The second parameter which is sent on the bus is entered in A126.1. Remember that each device can send a maximum of 32 bytes. The first 6 bytes are permanently assigned: - Byte 0: E48 device control state - Byte 1: E80 operating condition - Byte 2: E82 event type - Byte 3: A163.0 IGB systembits element 0 - Byte 4: A163.1 IGB systembits element 1 - Byte 5: reserved The parameters entered in A126.x are transmitted in succession, without gaps and with element 0, beginning with byte 6.


207Eh

Array

1h

A126.2 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Producer Mapping 3. mapped Parameter: Every SDS 5000 can cyclically send ("produce") up to six selectable, PDO-capable parameters on the IGB Motionbus. These parameters are entered in the elements of the array parameter A126.x. The third parameter which is sent on the bus is entered in A126.2. Remember that each device can send a maximum of 32 bytes. The first 6 bytes are permanently assigned: - Byte 0: E48 device control state - Byte 1: E80 operating condition - Byte 2: E82 event type - Byte 3: A163.0 IGB systembits element 0 - Byte 4: A163.1 IGB systembits element 1 - Byte 5: reserved The parameters entered in A126.x are transmitted in succession, without gaps and with element 0, beginning with byte 6.


207Eh

Array

2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 56


04


address

A126.3 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Producer Mapping 4. mapped Parameter: Every SDS 5000 can cyclically send ("produce") up to six selectable, PDO-capable parameters on the IGB Motionbus. These parameters are entered in the elements of the array parameter A126.x. The 4th parameter which is sent on the bus is entered in A126.3. Remember that each device can send a maximum of 32 bytes. The first 6 bytes are permanently assigned: - Byte 0: E48 device control state - Byte 1: E80 operating condition - Byte 2: E82 event type - Byte 3: A163.0 IGB systembits element 0 - Byte 4: A163.1 IGB systembits element 1 - Byte 5: reserved The parameters entered in A126.x are transmitted in succession, without gaps and with element 0, beginning with byte 6.


207Eh

Array

3h

A126.4 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

4h

A126.5 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

5h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 57


04


address

A126.6 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

6h

A126.7 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

7h

A126.8 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

8h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 58


04


address

A126.9 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

9h

A126.10 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0A hex

207Eh

Array

000Ah

A126.11 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0B hex

207Eh

Array

000Bh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 59


04


address

A126.12 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0C hex

207Eh

Array

000Ch

A126.13 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0D hex

207Eh

Array

000Dh

A126.14 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0E hex

207Eh

Array

000Eh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 60


04


address

A126.15 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0F hex

207Eh

Array

000Fh

A126.16 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

10h

A126.17 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

11h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 61


04


address

A126.18 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

12h

A126.19 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

13h

A126.20 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

14h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 62


04


address

A126.21 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

15h

A126.22 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

16h

A126.23 Global

r=3, w=3



207Eh

Array

17h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 63


04


address

A128.0 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 1. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.0 enter the parameter to which the first value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.0. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

0h

A128.1 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 2. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.1 enter the parameter to which the second value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.1. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

1h

A128.2 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 3. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.2 enter the parameter to which the third value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.2. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

2h

A128.3 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 4. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.3 enter the parameter to which the fourth value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.3. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

3h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 64


04


address

A128.4 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 5. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.4 enter the parameter to which the fifth value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.4. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

4h

A128.5 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 6. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.5 enter the parameter to which the sixth value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.5. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

5h

A128.6 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 7. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.6 enter the parameter to which the 7th value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.6. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

6h

A128.7 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

7h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 65


04


address

A128.8 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

8h

A128.9 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

9h

A128.10 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0A hex

2080h

Array

000Ah

A128.11 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0B hex

2080h

Array

000Bh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 66


04


address

A128.12 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0C hex

2080h

Array

000Ch

A128.13 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0D hex

2080h

Array

000Dh

A128.14 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0E hex

2080h

Array

000Eh

A128.15 Global

r=3, w=3


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0F hex

2080h

Array

000Fh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 67


04


address

A128.16 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

10h

A128.17 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

11h

A128.18 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

12h

A128.19 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

13h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 68


04


address

A128.20 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 21. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.20 enter the parameter to which the 21st value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.20. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

14h

A128.21 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 22. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.21 enter the parameter to which the 22nd value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.21. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

15h

A128.22 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 23. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.22 enter the parameter to which the 23rd value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.22. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

16h

A128.23 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

17h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 69


04


address

A128.24 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

18h

A128.25 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

19h

A128.26 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

001Ah

A128.27 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

001Bh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 70


04


address

A128.28 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

001Ch

A128.29 Global

r=3, w=3



2080h

Array

001Dh

A128.30 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 31. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.30 enter the parameter to which the 31rd value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.30. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

001Eh

A128.31 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Mapping 32. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A128.31 enter the parameter to which the 32nd value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.31. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2080h

Array

001Fh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 71


04


address

A129.0 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Quelladresse 1. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A129.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A129.x. Enter the first source address in A129.0.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 00 hex

2081h

Array

0h

A129.1 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Quelladresse 2. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A129.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A129.x. Enter the second source address in A129.1.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

1h

A129.2 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Quelladresse 3. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A129.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A129.x. Enter the third source address in A129.2.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 72


04


address

A129.3 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Quelladresse 4. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A129.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A129.x. Enter the fourth source address in A129.3.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

3h

A129.4 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Quelladresse 5. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A129.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A129.x. Enter the fifth source address in A129.4.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

4h

A129.5 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Quelladresse 6. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A129.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A129.x. Enter the sixth source address in A129.5.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

5h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 73


04


address

A129.6 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Quelladresse 7. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A129.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A129.x. Enter the 7th source address in A129.6.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

6h

A129.7 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

7h

A129.8 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

8h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 74


04


address

A129.9 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

9h

A129.10 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0A hex

2081h

Array

000Ah

A129.11 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0B hex

2081h

Array

000Bh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 75


04


address

A129.12 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0C hex

2081h

Array

000Ch

A129.13 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0D hex

2081h

Array

000Dh

A129.14 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0E hex

2081h

Array

000Eh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 76


04


address

A129.15 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0F hex

2081h

Array

000Fh

A129.16 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

10h

A129.17 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

11h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 77


04


address

A129.18 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

12h

A129.19 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

13h

A129.20 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Quelladresse 21. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A129.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A129.x. Enter the 21rd source address in A129.20.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

14h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 78


04


address

A129.21 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Quelladresse 22. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A129.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A129.x. Enter the 22nd source address in A129.21.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

15h

A129.22 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

16h

A129.23 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

17h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 79


04


address

A129.24 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

18h

A129.25 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2081h

Array

19h

A129.26 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1A hex

2081h

Array

001Ah

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 80


04


address

A129.27 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1B hex

2081h

Array

001Bh

A129.28 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1C hex

2081h

Array

001Ch

A129.29 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1D hex

2081h

Array

001Dh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 81


04


address

A129.30 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1E hex

2081h

Array

001Eh

A129.31 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer Quelladresse 32. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A129.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A129.x. Enter the 32nd source address in A129.31.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1F hex

2081h

Array

001Fh

A130.0 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 1. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x an. the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.0, enter the parameter to which the first value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.0. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping attribute.


2082h

Array

0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 82


04


address

A130.1 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 2. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.1 enter the parameter to which the second value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.1. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

1h

A130.2 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 3. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.2 enter the parameter to which the third value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.2. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

2h

A130.3 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 4. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.3 enter the parameter to which the fourth value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.3. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

3h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 83


04


address

A130.4 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 5. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.4 enter the parameter to which the fifth value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.4. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

4h

A130.5 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 6. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.5 enter the parameter to which the sixth value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.5. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

5h

A130.6 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 7. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.6 enter the parameter to which the 7th value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.6. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

6h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 84


04


address

A130.7 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

7h

A130.8 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 9. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.8 enter the parameter to which the 9. value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.8. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

8h

A130.9 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

9h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 85


04


address

A130.10 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

000Ah

A130.11 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

000Bh

A130.12 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

000Ch

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 86


04


address

A130.13 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

000Dh

A130.14 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

000Eh

A130.15 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

000Fh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 87


04


address

A130.16 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

10h

A130.17 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

11h

A130.18 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

12h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 88


04


address

A130.19 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

13h

A130.20 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 21. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.20 enter the parameter to which the 21rd value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.20. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

14h

A130.21 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 22. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.21 enter the parameter to which the 22st value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.21. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

15h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 89


04


address

A130.22 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 23. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.22 enter the parameter to which the 23rd value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.22. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

16h

A130.23 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

17h

A130.24 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

18h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 90


04


address

A130.25 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

19h

A130.26 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

001Ah

A130.27 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

001Bh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 91


04


address

A130.28 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

001Ch

A130.29 Global

r=3, w=3



2082h

Array

001Dh

A130.30 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 31. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.30 enter the parameter to which the 31st value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.30. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

001Eh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 92


04


address

A130.31 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 32. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. In A130.31 enter the parameter to which the 32nd value is to be written. The length of the parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A131.31. Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic.


2082h

Array

001Fh

A131.0 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 1. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the first source address in A131.0.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 00 hex

2083h

Array

0h

A131.1 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 2. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the second source address in A131.1.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 93


04


address

A131.2 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 3. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the third source address in A131.2.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

2h

A131.3 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 4. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the fourth source address in A131.3.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

3h

A131.4 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 5. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the fifth source address in A131.4.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

4h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 94


04


address

A131.5 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 6. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the sixth source address in A131.5.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

5h

A131.6 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 7. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the 7th source address in A131.6.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

6h

A131.7 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

7h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 95


04


address

A131.8 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

8h

A131.9 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

9h

A131.10 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0A hex

2083h

Array

000Ah

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 96


04


address

A131.11 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0B hex

2083h

Array

000Bh

A131.12 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0C hex

2083h

Array

000Ch

A131.13 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0D hex

2083h

Array

000Dh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 97


04


address

A131.14 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0E hex

2083h

Array

000Eh

A131.15 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0F hex

2083h

Array

000Fh

A131.16 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

10h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 98


04


address

A131.17 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

11h

A131.18 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

12h

A131.19 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

13h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 99


04


address

A131.20 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 21. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the 21st source address in A131.20.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

14h

A131.21 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 22. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the 22nd source address in A131.21.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

15h

A131.22 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 23. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the 23rd source address in A131.22.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

16h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 100


04


address

A131.23 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

17h

A131.24 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

18h

A131.25 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131


2083h

Array

19h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 101


04


address

A131.26 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1A hex

2083h

Array

001Ah

A131.27 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1B hex

2083h

Array

001Bh

A131.28 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1C hex

2083h

Array

001Ch

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 102


04


address

A131.29 Global

r=3, w=3


Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1D hex

2083h

Array

001Dh

A131.30 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 31. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the 31st source address in A131.30.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1E hex

2083h

Array

001Eh

A131.31 Global

r=3, w=3

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 32. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus Consumer2 Map block). To do this, you must make the following entries: 1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data are to be read). Enter this information in A131.x. 2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x. At the same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. Enter the source address as a four-position value in A131.x. The first digits are the IGB address of the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A131.x. Enter the 32nd source address in A131.31.

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1F hex

2083h

Array

001Fh

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 103


04


address

A138 Global

read (3)

IGB motionbus time: This parameter indicates the global time (in milliseconds) on the IGB-Motionbus. The value runs from 0 to 232 -1 = 4 294 967 295 ms and then starts again at 0. All stations of the IGB-Motionbus run synchronously to each other and use the common device clock. With the help of this parameter, you can trigger Scope imagines on different inverters, for example, and then arrange the pictures in POSITool by time.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; PDO ; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 22 80 00 hex

208Ah 0h

A140 Global

read (0)

LCD line0: Indication as character string of the top display line.

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 01 23 00 00 hex

208Ch 0h

A141 Global

read (0)

LCD line1: Indication as character string of the bottom display line.


208Dh 0h

A142 Global

read (3)

Key code: Code of the effective key. 0=none, 1=LEFT, 2=RIGHT, 3=AB, 4=AUF, 5=#, 6=ESC, 7=F1, 8=F2, 9=F3, 10=F4, 11=HAND, 12= EIN, 13=AUS, 14=I/O


208Eh 0h

A144 Global

r=3, w=0

Remote key code: Key activations can be simulated by writing this parameter. For meaning, see A142.


2090h 0h

A150 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=3

Cycle time: Cycle time of the real-time configuration on the axis. The load of the real-time task can be checked in parameter E191 runtime usage. When the computing load becomes too great, the event "57:runtime usage" is triggered. NOTE Changing this parameter may mean that a changed configuration is detected when you go online with POSITool.

4: 1ms; 5: 2ms; 6: 4ms; 7: 8ms; 8: 16ms; 9: 32ms;


2096h 0h

A151 Global

read (2)

Session ID: The parameter indicates the current session ID which was assigned to the inverter by the Teleserver and the number which the person responsible for the machine gives the service employee (e.g., over the telephone). The service employee can only establish the remote service connection with the session ID if parameter A168 = 1:remote service with session ID is set. The entry 0 in A151 means that there is no session ID.


2097h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 104


04


address

A152 Global

read (2)

IGB position: The parameter indicates the current position of the inverter in the IGB network.

0: Single. The inverter is not connected with other SDS 5000s. 1: IGB-internal. Both RJ45 sockets are connected with other inverters (i.e., additional SDS 5000s

are connected on either side of the inverter). 2: Gateway X3 A. The inverter is located on the outer left-hand end of the IGB (i.e., a valid inverter

is not connected to its X3 A socket). 3: Gateway X3 B. The inverter is located on the outer right-hand end of the IGB (i.e., a valid

inverter is not connected to its X3 B socket) or more than 32 inverters are connected with each other. In this case, the IGB is logically terminated after the 32nd SDS 5000 and this status is indicated.


2098h 0h

A153 Global

read (2)

IGB Actual Node Number: The parameter specifies the number of stations which are currently registered with the IGB. 0: or 1: At this time no further station is connected with this inverter via IGB. 2 to 32: Indicated number corresponds to the number of inverters found in the IGB network.


2099h 0h

A154.0 Global

read (2)

IGB Port X3 A State: The parameter indicates the status of the left-hand Ethernet socket X3 A.


209Ah

Array

0h

A154.1 Global

read (2)

IGB Port X3 B State: The parameter indicates the status of the right-hand Ethernet socket X3 B.


209Ah

Array

1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 105


04


address

A155 Global

read (3)

IGB-State: The parameter indicates the IGB status of the device.

0: Booting. The IGB is booting. The connected inverters register themselves on the IGB network and synchronize themselves.

1: Single. Currently there is no IGB network which is connected with other inverters. Either this SDS did not find another inverter with which an IGB network could be established, or an already existing connection to other inverters via IGB was disconnected. The functions Remote service or Direct link can be used.

2: IGB-Running. Several inverters have established an IGB network. The functions Remote service or Direct link (with POSITool) can be used. The function IGB-Motionbus is not used or cannot be used for one of the following reasons:

- because the function was not selected during configuration - because parameter A120 IGB Address was not set uniquely for all stations - because A121 IGB nominal number was not parameterized 3: IGB-Motionbus; The IGB-Motionbus was established. This means that:: - The IGB-Motionbus function was activated on all inverters in the IGB network and - There was no multiple assignment of IGB addresses (A120 IGB address) and - Each inverter found the same number of partners in the IGB network and this number

corresponds to the expected number in A121 for every inverter and - All inverters in the IGB network are synchronized and are receiving valid data. - No inverter has reported a double error (event 52, causes 9 and 10). In this state, the addition of further inverters has no effect on the existing IGB-Motionbus. 4: Motionbus error; The state A155 = 3:IGB-Motionbus was already reached once and exited

because of an error. Either an IGB cable was disconnected so that not all SDS 5000s in the IGB network were still connected or there was a massive EMC disturbance or the synchronicity of the inverters among each other was violated.


209Bh 0h

A156 Global

read (3)

IGB Number Bootups: The parameter indicates the following information for each device: how often the device detected a bootup of the IGB since the last time its power was switched on or it triggered one itself.


209Ch 0h

A157.0 Global

read (0)

Active IP address X3A: The parameter indicates the current IP address which is used for X3 A. 0.0.0.0 is an invalid value. In this case, communication with POSITool via the interface is not possible. The active IP address is determined from the settings in A166.0 and is indicated in A157.0. Information Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved. See also the chapter system administration in the Operating Manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289).


209Dh

Array

0h

A157.1 Global

read (0)

Active IP address X3B: The parameter indicates the current IP address which is used for X3 B. 0.0.0.0 is an invalid value. In this case, communication with POSITool via the interface is not possible. The active IP address is determined from the settings in A166.1 and is indicated in A157.1. Information Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved. See also the chapter system administration in the Operating Manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289).


209Dh

Array

1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 106


04


address

A158.0 Global

read (0)

Active Subnetmask X3A: The parameter indicates the current subnetwork mask which is used for X3 A. 0.0.0.0 is an invalid value. In this case, communication via X3 A is not possible. Information Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved. See also the chapter system administration in the Operating Manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289).


209Eh

Array

0h

A158.1 Global

read (0)

Active Subnetmask X3B: The parameter indicates the current subnetwork mask which is used for X3 B. 0.0.0.0 is an invalid value. In this case, communication via X3 B is not possible. Information Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved. See also the chapter system administration in the Operating Manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289).


209Eh

Array

1h

A160 Global

read (0)

Active DNS server address: The parameter indicates the IP address of the DNS server that is used by the inverter. The server is used to break down Internet addresses into IP addresses. The source for the DNS server shown here can be: - Parameter A179 (manual setting of the IP address of the DNS server) - The applicable DHCP server in the network


20A0h 0h

A161 Global

read (0)

Active Gateway: The parameter indicates the IP address of the standard gateway used by the inverter. The standard gateway is needed for the Internet connection via X3. The source of the IP address of the standard gateway shown here can be: -Parameter A175 (manual setting of the IP address) - The applicable DHCP server in the network


20A1h 0h

A162.0 Global

read (3)

IGB Lost Frames.0: The parameter serves as a lost frames counter for the IGB-Motionbus. It indicates a value for the current lost frames of expected but not correctly received data during the millisecond cycle. When the IGB-Motionbus is running, each SDS sends its data to all other inverters once every millisecond. When at least one inverter fails to send its data cyclically, this is detected and registered in element 0 of the parameter. This counter is incremented by the value of the expected but not received data. When all data of all inverters connected to the IGB have been correctly received, the lost frame counter is decremented by 1. This parameter thus provides information on the quality of the IGB network. When this value increases rapidly, a connection cable of the IGB has probably become disconnected or an inverter has been switched off.


20A2h

Array

0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 107


04


address

A162.1 Global

read (3)

IGB Lost Frames.1: Indicates the sum of all registered errors of the IGB-Motionbus since the inverter was switched on. When the IGB-Motionbus is in operation, each SDS sends its data to all other inverters once every millisecond. This value is incremented for data which were expected and correctly received but not within the millisecond cycle. If you are using the IGB-Motionbus, the value is cleared the first time the state A155 = 3IGB-Motionbus is reached so that the not yet perfect synchronization while the IGB was booting will not be counted as an error. After this, the value of the parameter can only be cleared by turning off the inverter. This parameter thus provides information on the quality of the IGB network. When this value increases rapidly, a connection cable of the IGB has probably become disconnected or an inverter has been switched off. When this value increases irregularly, the cabling and the environment should be checked for EMC-suitable wiring.


20A2h

Array

1h

A163.0 Global

read (3)

IGB Systembits: The parameter is used for the internal activation of IGB functions. Bit 0: Activate remote service Bit 1&2: Progress of the remote service connection

0 0: Blue LED is off - no remote service requested. 0 1: Blue LED lights up like a bolt of lightning - connection to the Teleserver is being

established. 1 0: Blue LED flashes at regular intervals - device is waiting for connection of

POSITool to the Teleserver. 1 1: Blue LED on continuously - connection is completely established and remote service

can begin. Bit 3: Remote service response message Bit 4: This device is the active gateway at the moment. Bit 5: Reset inverter. Bit 6: The PLL of the device has been snapped onto the IGB. Bit 7: Remote service requires a valid session ID.


20A3h

Array

0h

A163.1 Global

read (3)

IGB Systembits: The parameter is used for the internal activation of IGB functions. Bit 0: Host controller is dead (is not living) Bit 1: Lost-frame series (double error) 0: All stations sent Motionbus data on time. 1: At least twice in succession at least one station did not send the data on time. Bit 2 - 7: Reserved


20A3h

Array

1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 108


04


address

A164.0 Global

r=3, w=3

Manual IP address for X3A: The IP address for X3 A is entered in this parameter when an IP address must be assigned manually. This is the case when, for example, no DHCP server exists. If you connect X3 A to a PC or the Ethernet network, make sure that X3 A and X3 B are assigned manual IP addresses from different subnetworks. Do not connect X3 A and X3 B at the same time with the same LAN and obtain their IP address from the DHCP server. Information Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved. See also the chapter system administration in the Operating Manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289). Information Remember that a parameter change does not take effect until: - the value is saved with action A00.0 and - the inverter has been turned off and on again.

Value range: 0 ... 192.168.3.2 ... 4294967295


20A4h

Array

0h

A164.1 Global

r=3, w=3

Manual IP address for X3B: The IP address for X3 B is entered in this parameter when an IP address must be assigned manually. This is the case when, for example, no DHCP server exists. If you connect X3 A to a PC or the Ethernet network, make sure that X3 A and X3 B are assigned manual IP addresses from different subnetworks. Do not connect X3 A and X3 B at the same time with the same LAN and obtain their IP address from the DHCP server. Information Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved. See also the chapter system administration in the Operating Manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289). Information Remember that a parameter change does not take effect until: - the value is saved with action A00.0 and - the inverter has been turned off and on again.

Value range: 0 ... 192.168.4.2 ... 4294967295


20A4h

Array

1h

A165.0 Global

r=3, w=3

Manual IP subnetmask for X3A: The subnet mask for X3 A is entered in this parameter when an IP address has to be assigned manually. This is the case when, for example, no DHCP server exists. The subnet mask is needed in addition to the IP address before you can communicate via TCP/IP. Information Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved. See also the chapter system administration in the Operating Manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289). Information Remember that a parameter change does not take effect until: - the value is saved with action A00.0 and - the inverter has been turned off and on again

Value range: 0 ... 255.255.255.0 ... 4294967295


20A5h

Array

0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 109


04


address

A165.1 Global

r=3, w=3

Manual IP subnetmask for X3B: The subnet mask for X3 B is entered in this parameter when an IP address has to be assigned manually. This is the case when, for example, no DHCP server exists. The subnet mask is needed in addition to the IP address before you can communicate via TCP/IP. Information Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved. See also the chapter system administration in the Operating Manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289). Information Remember that a parameter change does not take effect until: - the value is saved with action A00.0 and - the inverter has been turned off and on again

Value range: 0 ... 255.255.255.0 ... 4294967295


20A5h

Array

1h

A166.0 Global

r=3, w=3

IP-Address-Delivery: This parameter specifies how the IP address and subnet mask of X3 A are obtained. Information Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved. See also the chapter system administration in the Operating Manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289). Information Remember that a parameter change does not take effect until: - the value is saved with action A00.0 and - the inverter has been turned off and on again

Value range: 0 ... 1: standard ... 2


20A6h

Array

0h

A166.1 Global

r=3, w=3

IP-Address-Delivery: This parameter specifies how the IP address and subnet mask of X3 B are obtained. Information Remember that a parameter change does not take effect until: - the value is saved with action A00.0 and - the inverter has been turned off and on again Information Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved.

Value range: 0 ... 1: standard ... 2


20A6h

Array

1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 110


04


address

A167 Global

r=3, w=3

Remote Service Start: This parameter is used to set the source of the signal which you will use to start remote service. Information Read chapter integrated Bus of the Operating manual SDS 5000 before you start remote service! Remote service is started by a positive edge change (change from low to high) of the signal which you set in this parameter. The signal must then remain high. Remote service is finished as soon as the high level can no longer be detected on the source. Proceed as follows to control remote service via fieldbus: 1. Set A167 = 2:A181 Bit 0. In this case, parameter A181 Bit 0 is the signal source. 2. Now describe this source via fieldbus. Remember that you cannot start remote service while a direct connection from PC to inverter exists! Information This parameter determines the behavior of the inverter during remote service. It can be accidentally overwritten by a remote service procedure which may change the parameter to its disadvantage (termination of the connection, loss of data). There are two ways to prevent accidental changes: - While the connection is being established, read the data from the inverter. - Use a project file related to the inverter in which this parameter is correctly set.

0: inactive; No remote service wanted. 1: A800; Remote service is started by the parameter A800. 2: A181-Bit 0; Remote service is started by bit 0 in parameter A181 Device Control Byte 2. 3: BE1; Remote service is started by the signal on binary input 1. 4: BE1-inverted; Remote service is started by the inverted signal on binary input 1. 5: BE2; Remote service is started by the signal on binary input 2. 6: BE2-inverted; Remote service is started by the inverted signal on binary input 2. 7: BE3; Remote service is started by the signal on binary input 3. 8: BE3-inverted; Remote service is started by the inverted signal on binary input 3. 9: BE4; Remote service is started by the signal on binary input 4. 10: BE4-inverted; Remote service is started by the inverted signal on binary input 4. 11: BE5; Remote service is started by the signal on binary input 5. 12: BE5-inverted; Remote service is started by the inverted signal on binary input 5. 13: BE6; Die Fernwartung wird durch das Signal an Binäreingang 6 gestartet. 14: BE6-inverted; Remote service is started by the inverted signal on binary input 6. 15: BE7; Remote service is started by the signal on binary input 7. 16: BE7-inverted; Die Fernwartung wird durch das invertierte Signal an Binäreingang 7 gestartet. 17: BE8; Remote service is started by the signal on binary input 8. 18: BE8-inverted; Remote service is started by the inverted signal on binary input 8. 19: BE9; Die Fernwartung wird durch das Signal an Binäreingang 9 gestartet. 20: BE9-inverted; Remote service is started by the inverted signal on binary input 9. 21: BE10; Die Fernwartung wird durch das Signal an Binäreingang 10 gestartet. 22: BE10-inverted; Remote service is started by the inverted signal on binary input 10. 23: BE11; Remote service is started by the signal on binary input 11. 24: BE11-inverted; Die Fernwartung wird durch das invertierte Signal an Binäreingang 11 gestartet. 25: BE12; Remote service is started by the signal on binary input 12. 26: BE12-inverted; Die Fernwartung wird durch das invertierte Signal an Binäreingang 12 gestartet. 27: BE13; Remote service is started by the signal on binary input 13. 28: BE13-inverted; Remote service is started by the inverted signal on binary input 13.


20A7h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 111


04


address

A168 Global

r=3, w=3

Remote service with session-ID option: This parameter is used to set whether remote service is to be performed with a session ID. The session ID makes remote service more secure. When the value 1 is entered in this parameter for the inverter to which the link to the Internet is connected, the POSITool user must also enter the session ID before starting remote service. CAUTION This parameter is only evaluated for the inverter which is the active gateway. The setting of this parameter is ignored for all other inverters. This means that the parameter must always be set for the inverter which is the active gateway when remote service with session ID is used. Information This parameter determines the behavior of the inverter during remote service. It can be accidentally overwritten by a remote service procedure which may change the parameter to its disadvantage (termination of the connection, loss of data). There are two ways to prevent accidental changes: - While the connection is being established, read the data from the inverter. - Use a project file related to the inverter in which this parameter is correctly set.

0: inactive; The service technician does not need a session ID to establish a remote service connection.

1: active; The service technician needs a session ID to establish a remote service connection.


20A8h 0h

A169 Global

read (3)

Remote service advance: The parameter indicates the progress of the establishment of the connection is. The parameter supplies the same information as the blue LED on the front of the device.

0: noRemoteService. Remote service is not desired. 1: connectToTeleser. The connection to the Teleserver is being established. 2: waitToPOSITool. The device is waiting for the connection to POSITool. 3: POSIToolOnline. The connection is established and remote service can begin.


20A9h 0h

A170 Global

read (3)

Remote Service Acknowledge: The parameter changes bit 0 at the same frequency as the

blue LED on the front with the following meaning:

-Bit 0 = 1:LED on

-Bit 0 = 0:LED off You can output this parameter to a binary output and then evaluate the signal of the blue LED. Information This parameter can be used to represent the status of the blue LED on an external signal lamp.


20AAh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 112


04


address

A175 Global

r=3, w=3

Default gateway: This parameter is used to specify the IP address of the gateway for X3 A when this value cannot be obtained from a DHCP server. There are two ways to do this: When you enter an IP address in this parameter other than "0.0.0.0," this IP address is used by

the inverter without any further checks. When you enter the value "0.0.0.0" in this parameter, there are two possibilities: - If the value "1" or "2" is entered in parameter A166, the inverter automatically tries to obtain the

IP address of the standard gateway from the responsible DHCP server. - If the value "0" is entered in parameter A166, no standard gateway is available on the inverter!

Please remember that the DHCP server usually also supplies the IP address of the standard gateway. If you want the IP address of the standard gateway to be automatically set by the DHCP server, please be sure to enter the value "0.0.0.0" here. Otherwise the IP address of the standard gateway which is supplied by the DHCP server will be ignored.

Information Remember that a change in the parameter does not take effect until you: - save the value with the action A00.0 and - turn the inverter off and on again. Information Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved.

Value range: 0 ... 0.0.0.0 ... 4294967295

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 2B C0 00 hex

20AFh 0h

A176 Global

r=3, w=3

Teleserver Option: This parameter is used to set whether you want a remote service connection via Internet or a local network (LAN). Information This parameter determines the behavior of the inverter during remote service. It can be accidentally overwritten by a remote service procedure which may change the parameter to its disadvantage (termination of the connection, loss of data). There are two ways to prevent accidental changes: - While the connection is being established, read the data from the inverter. - Use a project file related to the inverter in which this parameter is correctly set.

0: Internet. A remote service connection is established via the Internet. 1: LAN. A remote service connection is established via the local network. In this case, be sure to

consider parameter A177.


20B0h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 113


04


address

A177 Global

r=3, w=3

Name LAN teleserver: If you want to establish a remote service connection via the local network, enter the address of the computer here on which the LAN Teleserver will be running. The address can be entered in two formats: When the IP address is known, it can be entered directly (e.g., "192.168.3.2"). When the name of the LAN Teleserver is known and the inverter has an IP address via a valid

DNS server, the name of the LAN Teleserver can also be entered. The inverter then determines the IP address automatically.

CAUTION When the name of the LAN Teleserver is entered, this must be entered with the fully qualified domain name. Example: The PC on which the LAN Teleserver is running has the name "PcLanTeleserver." The PC is assigned to the domain with the domain address "MuellerGmbh.de." The following fully qualified domain name must then be entered in the parameter: "PcLanTeleserver.MuellerGmbh.de" Please also contact your network administrator in this matter. Information This parameter determines the behavior of the inverter during remote service. It can be accidentally overwritten by a remote service procedure which may change the parameter to its disadvantage (termination of the connection, loss of data). There are two ways to prevent accidental changes: - While the connection is being established, read the data from the inverter. - Use a project file related to the inverter in which this parameter is correctly set.

Fieldbus: Type: Str80; USS-Adr: 01 2C 40 00 hex

20B1h 0h

A178 Global

read (3)

Error remote service: The parameter indicates the status of remote service with a hexadecimal number (length: 32 bits). One diagnostic value is coded in each of the four bytes. For the meaning of the diagnostic values, see the operating manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289).

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 2C 80 00 hex

20B2h 0h

A179 Global

r=3, w=3

Manual DNS server IP address: This parameter is used to configure the setting of the DNS server IP address on the inverter. There are two ways to do this: When you enter an IP address in this parameter other than "0.0.0.0," this IP address is used by

the inverter without any further checks. When you enter the value "0.0.0.0" in this parameter, there are two possibilities: - If the value "1" or "2" is entered in parameter A166, the inverter automatically tries to obtain the

IP address of the DNS server from the responsible DHCP server. - If the value "0" is entered in parameter A166, no DNS server is available on the inverter!

Please remember that the DHCP server usually also supplies the IP address of the DNS server. If you want the IP address of the DNS server to be automatically set by the DHCP server, please be sure to enter the value "0.0.0.0" here. Otherwise the IP address of the DNS server which is supplied by the DHCP server will be ignored. If you have questions concerning your DHCP or DNS server, please contact your network administrator.

Value range: 0 ... 0.0.0.0 ... 4294967295

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 2C C0 00 hex

20B3h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 114


04


address

A180 Global

r=2, w=2

Device control byte: This byte contains control signals for device control. It is designed for fieldbus communication. The particular bit is only active when 2:Parameter is set in the related source selector (A60 ... A65). The signals can be monitored directly via the parameters A300 ... A305 on the device controller.

Bit 0: Additional enable (A300): Takes effect in addition to terminal enable. Must be HIGH. Removal of the enable can also trigger a quick stop (set enable quick stop A44 =1:active). The brakes are applied and the end stage switches off.

Bit 1: Fault reset (A301): Reset faults Bit 2: Quick stop (A302): The active ramp is I17 (for positioning control) or D81 (speed control). Bit 3,4: Axis selector 0 (A303), axis selector 1 (A304): With multiple-axis operation, the axis to be

activated is selected here. Bit4 Bit3 Axis 0 0 Axis 1 0 1 Axis 2 1 0 Axis 3 1 1 Axis 4 Bit 5: Axis disable (A305): Deactivate all axes. No motor on. Bit 6: Open the brake unconditionally. Bit 7: Bit 7 in A180 (device control byte) is copied to bit 7 in E200 (device status byte) during each

cycle of the device controller. When bit 7 is toggled in A180, the host PLC is informed of a concluded communication cycle (send, evaluate and return data). This makes cycle time-optimized communication (e.g., with PROFIBUS) possible. The handshake bit 7 in A180 / E200 supplies no information on whether the application reacted to the process data. Depending on the application, other routines are provided (e.g., motion ID for command positioning).

Value range: 0 ... 00000001bin ... 255 (Representation binary)

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 2D 00 00 hex

20B4h 0h

A181 Global

r=3, w=3

Device Control Byte 2: This parameter is used to control remote service via fieldbus. Proceed as follows: 1. Set A167 = 2:Parameter. In this case, parameter A181, bit 0 is the signal source. 2. Describe this source via fieldbus. Remember that since bits 1 to 7 of this parameter are reserved, they may not be write-accessed. Information This parameter determines the behavior of the inverter during remote service. It can be accidentally overwritten by a remote service procedure which may change the parameter to its disadvantage (termination of the connection, loss of data). There are two ways to prevent accidental changes: - While the connection is being established, read the data from the inverter. - Use a project file related to the inverter in which this parameter is correctly set.



20B5h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 115


04


address

A182 Global

read (3)

IGB Motionbus conditions: This parameter indicates which of the conditions which are necessary for correct operation of the IGB Motionbus have been fulfilled. Bit 0: Indicates that the inverter processor is working correctly for other IGB subscribers. Bit 1: Indicates that the inverter processor is working correctly. Bit 2: Indicates that the other inverters have been correctly synchronized in IGB and that their

PLLs are engaged. Bit 3: Indicates that the inverter has been correctly synchronized and that its PLL is engaged. Bit 4: Indicates that the cyclical data has been correctly processed by the other IGB subscribers. Bit 5: Indicates, that the cyclical data has been correctly processed. Bit 6: Indicates whether the number of devices detected corresponds to the parameterized

number Bit 7: Indicates whether the parameter A120 IGB Address has been correctly set. The address must have a valid value and be unique in all inverters. Bit 8: Indicates whether the parameter A121 (nominal number) has been correctly set. The nominal number must have a valid value and be identical in all inverters.


20B6h 0h

A200 Global

r=3, w=3

COB-ID SYNC Message: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter expects the receipt of the SYNC telegrams from CAN-Bus. For most applications the default value should not be changed.

Value range: 1 ... 128 ... 2047



20C8h 0h

A201 Global

r=3, w=3

Communication Cycle Period: When SYNCs are specified in a fixed time frame for transmission of the PDO telegrams, A201 can be used for monitoring. The entry of 0 μsec means the parameter is deactivated. When activated the cycle time of the SYNC telegrams is entered in μsec. The threshold value for triggering a timeout is 150 % of this value. Monitoring takes place when the NMT status is Operational and at least one SYNC telegram was received. When the threshold value is exceeded, fault 52:Communication with cause 2:CAN SYNC Error is triggered. The red LED of the CAN 5000 option board flashes three times briefly and then goes off for 1 second. Monitoring is deactivated when the NMT status Operational is exited and the entered value is set to 0 μsec.

Value range in us: 0 ... 0 ... 32000000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1us; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 32 40 00 hex


20C9h 0h

A203 Global

r=1, w=1

Guard Time: The master monitors the slaves with the node-guarding routine. The master polls node-guarding telegrams cyclically. Parameter A203 specifies the cycle time in msec. The routine is inactive when a cycle time of 0 msec is set.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 0 ... 4000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 32 C0 00 hex


20CBh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 116


04


address

A204 Global

r=1, w=1

Life Time Factor: The parameter A204 is used during the node guard routine to monitor the master. When the queries of the master do not arrive at the slave within a certain amount of time, the inverter triggers the life guard event (i.e., fault 52:communication). The time is calculated by multiplying the parameters A204 and A203.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 255



20CCh 0h

A207 Global

r=3, w=3

COB-ID Emergency Object: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter sends the emergency telegrams to the CAN-Bus. Usually the default value should not be changed since this also deactivates the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set.

Value range: 0 ... 128 ... 4294967295



20CFh 0h

A208 Global

r=3, w=3

Inhibit Time Emergency: Specifies the time in multiples of 100 µsec which the inverter must at least wait between the sending of emergency telegrams.

Value range in 100 us: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1·100 us; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 34 00 00 hex


20D0h 0h

A210 Global

r=1, w=1

Producer Heartbeat Time: In case the heartbeat protocol is to be used by the master for station monitoring on the CAN-Bus, this time specifies in msec how frequently the inverter will send heartbeat messages.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 0 ... 65535

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 34 80 00 hex


20D2h 0h

A211 Global

r=3, w=3

Verify Config. Configuration date: The date on which the configuration and parameterization were finished can be stored here as the number of days since 01.01.1984.

Value range in days since 01.01.1984: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1days since 01.01.1984; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 34 C0 00 hex


20D3h 0h

A212 Global

r=3, w=3

Verify Config. Configuration time: The time at which the configuration and parameterization were finished can be stored here as the number of msec since 0:00 hours.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



20D4h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 117


04


address

A213 Global

r=1, w=1

Fieldbusscaling: The selection is made here between internal raw values and whole numbers for the representation/scaling of process data values during transmission via the four PDO channels. Regardless of this setting, the representation via SDO is always the whole number. CAUTION When "0:integer" is parameterized (scaled values), the runtime load increases significantly and it may become necessary to increase A150 cycle time to avoid the fault "57:runtime usage" or "35:Watchdog."

0: integer without point; Values are transmitted as whole numbers in user units * the number of positions after the decimal place to the power of 10.

1: native; Values are transferred at optimized speed in internal inverter raw format (e.g., increments).


Only visible when option module CAN 5000 or ECS 5000 was recognized.

20D5h 0h

A214 Global

r=3, w=3

CAN Bit Sample-Access-Point: Specifies the position at which the bits received by CAN-Bus are scanned. Arbitrary changes of the default value may cause transmission problems.

-1: CIA; 0: SAP-1; 1: SAP-2; 2: SAP-3;



20D6h 0h

A218.0 Global

r=2, w=2

2. Server SDO Parameter . COB-ID Client -> Server: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter expects the telegrams for the 2nd SDO channel with the requests from the client. As soon as a station with a node-ID > 31 is active on the CAN-Bus, this parameter must be changed and the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set is also disabled. If the value is 0 or if bit 31 is 1, this SDO channel is turned off.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



20DAh 0h

A218.1 Global

r=2, w=2

2. Server SDO Parameter . COB-Id Server -> Client: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter sends the telegrams for the 2nd SDO channel with the responses from the client. As soon as a station with a node-ID > 31 is active on the CAN-Bus, this parameter must be changed and the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set is also disabled. If the value is 0 or if bit 31 is 1, this SDO channel is turned off.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



20DAh 1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 118


04


address

A218.2 Global

r=2, w=2

2. Server SDO Parameter . Node-ID of SDO's Client: The client which uses this SDO channel can enter its own node ID here for information purposes.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 127



20DAh 2h

A219.0 Global

r=2, w=2

3. Server SDO Parameter . COB-ID Client -> Server: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter sends the telegrams for the 3rd SDO channel with the requests from the client. As soon as a station with a node-ID > 31 is active on the CAN-Bus, this parameter must be changed and the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set is also disabled. If the value is 0 or if bit 31 is 1, this SDO channel is turned off.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



20DBh 0h

A219.1 Global

r=2, w=2

3. Server SDO Parameter . COB-Id Server -> Client: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter sends the telegrams for the 3rd SDO channel with the responses to the client. As soon as a station with a node-ID > 31 is active on the CAN-Bus, this parameter must be changed and the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set is also disabled. If the value is 0 or if bit 31 is 1, this SDO channel is turned off.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



20DBh 1h

A219.2 Global

r=2, w=2

3. Server SDO Parameter . Node-ID of SDO's Client: The client which uses this SDO channel can enter its own node ID here for information purposes.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 127



20DBh 2h

A220.0 Global

r=2, w=2

4. Server SDO Parameter . COB-ID Client -> Server: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter expects the telegrams for the 4th SDO channel with the requests from the client. As soon as a station with a node-ID > 31 is active on the CAN-Bus, this parameter must be changed and the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set is also disabled. If the value is 0 or if bit 31 is 1, this SDO channel is turned off. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



20DCh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 119


04


address

A220.1 Global

r=2, w=2

4. Server SDO Parameter . COB-ID Server -> Client: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter sends the telegrams for the 4th SDO channel with the responses to the client. As soon as a station with a node-ID > 31 is active on the CAN-Bus, this parameter must be changed and the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set is also disabled. If the value is 0 or if bit 31 is 1, this SDO channel is turned off. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



20DCh 1h

A220.2 Global

r=2, w=2

4. Server SDO Parameter . Node-Id of SDO's Client: The client which uses this SDO channel can enter its own node ID here for information purposes. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 127



20DCh 2h

A221.0 Global

r=2, w=2

1. rec. PDO Parameter . COB-ID: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter expects the telegrams for the 1st PDO channel from the master. Usually the default value should not be changed since this also disables the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set. If the value is 0 or bit 31 is 1, this service is off. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 512 ... 4294967295



20DDh 0h

A221.1 Global

r=2, w=2

1. rec. PDO Parameter . Transmission Type: Specifies the type of transmission (with or without SYNC, etc.) when received process data from this 1st PDO channel are accepted by the inverter. See operating manual CAN, ID 441686. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 254 ... 255



20DDh 1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 120


04


address

A222.0 Global

r=2, w=2

2. rec. PDO Parameter . COB-ID: Identifier for the receiving direction of the 2nd PDO channel. See A221.0 NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 768 ... 4294967295



20DEh 0h

A222.1 Global

r=2, w=2

2. rec. PDO Parameter . Transmission Type: Transmission type for 2nd PDO channel. See A221.1. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 254 ... 255



20DEh 1h

A225.0 Global

r=1, w=1

1. rec. PDO Mapping Rx. 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged first from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.




20E1h 0h

A225.1 Global

r=1, w=1

1. rec. PDO Mapping Rx. 2. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged second from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.




20E1h 1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 121


04


address

A225.2 Global

r=1, w=1

1. rec. PDO Mapping Rx. 3. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged third from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.




20E1h 2h

A225.3 Global

r=1, w=1

1. rec. PDO Mapping Rx. 4. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fourth from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.




20E1h 3h

A225.4 Global

r=1, w=1

1. rec. PDO Mapping Rx. 5. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fifth from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



20E1h 4h

A225.5 Global

r=1, w=1

1. rec. PDO Mapping Rx. 6. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged sixth from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction). NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



20E1h 5h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 122


04


address

A226.0 Global

r=2, w=2

2. rec. PDO Mapping Rx. 1. mapped Parameter: For 2nd PDO channel, see A225.0. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



20E2h 0h

A226.1 Global

r=2, w=2




20E2h 1h

A226.2 Global

r=2, w=2




20E2h 2h

A226.3 Global

r=2, w=2




20E2h 3h

A226.4 Global

r=2, w=2




20E2h 4h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 123


04


address

A226.5 Global

r=2, w=2




20E2h 5h

A229.0 Global

r=2, w=2

1. trans. PDO Parameter . COB-ID: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter sends the telegrams for the 1st PDO channel to the master. Usually the default value should not be changed since the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set is also disabled. If the value is 0 or bit 31 is 1, this service is off. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 384 ... 4294967295



20E5h 0h

A229.1 Global

r=2, w=2

1. trans. PDO Parameter . Transmission Type: Specifies the transmission type (with or without SYNC, etc.) when process data are sent via this 1st PDO channel. See operating manual CAN, ID 441686. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 254 ... 255



20E5h 1h

A229.2 Global

r=2, w=2

1. trans. PDO Parameter . Inhibit Time: Specifies the time in multiples of 100 µsec which the inverter must adhere to between sending PDO telegrams on channel 1. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range in 100 us: 0 ... 0 ... 65535



20E5h 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 124


04


address

A229.3 Global

r=2, w=2

1. trans. PDO Parameter . Event Timer: Not supported at present.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 0 ... 65535



20E5h 3h

A230.0 Global

r=2, w=2

2. trans. PDO Parameter . COB-ID: Identifier for sending direction of the 2nd PDO channel. See A230.1. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 640 ... 4294967295



20E6h 0h

A230.1 Global

r=2, w=2

2. trans. PDO Parameter . Transmission Type: Transmission type for 2nd PDO channel. See A229.1. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range: 0 ... 254 ... 255



20E6h 1h

A230.2 Global

r=2, w=2

2. trans. PDO Parameter . Inhibit Time: Pause time for PDO channel 2. See A229.2. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.

Value range in 100 us: 0 ... 0 ... 65535



20E6h 2h

A230.3 Global

r=2, w=2

2. trans. PDO Parameter . Event Timer: Not supported at present.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 0 ... 65535



20E6h 3h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 125


04


address

A233.0 Global

r=1, w=1

1. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged first on the 1st PDO channel for sending. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 3A 40 00 hex


20E9h 0h

A233.1 Global

r=1, w=1

1. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 2. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged second on the 1st PDO channel for sending. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.




20E9h 1h

A233.2 Global

r=1, w=1

1. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 3. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged third on the 1st PDO channel for sending. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.




20E9h 2h

A233.3 Global

r=1, w=1

1. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 4. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fourth on the 1st PDO channel for sending. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.




20E9h 3h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 126


04


address

A233.4 Global

r=1, w=1

1. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 5. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged fifth on the 1st PDO channel for sending. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



20E9h 4h

A233.5 Global

r=1, w=1

1. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 6. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged sixth on the 1st PDO channel for sending. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



20E9h 5h

A234.0 Global

r=2, w=2

2. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 1. mapped Parameter: For 2nd PDO channel. See A233.0. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



20EAh 0h

A234.1 Global

r=2, w=2




20EAh 1h

A234.2 Global

r=2, w=2




20EAh 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 127


04


address

A234.3 Global

r=2, w=2




20EAh 3h

A234.4 Global

r=2, w=2




20EAh 4h

A234.5 Global

r=2, w=2




20EAh 5h

A237 Global

read (1)

1. rec. PDO-Mapped Len: Indication parameter indicating in bytes the size of the expected receive telegram of the 1st PDO channel for the current parameterization. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



20EDh 0h

A238 Global

read (2)

2. rec. PDO-Mapped Len: For 2nd PDO channel. See A237. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



20EEh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 128


04


address

A241 Global

read (1)

1. trans. PDO-Mapped Len: Indication parameter indicating in bytes the size of the expected send telegram of the 1st PDO channel for the current parameterization. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



20F1h 0h

A242 Global

read (2)

2. trans. PDO-Mapped Len: For 2nd PDO channel. See A241. NOTE The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming.



20F2h 0h

A245 Global

r=3, w=3

CAN diagnostic: Indication of internal inverter diagnostic information via the CAN-Bus interface. Bits 0-2: NMT state, state of the CANopen® state machine: 0 = Inactive, 1 = Reset application, 2 = Reset communication, 3 = Bootup, 4 = Pre-operational, 5 = Stopped 6 = Operational Bit 3: CAN controller indicates warning level. Bit 4: CAN controller indicates bus off. Bit 5: Toggle bit: Telegrams are being received on SDO channel 1. Bit 6: Memory bit: Receiving FIFO of SDO channel 1 has exceeded the half-full filling level. (Client is sending telegrams faster than they can be processed by the inverter.) Bit 7: Toggle bit: Telegrams are being received on PDO channel 1 (only for Operational). Bit 8: Memory bit: Receiving FIFO of PDO channel 1 has exceeded the half-full filling level (only

for Operational). (Client is sending telegrams faster than they can be processed by the inverter.) Bit 9: Current state of the red LED on CAN 5000, is 1 when LED is on. Bit 10: Current state of the green LED on CAN 5000, is 1 when LED is on. Bit 11: PDO sync relationship error: PDO1 is using sync. All bits can be briefly deleted by sending NMT command Reset Node.



20F5h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 129


04


address

A252.0 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 2 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 2 controls the memory size and the access of the inverter processor to the portion of memory in the EtherCAT® Slave Controller (ESC) in which the process output data with reference values are sent by the EtherCAT® master to the inverter. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this Sync-Manager. This array contains four elements of the data type U16. We recommend entering the CANopen® index of parameter A225 (1600 hex) in element 0 of this parameter. The indices of the parameters A226 (1601 hex), A227 (1602 hex) or A228 (1603 hex) can then be entered as necessary in the other elements. The value 0 indicates a blank entry.

Value range: 0 ... 1600hex ... 65535 (Representation hexadecimal)



20FCh

Array

0h

A252.1 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 2 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 2 controls the memory size and the access of the inverter processor to the portion of memory in the EtherCAT® Slave Controller (ESC) in which the process output data with reference values are sent by the EtherCAT® master to the inverter. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this Sync-Manager. This array contains four elements of the data type U16. We recommend entering the CANopen® index of parameter A226 (1601 hex) in element 1 of this parameter. The indices of the parameters A225 (1600 hex), A227 (1602 hex) or A228 (1603 hex) can then be entered as necessary in the other elements. The value 0 indicates a blank entry.




20FCh

Array

1h

A252.2 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 2 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 2 controls the memory size and the access of the inverter processor to the portion of memory in the EtherCAT® Slave Controller (ESC) in which the process output data with reference values are sent by the EtherCAT® master to the inverter. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this Sync-Manager. This array contains four elements of the data type U16. We recommend entering the value 0 (for unused) in element 2 of this parameter because the indices of parameters A225 (1600 hex) and A226 (1601 hex) have already been entered as default values in elements 0 and 1. Up to 12 parameters can already be transferred in this way. If more process data are required, the CANopen® index of parameter A227 (1602 hex) can be specified here. However, remember that the corresponding block 100921 ECS PDO3-rx Map must also be instanced here.




20FCh

Array

2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 130


04


address

A252.3 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 2 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 2 controls the memory size and the access of the inverter processor to the portion of memory in the EtherCAT® Slave Controller (ESC) in which the process output data with reference values are sent by the EtherCAT® master to the inverter. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this Sync-Manager. This array contains four elements of the data type U16. We recommend entering the value 0 (for unused) in element 3 of this parameter because the indices of parameters A225 (1600 hex) and A226 (1601 hex) have already been entered as default values in elements 0 and 1 and sometimes the index of A227 (1603 hex) in element 2. Up to 18 parameters can already be transferred in this way. If more process data are required, the CANopen® index of parameter A228 (1603 hex) can be specified here. However, remember that the corresponding block 100923 ECS PDO4-rx Map must also be instanced here.




20FCh

Array

3h

A253.0 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 3 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 3 controls the memory size and the access of the inverter processor to the portion of memory in the EtherCAT® Slave Controller (ESC) in which the process input data with actual values are sent by the inverter to the EtherCAT® master. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this Sync-Manager. This array contains four elements of the data type U16. We recommend entering the CANopen® index of parameter A233 (1A00 hex) in element 0 of this parameter. The indices of the parameters A234 (1A01 hex), A235 (1A02 hex) or A236 (1A03 hex) can then be entered as necessary in the other elements. The value 0 indicates a blank entry.

Value range: 0 ... 1A00hex ... 65535 (Representation hexadecimal)



20FDh

Array

0h

A253.1 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 3 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 3 controls the memory size and the access of the inverter processor to the portion of memory in the EtherCAT® Slave Controller (ESC) in which the process input data with actual values are sent by the inverter to the EtherCAT® master. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this Sync-Manager. This array contains four elements of the data type U16. We recommend entering the CANopen® index of parameter A234 (1A01 hex) in element 1 of this parameter. The indices of the parameters A233 (1A00 hex), A235 (1A02 hex) or A236 (1604 hex) can then be entered as necessary in the other elements. The value 0 indicates a blank entry.

Value range: 0 ... 1A01hex ... 65535 (Representation hexadecimal)



20FDh

Array

1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 131


04


address

A253.2 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 3 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 3 controls the memory size and the access of the inverter processor to the portion of memory in the EtherCAT® Slave Controller (ESC) in which the process input data with actual values are sent by the inverter to the EtherCAT® master. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this Sync-Manager. This array contains four elements of the data type U16. We recommend entering the value 0 (for unused) in element 2 of this parameter because the indices of parameters A233 (1A00 hex) and A234 (1A01 hex) have already been entered as default values in elements 0 and 1. Up to 12 parameters can already be transferred in this way. If more process data are required, the CANopen® index of parameter A235 (1A02 hex) can be specified here. However, remember that the corresponding block 100922 ECS PDO3-rx Map must also be instanced here.




20FDh

Array

2h

A253.3 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 3 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 3 controls the memory size and the access of the inverter processor to the portion of memory in the EtherCAT® Slave Controller (ESC) in which the process input data with actual values are sent by the inverter to the EtherCAT® master. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this Sync-Manager. This array contains four elements of the data type U16. We recommend entering the value 0 (for unused) in element 3 of this parameter because the indices of parameters A233 (1A00 hex) and A234 (1A01 hex) have already been entered as default values in elements 0 and 1 and sometimes the index of A235 (1A03 hex) in element 2. Up to 18 parameters can already be transferred in this way. If more process data are required, the CANopen® index of parameter A236 (1A03 hex) can be specified here. However, remember that the corresponding block 100924 ECS PDO4-tx Map must also be instanced here.




20FDh

Array

3h

A255 Global

read (3)

EtherCAT® Device State: Display of diagnostic information about the status of the EtherCAT® state machine in the ECS 5000 interface connection. Hexadecimal values are displayed. For this purpose, the "AL status" register of the EtherCAT® slave controller is evaluated. The following values are possible: 0x0001 Init State 0x0002 Pre-Operational State 0x0003 Requested Bootstrap State (not supported) 0x0004 Safe-Operational State 0x0008 Operational State 0x0011 Error for State INIT 0x0012 Error for State PREOP 0x0013 Error for State BOOTSTRAP (not supported) 0x0014 Error for State Safe-Operational 0x0018 Error for State Operational



20FFh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 132


04


address

A256 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Address: Shows the address of the inverter within the EtherCAT® network. The value is usually specified by the EtherCAT® master. It is either derived from position of the station within the EtherCAT® ring or is purposely selected by the user. Values usually start at 1001 hexadecimal (1001h is the first device after the EtherCAT® master, 1002h is the second, and so on).

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 65535



2100h 0h

A257.0 Global

read (3)

EtherCAT® Diagnosis: Indication of internal inverter diagnostic information on the EtherCAT interface ECS 5000 and the connection to the EtherCAT®.

A text with the following format is indicated in element 0: "StX ErX L0X L1X"

Part 1 of the text means: St Abbreviation of EtherCAT® Device State (State of the EtherCAT® State Machine) X Digit for state: 1 Init State

2 Pre-operational state (3 Requested Bootstrap State is not supported.) 4 Safe-operational state 8 Operational state

Part 2 of the text means: Er Abbreviation of EtherCAT® Device Error X Digit for state: 0 No error

1 Booting error, ECS 5000 error 2 Invalid configuration, select configuration with EtherCAT® in

POSI Tool. 3 Unsolicited state change, inverter has changed state by itself. 4 Watchdog, no more data from EtherCAT® even though timeout

time expired. 5 PDI watchdog, host processor timeout

Part 3 of the text means: L0 Abbreviation for LinkOn of port 0 (the RJ45 socket labeled "IN") X Digit for state: 0 No link (no connection to other EtherCAT® device)

1 Link detected (connection to other device found) Part 4 of the text means: L1 Abbreviation for LinkOn of port 1 (the RJ45 socket labeled "OUT") X Digit for state: 0 No link (no connection to other EtherCAT® device)

1 Link detected (connection to other device found)



2101h

Array

0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 133


04


address

A257.1 Global

read (3)

EtherCAT® Diagnosis: Indication of internal inverter diagnostic information on the EtherCAT® interface ECS 5000 and the connection to the EtherCAT®. A text with the following format is indicated in element 1: „L0 xx L1 xx" Part 1 of the text means: L0 Abbreviation for Link Lost Counter Port 0 (RJ45 socket labeled "IN") xx Number of lost connections (hexadecimal) on the port Part 2 of the text means: L1 Abbreviation for Link Lost Counter Port 1 (RJ45 socket labeled "OUT") xx Number of lost connections (hexadecimal) on the port.



2101h

Array

1h

A257.2 Global

read (3)

EtherCAT® Diagnosis: Indication of internal inverter diagnostic information on the EtherCAT® interface ECS 5000 and the connection to the EtherCAT®. A text with the following format is indicated in element 2: „R0 xxxx R1 xxxx" Part 1 of the text means: R0 Abbreviation for Rx ErrorCounter Port 0 (RJ45 socket labeled "IN") xxxx ErrorCounter in hexadecimal with number of registered errors such as, for example, FCS

checksum, … Part 2 of the text means: R0 Abbreviation for Rx ErrorCounter Port 1 (RJ45 socket labeled "OUT") xxxx ErrorCounter in hexadecimal with number of registered errors such as, for example, FCS

checksum, …



2101h

Array

2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 134


04


address

A258 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® PDO Timeout: This PDO monitoring function (PDO = Process Data Object) should be activated so that the inverter does not continue with the last received reference values after a failure of the EtherCAT® network or the master. After the EtherCAT® master has put this station (the inverter in this case) into the state "OPERATIONAL," it begins to send new process data (reference values, and so on) cyclically. When this monitor function has been activated, it is active in the "OPERATIONAL" state. When no new data are received via EtherCAT for longer than the set timeout time, the monitor function triggers the fault 52:communication with the cause of fault 6:EtherCAT PDO. If the EtherCAT® master shuts down this station correctly (exits the "OPERATIONAL" state), the monitoring function is not triggered. The timeout time can be set in milliseconds with this parameter. The following special setting values are available: 0: Monitoring inactive 1 to 99: Monitoring by STÖBER watchdog is active. Timeout time is always 1000 milliseconds. From 100: Monitoring by STÖBER watchdog is active. The numeric value is the timeout value in

milliseconds. 65534: Monitoring is not set by this value but by the "SM Watchdog" functionality of EtherCAT. For diagnosis of this externally set function, see parameter A259. 65535: Monitoring inactive Information You will only need the STÖBER watchdog function if your controller does not have a watchdog function itself. If your controller does have a watchdog function, STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK recommends the setting A258 = 65534 (EtherCAT® watchdog).

Value range in ms: 0 ... 65534 ... 65535



2102h 0h

A259.0 Global

read (3)

EtherCAT SM-Watchdog: This PDO monitoring function (PDO = Process Data Object) should be activated so that the inverter does not continue with the last received reference values after a failure of the EtherCAT network or the master. If the value 65534 was set in another parameter A258 EtherCAT PDO-Timeout, the timeout can be set in the EtherCAT master (TwinCAT software). The result is then indicated in this parameter: Element 0 contains the resulting watchdog time in 1 milliseconds.



2103h

Array

0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 135


04


address

A259.1 Global

read (3)

EtherCAT SM-Watchdog: This PDO monitoring function (PDO = Process Data Object) should be activated so that the inverter does not continue with the last received reference values after a failure of the EtherCAT network or the master. If the value 65534 was set in another parameter A258 EtherCAT PDO-Timeout, the timeout can be set in the EtherCAT master (TwinCAT software). The result is then indicated in this parameter: Element 1 contains whether the watchdog was just triggered (1) or not (0). When the watchdog is triggered and the function is activated (see value 65534 in parameter A258), the fault 52:communication is triggered on the inverter with cause of fault 6:EtherCAT PDO.



2103h

Array

1h

A259.2 Global

read (3)

EtherCAT® SM-Watchdog: This PDO monitoring function (PDO = Process Data Object) should be activated so that the inverter does not continue with the last received reference values after a failure of the EtherCAT® network or the master. If the value 65534 was set in another parameter A258 EtherCAT PDO-Timeout, the timeout can be set in the EtherCAT® master (TwinCAT software). The result is then indicated in this parameter: Element 2 contains the number of times this watchdog has been triggered.



2103h

Array

2h

A260 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® synchronization mode: This parameter activates EtherCAT® synchronization monitoring mode on the inverter. The inverter offers the option of monitoring the synchronization between master and inverter via Distributed Clock. A check is made to determine whether the time difference between the arrival of the EtherCAT® Frame at the inverter and the point in time of the SYNC0 signal on the inverter is within a tolerable time range. When monitoring is activated, Sync errors are counted with an error counter and indicated in parameter A261.2. Synchronization mode is deactivated and activated by entering the following values: 0:Synchronization deactivated 1:Synchronization active Other values are not defined and are therefore not permitted. CAUTION When the PLC cycle time is not the SYNC0 cycle time, all synchronization errors can no longer be detected. CAUTION Activation of synchronization mode requires different amounts of run time depending on the cycle time of the PLC and the inverter. With high-performance applications are being run on the inverter, activation of synchronization mode may cause the error "runtime load."

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 65535



2104h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 136


04


address

A261.0 Global

read (3)

EtherCAT® Sync-Diagnostics: This parameter can be used to diagnose errors in synchronization mode. The parameter indicates the following error codes: 0: No error 1: Sync Manager 2 and Sync Manager 3 have different cycle times. 2: Cycle time < 1 ms: The cycle time must be ³ 1000 µs. 3: Uneven cycle time: Cycle time must be a whole-number multiple of 1000 µs. 4: Internal error: Internal device PLL could not be started. Possible cause: The project does not contain parameter G90. 5: A required EtherCAT parameter does not exist. Parameters A260 and A261 must be available for EtherCAT® with synchronization. 6: Internal error: Inverter interrupt could not be initialized. Possible cause: Firmware error Other values: Not defined



2105h

Array

0h

A261.1 Global

read (3)

EtherCAT® Sync-Diagnostics: This element is reserved.



2105h

Array

1h

A261.2 Global

read (3)

EtherCAT® Sync-Diagnostics: This parameter indicates the synchronization errors which have occurred up to now between master and inverter. Synchronization mode must be activated in parameter A260 before the counter function becomes active. When the error counter is continuously incremented, this indicates a parameterization error on the master or the inverter. Occasional incrementing of the counter (e.g., in the minutes range) indicates a jitter in the total EtherCAT system.



2105h

Array

2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 137


04


address

A262.0 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 0 Synchronization type: The parameter indicates the synchronization operating mode for Sync Manager 0 (write mailbox) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Since Sync Managers for mailbox communication are never synchronized, the parameter can only have the following values: 0: not synchronized No other values possible. Information Please note that the synchronization operating mode is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.

0: not synchronized; 1: synchronized with AL event on this Sync Manager; 2: synchronized with AL event Sync0; 3: synchronized with AL event Sync1; 32: synchronized with AL event of SM0; 33: synchronized with AL event of SM1; 34: synchronized with AL event of SM2; 35: synchronized with AL event of SM3;



2106h 0h

A262.1 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 0 Cycle time: The parameter indicates the value of the cycle time for Sync Manager 0 (write mailbox) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Since Sync Managers for mailbox communication are never synchronized, the parameter can only have the following values: 0: not synchronized No other values possible. Information Please note that the cycle time is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



2106h 1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 138


04


address

A262.2 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 0 Shift time: The parameter indicates the value of the shift time for Sync Manager 0 (write mailbox) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Since Sync Managers for mailbox communication are never synchronized, the parameter can only have the following values: 0: not synchronized No other values possible. Information Please note that the shift time is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



2106h 2h

A263.0 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 1 Synchronization type: The parameter indicates the synchronization operating mode for Sync Manager 1 (read mailbox) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Since Sync Managers for mailbox communication are never synchronized, the parameter can only have the following values: 0: not synchronized No other values possible. Information Please note that the synchronization operating mode is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.




2107h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 139


04


address

A263.1 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 1 Cycle time: The parameter indicates the value of the cycle time for Sync Manager 1 (read mailbox) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Since Sync Managers for mailbox communication are never synchronized, the parameter can only have the following values: 0: not synchronized No other values possible. Information Please note that the cycle time is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



2107h 1h

A263.2 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 1 Shift time: The parameter indicates the value of the shift time for Sync Manager 1 (read mailbox) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Since Sync Managers for mailbox communication are never synchronized, the parameter can only have the following values: 0: not synchronized No other values possible. Information Please note that the shift time is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



2107h 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 140


04


address

A264.0 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 2 Synchronization type: The parameter indicates the synchronization operating mode for Sync Manager 2 (output process data) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Since Sync Managers for mailbox communication are never synchronized, the parameter can only have the following values: 0: not synchronized 2: Synchronized with AL Event Sync0: Synchronized operating mode (synchronous to sync 0 signal). No other values possible. Information Please note that the synchronization operating mode is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.




2108h 0h

A264.1 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 2 Cycle time: The parameter indicates the value of the cycle time in ns for Sync Manager 2 (output process data) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Information Please note that the cycle time is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



2108h 1h

A264.2 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 2 Shift time: The parameter indicates the value of the shift time in ns for Sync Manager 2 (output process data) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Information Please note that the shift time is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



2108h 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 141


04


address

A265.0 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 3 Synchronization type: The parameter indicates the synchronization operating mode for Sync Manager 3 (input process data) which was set by the controller on the inverter. The parameter can only have the following values: 0: not synchronized 2: Synchronized with AL Event Sync0: Synchronized operating mode (synchronous to sync 0 signal) No other values possible. Information Please note that the synchronization operating mode is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.




2109h 0h

A265.1 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 3 Cycle time: The parameter indicates the value of the cycle time in ns for Sync Manager 3 (output process data) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Information Please note that the cycle time is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



2109h 1h

A265.2 Global

r=3, w=3

EtherCAT® Sync Manager 3 Shift time: The parameter indicates the value of the shift time in ns for Sync Manager 3 (output process data) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Information Please note that the shift time is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your settings will have no effect.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295



2109h 2h

A266 Global

r=3, w=3

ECS Tolerance barrier: This parameter is used to specify the maximum permissible number of ECS 5000 events. When this threshold value is exceeded, the fault 55:option board with the cause 9:ECS5000failure is triggered. Never change this value without first contacting STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH & Co. KG.

Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 12


210Ah 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 142


04


address

A267.0 Global

read (3)

ECS internal test counter: This parameter counts any ECS-5000 events which are detected between the control unit of the inverter and the ECS 5000. Different causes are counted separately in an array with 4 elements. When the counter is incremented rapidly, this may mean EMC interference.


210Bh

Array

0h

A267.1 Global

read (3)



210Bh

Array

1h

A267.2 Global

read (3)



210Bh

Array

2h

A267.3 Global

read (3)



210Bh

Array

3h

A267.4 Global

read (3)

ECS internal test counter


210Bh

Array

4h

A268 Global

r=3, w=3

ECS compatibility mode: Adjustment of the behavior of the EtherCAT® firmware to ensure it can still be used with software in other devices which may possibly be outdated, for example in EtherCAT® Master.

0: current; This is the correct setting for the behavior for currently applicable EtherCAT® specifications. If possible, do not change this setting to produce and require behavior in accordance with current requirements.

1: No PDO test before OP; In this case the drive as an EtherCAT® slave no longer checks upon prompt for transition to OPERATIONAL whether PDOs have previously been received (in sync manager 2). Use this setting only if you do not need a workaround for non-problem free behavior of the EtherCAT® master!


210Ch 0h

A270.0 Global

read (2)

PN Port X200 state: For X200, the parameter shows whether a connection to another Ethernet subscriber exists and which properties it has.

Value range: 0 ... 1: co connection ... 4


210Eh

Array

0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 143


04


address

A271 Global

read (2)

PN state: The parameter shows the state of the PROFINET unification between a PROFINET IO controller (controller) and the inverter. Evaluate these parameters if there are any problems during booting up the PROFINET communication.

0:offline; error while detecting the PN 5000 in the inverter. 1: step 1; 2: step 2; 3: phase 1; 4: phase 2; 5: cyclic data exchange;


210Fh 0h

A272.0 Global

r=3, w=5

PN module/submodule list: STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK offers several combinations of modules and submodules. One of the combinations must be selected for configuring the PROFINET. The selected combination is then shown in these parameters when the booting process is completed. Evaluate these parameters if you have noted inconsistencies in the number of bytes between the process data formation and the quantity of data exchanged with the controller.The combination is displayed as a coded decimal number and contains four pieces of partial information: MMM-SSS-III-OOO MMM: Module ID SSS: Submodule ID III: Input data byte length OOO: Output data byte length Example: 103103012012 corresponds to Module ID: 103 Submodule ID: 104 Input data length: 12 byte Output data length: 12 byte


2110h

Array

0h

A273 Global

r=3, w=3

PN device name: The device name is of central importance for addressing in PROFINET. It replaces the bus address known from PROFIBUS and must be entered individually for every inverter in this parameter. When deciding on the device name, please observe the existing convention as described in the PROFINET manual. The device name will only become active when you have saved the parameters in the inverter (A00 save values) and you have switched the inverter off and on again.

Default setting: STOEBER-Inverter


2111h 0h

A274 Global

r=3, w=3

PN IP address: Display of the last IP address which the inverter took from a PROFINET IO controller. If there is no PROFINET communication, an old address will be displayed.

Value range: 0 ... 0.0.0.0 ... 4294967295


2112h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 144


04


address

A275 Global

r=3, w=3

PN subnet mask: Display of the last subnet mask which the inverter took from a PROFINET IO controller. If there is no PROFINET communication, an old subnet mask will be displayed.

Value range: 0 ... 0.0.0.0 ... 4294967295


2113h 0h

A276 Global

r=3, w=3

PN gateway: Display of the last gateway IP address which the inverter took from a PROFINET IO controller. If there is no PROFINET communication, an old address will be displayed.

Value range: 0 ... 0.0.0.0 ... 4294967295


2114h 0h

A278.0 Global

read (3)

PN diagnosis: Parameter A278 is used for diagnosis of the PROFINET communication. Different values are displayed in the 9 elements of the parameter. Element 0 shows a text in the following form: CosXX StX ECntXX, this means: CosXX - Cos stands for Communication Change of State - XX shows the messages from the following bits as a hexadecimal number: Bit 0: Ready (RCX_COMM_COS_READY) The Ready flag is set as soon as the protocol stack

is started properly. Bit 1 Running (RCX_COMM_COS_RUN) The Running flag is set when the protocol stack has

been configured properly. Bit 2 Bus On (RCX_COMM_COS_BUS_ON) The Bus On flag is set to indicate to the host

system whether or not the protocol stack has the permission to open network connections. Bit 3 Configuration Locked (RCX_COMM_COS_CONFIG_LOCKED) The Configuration Locked

flag is set, if the communication channel firmware has locked the configuration database against being overwritten.

Bit 4 Configuration New (RCX_COMM_COS_CONFIG_NEW) The Configuration New flag is set by the protocol stack to indicate that a new configuration became available, which has not been activated.

Bit 5 Restart Required (RCX_COMM_COS_RESTART_REQUIRED) The Restart Required flag is set when the channel firmware requests to be restarted

Bit 6 Restart Required Enable (RCX_COMM_COS_RESTART_REQUIRED_ENABLE) The Restart Required Enable flag is used together with the Restart Required flag above

Bit 7 currently not used StX - St stands for Communication State - X shows the number of the state: 0 = UNKNOWN 1 = OFFLINE 2 = STOP 3 = IDLE 4 = OPERATE ECntXX - ECnt stands for Error Count - XX shows the number of errors determined since the last supply on or reset


2116h

Array

0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 145


04


address

A279.0 Global

read (3)

PN error history: Array A279 shows the PROFINET communication error history in its four elements. Element 0 shows the last (most up-to-date) error since the last time the inverter was switched on. If this parameter value is zero, no error has occurred. If the value is different to 0, please refer to the PROFINET documentation.


2117h

Array

0h

A300 Global

read (2)

Additional enable: Indicates the current value of the AdditEna signal (additional enable) on the interface to the device control (configuration, block 100107). The "additional enable" signal works exactly like the enable signal on terminal X1. Both signals are AND linked. This means that the power end stage of the inverter is only enabled when both signals are HIGH.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 4B 00 00 hex

212Ch 0h

A301 Global

read (2)

Fault reset: Indicates the current value of the FaultRes signal (fault reset) on the interface to the device control (configuration, block 100107). The Fault reset signal triggers a fault reset. When the inverter has malfunctioned, a change from LOW to HIGH causes this fault to be reset if the cause of the fault has been corrected. Reset is not possible as long as A00 Save values is active.



212Dh 0h

A302 Global

read (2)

Quick stop: Indicates the current value of the QuickStp signal (quick stop) on the interface to the device control (configuration, block 100107). The quick stop signal triggers a quick stop of the drive. During positioning mode, the acceleration specified in I17 determines the braking time. When the axis is in "revolutions" (speed) mode, the parameter D81 determines the braking time (see also A39 and A45).



212Eh 0h

A303 Global

read (2)

Axis selector 0: Indicates the current value of the AxSel0 signal (axis selector 0) on the interface to the device control (configuration, block 100107). There are two "axis selector 0 / 1" signals with which one of the max. of 4 axes can be selected in binary code. NOTE - Axis switchover is not possible unless the enable is off and E48 device control state is not 5:fault. - With the FDS 5000, the axes can only be used as parameter records for a motor. The



Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 4B C0 00 hex

212Fh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 146


04


address

A304 Global

read (2)

Axis selector 1: Indicates the current value of the AxSel1 signal (axis selector 1) on the interface to the device control (configuration, block 100107). There are two "axis selector 0 / 1" signals with which one of the max. of 4 axes can be selected in binary code. NOTE - Axis switchover is not possible unless the enable is off and E48 device control state is not 5:fault. - With the FDS 5000, the axes can only be used as parameter records for a motor. The



Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 4C 00 00 hex

2130h 0h

A305 Global

read (2)

Axis disable: Indicates the current value of the AxDis signal (axis disable) on the interface to the device control (configuration, block 100107). The axis-disable signal deactivates all axes. NOTE - Axis switchover is not possible unless the enable is off and E48 device control state is not 5:fault. - With the FDS 5000, the axes can only be used as parameter records for a motor. The



Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 4C 40 00 hex

2131h 0h

A306 Global

read (2)

X1.Enable: The level of the X1.Enable binary input is displayed.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 4C 80 00 hex

2132h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 147


04


address

A576 Global

r=1, w=1

Control word: Control word with control signals for the device state machine and the drive function. Note that this parameter is not available if you use a device state machine as per DSP 401 in your project. Select the device state machine in the configuration assistant, step 4. Parameter E53 displays the device controller that you have chosen. Bit 0: "Switch on" - is set to 1 for switchon when bit 0 in status word "Ready to Switch On" is 1. Bit 1: "Enable voltage" - should always be left at 1, is active. Bit 2: "Quick stop" - is set to 0 when the drive is to come to a standstill as soon as possible. Bit 3: "Enable operation" - is set to 1 for enable when bit 1 in status word "Switched on" is 1. Bit 4-6: "Operation mode specific" - see below. Bit 7: "Fault reset" - edge 0 -> 1 to acknowledge queued fault. Bit 8: "Halt" - is not supported, always leave 0 = inactive. Bit 9 and 10: "Reserved" - always leave 0 = inactive. Bit 11 and 12: Axis selector, bit 0 and 1. Select the axis here for multi-axis operation. 00 = axis1,

… Bit 13: Axis disable. Deactivate all axes. No motor connected. Bit 14: Release brake. Bit 15: "Reserved" - always leave 0 = inactive. On bits 4-6 "operation mode specific" - the meaning of the bits depends on the operating mode of the inverter. This is set in A608 (modes of operation). The following operating modes and related bit meanings are available at this time: Job mode: Bit-4: Jog + Bit-5: Jog - Bit-6: Reserved, always 0 Homing mode: Bit-4: Homing operation start Bit-5: Reserved, always 0 Bit-6: Reserved, always 0 Interpolated position mode: Bit-4: Interpolation mode active Bit-5: Reserved, always 0 Bit-6: Reserved, always 0 Comfort reference value: Bit-4: HLG block, ramp generator input = 0 Bit-5: HLG stop, freeze ramp generator input Bit-6: HLG zero, ramp generator input = 0 (same as bit 4) Can be accessed via CANopen® under:

Index 6040 hex Subindex 0



6040h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 148


04


address

A577 Global

read (1)

Status word: The status word indicates the current state of the device. Some bits are operation mode specific. Note that this parameter is not available if you use a device state machine as per DSP 401 in your project. Select the device state machine in the configuration assistant, step 4. Parameter E53 displays the device controller that you have chosen. Bit-0: "Ready to switch on" Bit-1: "Switched on" Bit-2: "Operation enabled" Bit-3: "Fault" Bit-4: "Voltage enabled" Bit-5: "Quick stop" Bit 6: "Switch on disabled" Bit-7: "Warning" Bit-8: "Message" Bit-9: "Remote," corresponds to the negated output Local of block 320 Local Bit-10: "Target reached," see below Bit-11: "Internal limit active," 1 = limit is active Bit-12 and 13: "Operation mode specific," see below Bit-14 and 15: "PLL Bit0" and "PLL Bit1" with the meaning of interpolated position mode: 00: OK 01: Cycle time extended and still engaged 10: Cycle time shortened and still engaged 11: Not engaged Bit-10 "Target reached," bit-11 "Internal limit active" and bits 12 and 13 "Operation mode specific." The meaning of the bits depends on the operating mode of the inverter. This is set in the parameter A608 modes of operation. The following operating modes are currently available with their related bit meanings: Comfort reference value: Bit-10: "Target reached," reference-value-reached flag, same as D183 "n-window reached" Bit-11: "Internal limit active," 1 = limit is active, one of the following signals is active: D182, D185,

D186, D308, D309, D462 Homing mode: Bit-12: Homing attained: Reference point found Bit-13: Homing error: termination of referencing due to error Interpolated position mode: Bit-12: Interpolation mode active Bit-13: Reserved, always 0 Can be accessed via CANopen® under:

Index 6041hex Subindex 0


6041h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 149


04


address

A800 Global

r=3, w=3

Remote service start: You can use this parameter to start remote service via the operator panel on the front of the inverter. The effectiveness of this parameter depends on how parameter A167 is set. Information Before you start remote service, read chapter Integrated Bus of the Operating Manual SDS 5000 and the description of parameter A167!

0: inactive; No remote service wanted. 1: active; Request remote service.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 C8 00 00 hex

A890 Global

r=3, w=3

Para-Acc-Cntrl: You can activate an access logging function in this parameter. This can be useful in the diagnosis of parameter write modules or functions in conjunction with fieldbuses. This function logs the last 10 write accesses to parameters usingCANopen, EtherCAT, PROFIBUS and PROFINET. Even defective attempts which have been rejected by the inverter are logged here, in this case A894 shows an error code as a result.

0: inactive; No parameter accesses have been logged. 1: active; Access logging function is active. When changing from 0: inactive after 1: active the

previously logged values are deleted.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 DE 80 00 hex

A891 Global

read (3)

Para-Acc-Next: If the access logging function is activated (see parameter A890 the element in which the next write access will be logged is displayed here. The element number applies to parameters - A892 Para-Acc-Address, - A893 Para-Acc-Value, - A894 Para-Acc-Result and - A895 Para-Acc-Time. You will find the last logged entry in the parameters one element before the number displayed here.

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 255

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 DE C0 00 hex

A892.0 Global

read (3)

Para-Acc-Address: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the addresses of the last 10 write accesses will be logged in the elements. The array parameter is designed as a ring memory. If element 9 is described, the next entry will take place in element 0. Old entries will be overwritten. The element which is displayed in A891 Para-Acc-Next contains the oldest logged access. This element will be overwritten on the next write access. The newest value is contained in the element which is smaller than A891 by 1.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 DF 00 00 hex

Array

A892.1 Global

read (3)



Array

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 150


04


address

A892.2 Global

read (3)



Array

A892.3 Global

read (3)



Array

A892.4 Global

read (3)



Array

A892.5 Global

read (3)



Array

A892.6 Global

read (3)



Array

A892.7 Global

read (3)



Array

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 151


04


address

A892.8 Global

read (3)



Array

A892.9 Global

read (3)



Array

A893.0 Global

read (3)

Para-Acc-Value: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the values of the last 10 write accesses will be logged in the elements. The values are displayed as 4-byte numbers in hexadecimal representation. The sequence of the bytes is displayed as they were originally received by the fieldbus, and is different depending on the fieldbus system being used: - in the case of PROFIBUS and PROFINET the data bytes are arranged readably as usual (00001234 hex = 4660 dez). - in the case of CANopen and EtherCAT the bytes are arranged otherwise (34120000 hex = 4660 dez). The array parameter is designed as a ring memory. If element 9 is described, the next entry will take place in element 0. Old entries will be overwritten. The element which is displayed in A891 Para-Acc-Next contains the oldest logged access. This element will be overwritten on the next write access. The newest value is contained in the element which is smaller than A891 by 1.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 DF 40 00 hex

Array

A893.1 Global

read (3)



Array

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 152


04


address

A893.2 Global

read (3)



Array

A893.3 Global

read (3)



Array

A893.4 Global

read (3)



Array

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 153


04


address

A893.5 Global

read (3)



Array

A893.6 Global

read (3)



Array

A893.7 Global

read (3)



Array

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 154


04


address

A893.8 Global

read (3)



Array

A893.9 Global

read (3)



Array

A894.0 Global

read (3)

Para-Acc-Result: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the results of the last 10 write accesses will be logged in the elements. The following results are normally often displayed: - 00000000: The write access was successful, the parameter value has been accepted. - 0000004D: The parameter which was accessed does not exist. - 00000052: The parameter value to be transmitted is too small, it is not accepted. - 00000053: The parameter value to be transmitted is too large, it is not accepted. - other values: Please contact STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK. The array parameter is designed as a ring memory. If element 9 is described, the next entry will take place in element 0. Old entries will be overwritten. The element which is displayed in A891 Para-Acc-Next contains the oldest logged access. This element will be overwritten on the next write access. The newest value is contained in the element which is smaller than A891 by 1.


Array

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 155


04


address

A894.1 Global

read (3)



Array

A894.2 Global

read (3)



Array

A894.3 Global

read (3)



Array

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 156


04


address

A894.4 Global

read (3)



Array

A894.5 Global

read (3)



Array

A894.6 Global

read (3)



Array

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 157


04


address

A894.7 Global

read (3)



Array

A894.8 Global

read (3)



Array

A894.9 Global

read (3)



Array

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 158


04


address

A895.0 Global

read (3)

Para-Acc-Time: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the times of the last 10 write accesses will be logged in the elements. The times are stated as values in milliseconds, the values are relative to each other and are not related to the operation duration in E30. The array parameter is designed as a ring memory. If element 9 is described, the next entry will take place in element 0. Old entries will be overwritten. The element which is displayed in A891 Para-Acc-Next contains the oldest logged access. This element will be overwritten on the next write access. The newest value is contained in the element which is smaller than A891 by 1.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 DF C0 00 hex

Array

A895.1 Global

read (3)



Array

A895.2 Global

read (3)



Array

A895.3 Global

read (3)



Array

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 159


04


address

A895.4 Global

read (3)



Array

A895.5 Global

read (3)



Array

A895.6 Global

read (3)



Array

A895.7 Global

read (3)



Array

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 160


04


address

A895.8 Global

read (3)



Array

A895.9 Global

read (3)



Array

A900 Global

r=3, w=4

SysEnableOut: Enable output of the device controller to the axis(axes). Indicates that the power section is on and enables reference value processing.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 E1 00 00 hex

A901 Global

r=3, w=4

SysQuickstopOut: Quick stop output of the device controller to the axis(axes). Indicates that the device controller forces a quick stop which is executed by speed control. Reference value processing of the axis must support this with priority before axis reference value processing.


A902 Global

read (2)

SysStatusword: Status word of the device controller as per DSP402.

Bit Bit 0 Ready for switch-on 8 Message 1 Switched on 9 Remote 2 Oper. enabled 10 Reference value reached 3 Fault 11 Limit value 4 Voltage disabled 12...15 Reserved 5 Quick stop 6 Switch-on disable 7 Warning

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 E1 80 00 hex

A903 Global

r=3, w=4

SysOpenBrake: Command bit: Open halting brake. This signal bypasses brake control and goes directly to plug connector X2 (MDS/FDS) or X5 (SDS).

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 E1 C0 00 hex

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 161


04


address

A905 Global

r=3, w=3

New PDO1 data for Tx: The parameter is set to "1" when a PDO is received.


A906 Global

r=3, w=3

Time stamp PDO1: Time relationship between PDO receipt and cycle time.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 E2 80 00 hex

A907 Global

r=3, w=3

Reference timestamp PLL: Time relationship of PLL to cycle time.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 E2 C0 00 hex

A910 Global

r=3, w=4

SysAdditionalEnableIn: Additional enable signal of the axis to the device controller. A logical AND link with the enable signal (usually from binary input X1.enable) occurs on the device controller. Information When POSITool establishes a connection to the inverter, this parameter is always read, even when "write parameter" was specified in POSITool as the data communication direction.


A911 Global

r=3, w=4

SysQuickstopIn: Quick stop request of the axis to the device controller.


A912 Global

r=3, w=4

SysFaultResetInput: Fault reset of the axis to the device controller.


A913 Global

r=3, w=4

SysQuickstopEndInput: Quick stop end signal of the axis to the device controller. Indicates that a quick stop was concluded. With applications without braking control, this is usually the "standstill reached" signal. With applications with braking control, this is usually the "brake closed" signal.


A914 Global

r=2, w=4

SysControlWord: Control word to DSP402 device controller.

Bit Bit 1 Switch on 9...15 Reserved 2 Disable voltage 3 Quick stop 4 Enable oper. 5 Disable HLG 6 Stop HLG 7 HLG zero 8 Reset fault


A916 Global

r=3, w=4

Reference cycle-time: Cycle time of the SYNC telegram. Is created from G98.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 E5 00 00 hex

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 162


04


address

A918 Global

r=3, w=4

SysLocal: Signal of the device controller to the axis (axes). Indicates that local operation is activated ("hand" key).


A919 Global

r=3, w=4

SysEnableLocal: Signal of the device controller to the axis (axes). Indicates that local operation ("hand" key) and local enable ("I/O" or "I" key) are activated.


A922 Global

r=2, w=4

SysControlWordBit4: Signal of device control on the axis/axes. The function is application-specific. The parameter is only functional for the applications listed below. Application Meaning Comfort reference value Corresponds to the Stop signal


A923 Global

r=2, w=4

SysControlWordBit5: Signal of device control on the axis/axes. The function is application-specific. The parameter is only functional for the applications listed below. Application Meaning Comfort reference value Halt ramp generator (with lower priority than Stop and Quick

Stop)


A924 Global

r=2, w=4

SysControlWordBit6: Signal of device control on the axis/axes. The function is application-specific. The parameter is only functional for the applications listed below. Application Meaning Comfort reference value Corresponds to the Stop signal


A925 Global

read (2)

SysTargetReached: Signal of the axis to the device control. The reference value was reached. The function is application-specific. The parameter is only functional for the applications listed below. Application Meaning Comfort reference value Reference-value-reached flag, same as D183 n-window

reached


A926 Global

read (2)

SysTargetReached: Signal of the axis to the device control. The reference value was reached. The function is application-specific. The parameter is only functional for the applications listed below. Application Meaning Comfort reference value One of the following signals is active: D182, D185, D186, D308,

D309, D462


Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 163


04

B.. Motor Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

B00 Axis

r=1, w=1

Motor-type: Indication of the motor name as text. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Default setting: ED212U


2200h 0h

B01.0 Axis

read (3)

Job data: If an ED/EK motor with EnDat® encoder is connected to X4, the motor's job number can be displayed in this parameter element. The structure of the full number is as follows: AAAAAA/BBB/CCC-DDD/XX AAAAAA: Job number BBB: Job call number CCC: Job remainder number DDD: Job item number XX: Sequential item number in the job The numeric parts are displayed in the elements of parameter B01. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.


Only visible when B06 = 0:el. motor-type is set and the motor encoder is an EnDat®-Encoder on X4 or X140.

2201h

Array

0h

B01.1 Axis

read (3)

Job data: If an ED/EK motor with EnDat® encoder is connected to X4, the motor's Job call number can be displayed in this parameter element. The structure of the full number is as follows: AAAAAA/BBB/CCC-DDD/XX AAAAAA: Job number BBB: Job call number CCC: Job remainder number DDD: Job item number XX: Sequential item number in the job The numeric parts are displayed in the elements of parameter B01. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.



2201h

Array

1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 164


04


address

B01.2 Axis

read (3)

Job data: If an ED/EK motor with EnDat® encoder is connected to X4, the motor's Job remainder numbercan be displayed in this parameter element. The structure of the full number is as follows: AAAAAA/BBB/CCC-DDD/XX AAAAAA: Job number BBB: Job call number CCC: Job remainder number DDD: Job item number XX: Sequential item number in the job The numeric parts are displayed in the elements of parameter B01. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.



2201h

Array

2h

B01.3 Axis

read (3)

Job data: If an ED/EK motor with EnDat® encoder is connected to X4, the motor's Job item number can be displayed in this parameter element. The structure of the full number is as follows: AAAAAA/BBB/CCC-DDD/XX AAAAAA: Job number BBB: Job call number CCC: Job remainder number DDD: Job item number XX: Sequential item number in the job The numeric parts are displayed in the elements of parameter B01. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.



2201h

Array

3h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 165


04


address

B01.4 Axis

read (3)

Job data: If an ED/EK motor with EnDat® encoder is connected to X4, the motor's sequential item number in the job can be displayed in this parameter element. The structure of the full number is as follows: AAAAAA/BBB/CCC-DDD/XX AAAAAA: Job number BBB: Job call number CCC: Job remainder number DDD: Job item number XX: Sequential item number in the job The numeric parts are displayed in the elements of parameter B01. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.



2201h

Array

4h

B02 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Back EMF: Specifies the peak value of induced voltage between two phases at 1000 Rpm. When an effective value is specified for external motors, this must be multiplied by 1.41 before entry in B02. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in V/1000rpm: 5.0 ... 40 ... 3000.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V/1000rpm; Type: I16; (raw value:1LSB=0,1·rpm); USS-Adr: 02 00 80 00 hex

Only visible with servo operation (B20 greater or equal to 64:Servo-control).

2202h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 166


04


address

B04 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

El. motor-type: STÖBER motors of the ED, EK and EZ series are available with electronic single and multi-turn encoders. These encoders offer a special parameter memory. In all standard models STÖBER places all motor data in this memory including any existing halting brake ("electronic nameplate"). B04 is only used when B06 = 0 is set. With B04 = 0, B01 Job data is read. The other motor data can be entered as desired. The commutation is also internally affected. When B04 = 1 is set, the following parameters are read from the nameplate. B00, B01, B02, B10, B11, B12, B13, B16 bzw. B19, B17, B38, B39, B52, B53, B61, B62, B64, B65, B66, B67, B68, B70, B72, B73, B74, B82, B83 The commutation is also internally affected. For this setting, F06 and F07 are also read if B07 = 0:el. motor-type is set. If a KTY evaluation has been entered on the nameplate, U10 = 2:warning and U11 = 1 s will be set. With B04 = 1, the motor data are read from the encoder after each power-on. Any manual changes to motor data are only effective until the next power-off and power-on even when the changes are stored non-volatilely in Paramodule. For permanent changes to the motor data, set B04 = 0. Then store the changes with A00 = 1. Electronic nameplates of other motor manufacturers cannot be evaluated. NOTE Correct evaluation of the electronic nameplate after a change in parameter B04 is not ensured until after a device new start.

0: Commutation; 1: All data;



2204h 0h

B05 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Commutation-offset: Shift the encoder zero position in comparison to the motor. STÖBER motors with resolvers are set to B05 = 0 at the plant and checked. Normally a change in the B05 parameter is not required. When phase test B40 produces a value B05 > 5° or B05 < 355°, a wiring or plug problem is probably the cause. With STÖBER motors with absolute value encoders, the commutation offset is written to the electronic nameplate at the plant and is read by the inverter during "startup." In this case, B05 is also set at the factory to 0. If B05 is changed, total offset = nameplate offset + B05 applies. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in °: 0.0 ... 0 ... 360.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1°; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 2879.9 °); USS-Adr: 02 01 40 00 hex


2205h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 167


04


address

B06 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Motor-data: STÖBER motors of the ED, EK and EZ series are available with electronic single and multi-turn encoders. These encoders offer a special parameter memory. In all standard models STÖBER places the entire motor data in this memory including any existing halting brake ("electronic nameplate"). For B06 = 0, the data is read from the encoder after each power on according to the settings in B07 (only for SDS 5000) and B04. Any manual changes in motor data only remain effective until the next power-off and power-on even when the changes are stored in Paramodule non-volatilely. Set B06 = 1 for motors without electronic nameplates. The default values of the motor data entered in the parameter list must then be checked and adjusted. The commutation offset can be auto-tuned with the action B40. The changes must then be stored with A00 = 1. Electronic nameplates of other motor manufacturers cannot be evaluated. NOTE Up to and including firmware status V 5.2, correct evaluation of the nameplate after a change in parameter B06 does not occur until a device new start. Starting with firmware status V 5.3, the nameplate is evaluated immediately. The parameter B06 only appears for inverters of the MDS 5000 and SDS 5000 series.

0: El. motor-type; 1: User defined;


Only visible when the motor encoder is an EnDat®-Encoder on X4 or X140.

2206h 0h

B07 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Brake data: B07 is only used if B04 = 1 and F08 = 1 are set and is only available if a SDS 5000 is configured. With B07 Brake data = 0, the data set in F06 Brake release time and F07 Brake application time are read on every power on from the encoder. Any manual changes to these brake data are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodul in non-volatile memory. This setting is useful if the drive only has one brake or the drive has two brakes and the one that has data saved in the electronic name plate features

longer air and incidence times. For B07 = 1, the parameters F06 and F07 can be manually set. This setting is useful if the drive has two brakes but the air and incidence times that are saved in the electronic name plate are the shorter ones.

0: electrical name plate; 1: arbitrary setting;


Only available if B06 Motor data = 0:el. name plate and F08 Brake = 1:active.

2207h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 168


04


address

B10 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Motor-poles: Results from the nominal speed nNom [Rpm] and the nominal frequency f [Hz] of the motor. B10 = 2·(f · 60 / nNom). Correct entry of the number of poles is mandatory for the inverter to function. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range: 2 ... 4 ... 20

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; (raw value:255 = 510); USS-Adr: 02 02 80 00 hex

220Ah 0h

B11 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Nominal motor power: Nominal power in kW as per nameplate. If only the nominal torque Mn is known instead of the nominal power, B11 must be calculated from Mn [Nm] and the nominal speed n [Rpm] based on the following formula: B11 = Mn · n / 9550. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in kW: 0.120 ... 0,276 ... 500.000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001kW; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 02 02 C0 00 hex

220Bh 0h

B12 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Nominal motor current: Nominal current in A as per nameplate. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in A: 0.001 ... 1,07 ... 327.670

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001A; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 02 03 00 00 hex

220Ch 0h

B13 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Nominal motor speed: Nominal speed in Rpm as per nameplate. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 02 03 40 00 hex

220Dh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 169


04


address

B14 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Nominal motor voltage: Nominal voltage as per nameplate. Since, with asynchronous motors, the type of switching (Y/) must be adhered to, make sure that the parameters B11 ... B15 match!

Value range in V: 0 ... 400 ... 480


Only visible with asynchronous machines (B20 less than 64:Servo-control).

220Eh 0h

B15 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Nominal motor frequency: Nominal frequency of the motor as per nameplate. Parameters B14 and B15 specify the inclination of the V/F characteristic curve and thus the characteristic of the drive. The V/F characteristic curve determines the frequency (B15 f-nominal) at which the motor will be operated (B14 V-nominal). Voltage and frequency can be linearly increased over the nominal point. Upper voltage limit is the applied network voltage. STÖBER system motors up to a size of 112 offer the possibility of star/delta operation. Delta operation with 400 V permits a power increase by the factor of 1.73 and an expanded speed range with constant torque. In this type of circuit, the motor requires more current. It must be ensured that: - The frequency inverter is designed for the corresponding power (PDelta = 1.73 · PStar). - B12 (I-nominal) is parameterized for the corresponding nominal motor current (IDelta = 1.73 · IStar).

With quadratic characteristic curve (B21 = 1), nominal frequencies are limited via 124 Hz internally to 124 Hz.

For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in Hz: 0.0 ... 50 ... 1600.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1Hz; Type: I32; (raw value:2147483647 = 512000.0 Hz); USS-Adr: 02 03 C0 00 hex


220Fh 0h

B17 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

T0 (standstill): Standstill torque M0 as per nameplate. Used, among others, as reference value for the torque and current limitation (C03 and C05).

For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in Nm: 0.000 ... 0,48 ... 2.147.483.647

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001Nm; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 02 04 40 00 hex


2211h 0h

B18 Axis

read (3)

Related torque: The parameter B18 shows the reference value for percentage of torque values (such as C03, C05, E62 and E66) in every control mode (B20).

Value range in Nm: -3.84 ... 0,48 ... Mrz 84

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01Nm; Type: I16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.22; USS-Adr: 02 04 80 00 hex

2212h 0h

B19 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

cos (phi): Cos (phi) as per nameplate.

Value range: 0.500 ... 0,72 ... 1.000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 04 C0 00 hex


2213h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 170


04


address

B20 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Control mode: Specifies the type of motor control.For servo motors, select 64:Servo-control. Asynchronous machines can be operated without speed feedback in the control modes 0:V/f-control, 1:Sensorless vector control and 3:SLVC-HP. The selection 2:Vector control is available for asynchronous motors with feedback. NOTE - With control type "0:V/f-control," there is no current or torque limitation. Similarly, connection to a rotating motor is not possible ("capturing"). - Control type 64:Servo-control is not available with the FDS 5000 inverter.

0: V/f-control; 1: sensorless vector control; 2: vector control; 3: SLVC-HP; 64: servo-control;


2214h 0h

B21 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

V/f-characteristic: Switch between linear and square characteristic curve. NOTE When the control mode is SLVC, only the linear characteristic curve format can be used.

0: Linear; Voltage/frequency characteristic curve is linear. Suitable for all applications. 1: Square; Square characteristic curve for use with fans and pumps. The characteristic curve is

continued linearly starting at the nominal frequency (B15).


2215h 0h

B22 Axis

r=1, w=1

V/f-factor: Offset factor for the increase of the V/f characteristic curve. The increase with V/F factor = 100 % is specified by V-nominal (B14) and f-nominal (B15).

Value range in %: 90 ... 100 ... 110

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800%); USS-Adr: 02 05 80 00 hex

2216h 0h

B23 Axis

r=1, w=1

V/f-Boost: The term boost means an increase in voltage in the lower speed range whereby a higher startup torque is available. With a boost of 100 % the nominal motor current flows at 0 Hz. To specify the required boost voltage, the stator resistance of the motor must be known. For this reason, with motors without electronic nameplate, it is essential that B41 (autotune motor) be performed!! With STÖBER standard motors, the stator resistance of the motor is specified by the choice of motor.

Value range in %: 0 ... 10 ... 400

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800%); USS-Adr: 02 05 C0 00 hex

Only visible with V/f control (B20 = 0).

2217h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 171


04


address

B24 Axis

r=2, w=2

Switching frequency: The noise volume of the drive is affected by changing the switching frequency. Increasing the switching frequency increases losses, however. For this reason, the permissible nominal motor current (B12) must be reduced when the switching frequency is increased. With operation of a servo motor (B20 = 64), at least 8 kHz must be set. With a setting of 4 kHz, an internal switch to 8 kHz is performed for servo operation. In some operating states, the switching frequency is changed by the inverter itself. The currently active switching frequency can be read in E151. NOTE The factory setting of this parameter depends on B20. With a servo controller, the value 8:8kHz is entered in B24. When an asynchronous machine (V/f controller, sensorless vector controller and vector controller) is used, B24 has the value 4:4kHz.

4: 4kHz; 8: 8kHz; 16: 16kHz;


2218h 0h

B26 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Motor encoder: Selection of the interface to which the motor encoder is connected. The encoder must be correctly parameterized in H.. for the particular interface (see encoder list in the H.. group). NOTE Remember that the interfaces X120 and X140 are only available on the MDS 5000 and SDS 5000. The settings 3:X140-Resolver and 4:X120-encoder do not exist on the FDS 5000.

0: inactive; 1: BE-encoder; An incremental encoder which is connected to terminals BE4 and BE5 is used as

motor encoder. The exact parameterization of the encoder must be performed in H10 ... H12. 2: X4-encoder; The motor encoder is connected to interface X4. The exact parameterization of the

encoder must be performed in H00 ... H02. 3: X140-encoder; A encoder on the optional interface X140 is used as motor encoder. The exact

parameterization of the encoder must be performed in H30 ... H32. 4: X120-encoder; The motor encoder is connected to the optional interface X120. The precise

parameterization of the encoder must be performed in H120 to H126. NOTE The interface X120 is only available with the "I/O terminal module, expanded (XEA 5000)" and

"I/O terminal module, expanded (XEA 5001)" respectively!


221Ah 0h

B28 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

Encoder gearfactor: When the encoder for motor control for setting B20 = 2 (control type = vector control) is not mounted directly on the motor shaft, the gear ratio between motor shaft and the encoder must be specified here. It must apply: B28 = Number of motor revolutions/number of encoder revolutions. An SSI or an incremental encoder must be used. B28 can also assume negative values. Values whose amount is less than 1/10 may not be set. When B28 is not equal to 1.000, E09 indicates the encoder position and not the rotor position.

Value range: -32.000 ... 1 ... 31.999

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: I16; (raw value:10 Bit=1); USS-Adr: 02 07 00 00 hex


221Ch 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 172


04


address

B29 Axis

r=3, w=4

Tolerate overcurrent: With applications which run close to the overcurrent threshold of the inverter, normal control procedures can cause undesired overcurrent malfunctions. For these cases, the parameter B29 makes it possible to tolerate a crossing of the overcurrent threshold for an adjustable number of current controller cycles. The parameter should not be changed until after the max. current value has been checked with an external current measuring instrument. CAUTION With B20 = 0:V/f-control and B20 = 1:sensorless vector control, B29 must be 0!

Value range in current-ctrl cycles: 0 ... 0 ... 20

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1current-ctrl cycles; Type: I8; USS-Adr: 02 07 40 00 hex

221Dh 0h

B31 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Oscillation damping: Large motors can have a tendency to sympathetic vibration during no load. Increasing parameter B31 damps these vibrations with B20 = 2:SLVC. Values from 60 ... 100 % are suitable for problematic drives.

Value range in %: 0 ... 30 ... 100


Only when B20 = 1:SLVC.

221Fh 0h

B32 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

SLVC-dynamics: The reaction speed of the SLVC to changes in load can be influenced by B32. The highest dynamics are B32 = 100 %.

Value range in %: 0 ... 70 ... 100



2220h 0h

B35 Axis

r=3, w=3

Offset raw-motorencoder: The parameter B35 is added to the encoder raw value or accumulated encoder raw value. The results are indicated in E154 raw motor-encoder and E153 accumulated raw-motor-encoder. The scaling of B35 depends on the motor encoder being used: - EnDat®, SSI: MSB = 2048 encoder revolutions - Resolver: 65,536 LSB = 1 encoder revolution (i.e., MSB = 32,768 encoder revolutions) - Incremental encoder: 4 LSB = 1 increment MSB = Most Significant Bit LSB = Least Significant Bit


Only visible when B26 is not set to 0:inactive.

2223h 0h

B36 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Maximum magnetisation: The parameter permits the motor to move within the basic speed range with reduced magnetization. With a light load, this can be used to reduce heatup of motor and inverter. The parameter should usually be set to 100 % (no reduction). NOTE The parameter is only effective in control type B20 = 2:Vectorcontrol.

Value range in %: 50 ... 100 ... 100


Only when B20 = 1:SLVC or 2:VC.

2224h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 173


04


address

B38 Axis

r=3, w=3

Motor temperature sensor: Select motor temperature sensor connected to X2. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

0: PTC; A thermistor (PTC) is connected to X2 which increases its resistance suddenly to several times as many Ohms when the nominal response temperature is reached.

1: KTY 84-1xx; A temperature sensor of type KTY 84 is connected to X2. At 100 °C it has a resistance of 1000 ohms. This temperature sensors makes it possible to perform an analog measurement of the motor temperature. The measurement is limited to one motor winding, which also restricts motor protection. Evaluation of a KTY sensor is not possible with inverters until HW200. The measured motor temperature is displayed in E12. The maximum permissible temperature for the motor must be parameterized in B39.


2226h 0h

B39 Axis

r=3, w=3

Maximum temperature of motor: If a higher motor temperature (E12) is measured than parameterized here, malfunction 41 is triggered. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in °C: 0 ... 145 ... 145

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1°C; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 328 °C); USS-Adr: 02 09 C0 00 hex

Only if B38 is not equal to 0.

2227h 0h

B40.0 Global

r=2, w=2

Phase test & start: Writing a one starts the phase test action. It may only be used for servo motors. A check is made to determine whether phases were mixed up when the motor was connected, whether the number of motor poles (B10) is correct and auto-tunes the commutation offset (B05). During the action the motor must be able to revolve freely. The enable must be LOW at the starting point. After B40.0 = 1 the enable must be switched HIGH. After the action was executed, the enable must be switched back to LOW. The result of the action can be read after removal of the enable in B05. During this action the cycle time is internally set to 32 ms. The switch is made when the action is activated. WARNING Starting the action releases the motor brake. Since, due to the action, the motor is not sufficiently energized, it is unable to carry any loads (e.g., in a lifting system). For this reason the action may only be performed with motors which are not installed in a system.



2228h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 174


04


address

B40.1 Global

read (2)

Process: Progress of the phase test in %.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 02 0A 00 01 hex


2228h 1h

B40.2 Global

read (2)

Result: After conclusion of the phase test action, the result can be queried here.

0: error free; The action was executed without errors and concluded. 1: aborted; The action was aborted by turning off the enable. 2: phase order; It was found that two phases were mixed up. 3: motor poles; The determined number of poles is not the value in B10. 4: commutation offset; The measured commutation offset is not B05. 5: test run; A test run with the measured commutation offset could not be performed.



2228h 2h

B41.0 Global

r=2, w=2

Autotuning & start: Writing a one starts the Autotune motor action. It measures the resistance (B53) and the inductivity (B52) of the motor. The drive may move during this action. The enable must be LOW at the starting point. After B41.0 = 1, the enable must be switched to HIGH. After the action is executed, the enable must be switched back to LOW. The result of the action can be read in B52, B53 after the enable is removed. During this action the cycle time is internally set to 32 ms. The switch is made when the action is activated. When an asynchronous machine (B20 < 64) is being used, the action also autotunes the values for B54 leakage factor and B55 saturation coefficient. WARNING Starting the action releases the motor brake. Since, due to the action, the motor is not sufficiently energized, it is unable to carry any loads (e.g., in a lifting system). For this reason the action may only be performed with motors which are not installed in a system.


2229h 0h

B41.1 Global

read (2)

Process: Progress of autotuning the motor in %.


2229h 1h

B41.2 Global

read (2)

Result: After conclusion of the Autotune motor action, the result can be queried.

0: error free; 1: aborted;


2229h 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 175


04


address

B42.0 Global

r=2, w=2

Optimize current controller & start: Writing a one starts the Optimize current controller action. This re-specifies the parameters for current controller gain (B64 ... B68). During the action, the drive revolves at approx. 2000 Rpm and may make clicking noises at regular intervals. The action may take up to approx. 20 minutes. The result of the action can be read in B64 ... B68 after the enable is removed. When the action is enabled on the device during local operation, the action can only be terminated with a very long delay. During this action the cycle time is internally set to 32 ms. The switch is made when the action is activated. WARNING Starting the action releases the motor brake. Since, due to the action, the motor is not sufficiently energized, it is unable to carry any loads (e.g., in a lifting system). For this reason the action may only be performed with motors which are not installed in a system.


Only visible with control types with current control (B20 = 64:Servo or 2:VC).

222Ah 0h

B42.1 Global

read (2)

Process: Progress of the current controller optimization %.



222Ah 1h

B42.2 Global

read (2)

Result: After conclusion of the current controller optimization action, the result can be queried here.




222Ah 2h

B43.0 Global

r=2, w=2

Winding test & start: Writing a one starts the Winding test action. This checks the symmetry of the ohmic resistances of the motor windings. The enable must be LOW at the starting point. After B43.0 = 1, the enable must be switched to HIGH. After the action is executed, the enable must be switched back to LOW.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 02 0A C0 00 hex

222Bh 0h

B43.1 Global

read (2)

Process: Progress of the winding test in %.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 02 0A C0 01 hex

222Bh 1h

B43.2 Global

read (2)

Result: After conclusion of the winding test action, the result can be queried.

0: error free: The action was executed without errors and concluded. 1: Aborted: The action was aborted by turning off the enable. 2: R_SYM_U: The resistance of phase U differs significantly from that of the other phases. 3: R_SYM_V: Same as 2. 4: R_SYM_W: Same as 2. 5: POLAR_SYM_U: An asymmetry was determined when the polarity changed. 6: POLAR_SYM_V: Same as 5. 7: POLAR_SYM_W: Same as 5.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 02 0A C0 02 hex

222Bh 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 176


04


address

B45.0 Global

r=3, w=3

Optimize and start SLVC-HP: Writing a 1 starts the action Optimize and start SLVC-HP. WARNING: The action accelerates the motor up to twice its nominal speed. The optimization function only provides suitable values when the load torque of the motor is sufficiently small. Only perform the action when the motor is adequately fastened and the motor shaft can rotate freely! The action optimizes these parameters: - B46 Feedback SLVC-HP, - B47 P-gain SLVC-HP and - B48 I-Gain SLVC-HP, Note that the result is more accurate if you fit the motor with an encoder for this action. This is possible for initial commissioning of a machine series, for example. In this case, mount and connect the encoder, set control mode B20 = 2:vector control and parameterize the encoder. Now perform the action as described in the following. After you have dismantled the encoder, set control mode B20 = 3:SLVC-HP again. Requirement: The enable must be low at the starting point. 1. Set B45.0 = 1. 2. Switch enable to high. 3. Wait until successful completion is displayed in B45.1 (B45.1 = 100 %). 4. Switch enable to low again. The result of the action can be read after removing the enable in B46, B47 & B48.



222Dh 0h

B45.1 Global

read (3)

Process: Process of the Optimize SLVC-HP action in %.



222Dh 1h

B45.2 Global

read (3)

Result: The result can be queried here after completion of the Optimize SLVC-HP action.




222Dh 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 177


04


address

B46 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Feedback ASM Observer: This parameter affects the accuracy of the SLVC-HP. For values that are too large or too high, the stationary difference between the reference and actual speed increases. Note The amount of feedback is an option to be reported to the ASM observer just as the machine constants B54 leakage factor, B52 stator inductance and B53 stator winding resistance were determined. The smaller the feedback selected, the more the ASM observer depends on these constants.

Value range: 1.001 ... 1,03 ... 1.500

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: R32; (raw value:1LSB=1); USS-Adr: 02 0B 80 00 hex

222Eh 0h

B47 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Proportional Gain SLVC-HP: This parameter affects the dynamic properties of the motor (especially the stability and overshoot behaviour of the speed). Setting note The correct setting can be checked by means of the speed curve. If an encoder is present during commissioning, E15 should be considered as the actual speed, otherwise E91. B47 should not be smaller than 1% of B48. The drive can become unstable for values that are too small. The resulting vibration oscillates at the mechanical frequency. By increasing B47, overshoots in the speed can be dampened. Values that are too large lead to vibrations in the current and speed.

E07 n-post-ramp

E91 n-motor E15 n-motor-encoder B48 or ( too small)

E91 n-motor E15 n-motor-encoder or ( too large)B47

mech. frequency

Value range: 0.000 ... 1 ... 1.000.000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: R32; (raw value:1LSB=1); USS-Adr: 02 0B C0 00 hex

222Fh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 178


04


address

B48 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Integral Gain SLVC-HP: This parameter affects the dynamic properties of the motor. The larger B48 is, the faster the motor model can follow the actual speed. Setting note The correct setting can be checked by means of the speed curve. If an encoder is present during commissioning, E15 n-motor encoder should be considered, otherwise E91. If the motor can not follow the set speed ramp despite sufficiently large torque limits, B48 must be increased. Values that are too large lead to the fault 56:Overspeed.

E07 n-post-ramp

E91 n-motor E15 n-motor-encoder B48 or ( too small)

E91 n-motor E15 n-motor-encoder B48 or ( too large)

Value range: 1.000 ... 50 ... 50.000.000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: R32; (raw value:1LSB=1); USS-Adr: 02 0C 00 00 hex

2230h 0h

B52 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

Stator inductance: Inductance Lu-v of the motor winding in mH. Enter only for external motors. The value can be autotuned with the B41 action. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in mH: 0.001 ... 15,8 ... 2.147.483.647

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001mH; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 02 0D 00 00 hex

2234h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 179


04


address

B53 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

Stator winding resistance: Stator winding resistance Ru-v of the motor winding in ohm. Enter only for external motors. The value can be autotuned with the B41 action. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in Ohm: 0.001 ... 26 ... 2.147.483.647

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001Ohm; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 02 0D 40 00 hex

2235h 0h

B54 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Leakage factor: Ratio of leakage inductance to total inductance "Ls" of the motor NOTE The default value is sufficient for most motors and applications. Adjustments may become necessary when an external motor is connected. In such cases the value can be autotuned with the action B41. However, do not make this adjustment before consulting with STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH & Co. KG.

Value range: 0.010 ... 0,1 ... 0.300

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 0D 80 00 hex


2236h 0h

B55 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Magnetic saturation coefficient: The parameter specifies how much the motor is magnetically saturated at the nominal point. The parameter is important for the control accuracy of control type VC (B20 = 2:VC) in the field weakening area. NOTE The default value is sufficient for most motors and applications. Adjustments may become necessary when an external motor is connected. In such cases the value can be autotuned with the action B41. However, do not make this adjustment before consulting with STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH & Co. KG.

Value range: 0.000 ... 0,75 ... 0.950

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: I32; (raw value:2147483647 = 32767.000); USS-Adr: 02 0D C0 00 hex


2237h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 180


04


address

B56 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Proportional part of voltage controller: P-Gain of voltage regulator. Influence on the controller The voltage controller controls the voltage reserve of the motor. Settings to B56 affect the formation of E169 reference flux and E165 Id-ref. The P-part reduces the reference flux by the value entered in B56 for a 10V voltage difference.

Note that the parameters E168 actual flux and E169 reference flux are not available in the standard application. Setting note The correct setting can be checked using the curve of E165. Heavy vibrations when entering the field weakening area (E05 > C39) indicates control gains that are too large.

E165 Id-ref (optimum curve)E165 Id-ref (curve for voltage controller parameters that are too large)

basic speed range field weakening area

C39 Cutoff frequency

E05 f1-Motor

Value range in %: 1.0 ... 21 ... 800.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 02 0E 00 00 hex

2238h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 181


04


address

B57 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Integral part of voltage controller: I-Gain of voltage controller. Influence on the controller The voltage controller controls the voltage reserve of the motor. Settings to B56 affect the formation of E169 reference flux and E165 Id-ref. For a 10V voltage difference, the I-part reduces the reference magnetisation by the value entered in B57 in 100 cycles (250 µs for each one).


E165 Id-ref (optimum curve)E165 Id-ref (curve for voltage controller parameters that are too large)



E05 f1-Motor

Value range in %: 1.0 ... 21 ... 800.0


2239h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 182


04


address

B58 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Proportional part of the magnetisation controller: Proportional gain of magnetisation controller. Influence on the controller The magnetisation controller controls the reference magnetisation determined by the voltage controller and feed forward. Settings to B58 affect the formation of E165 Id-ref. For B58 = 100 % and a magnetisation difference of 1%, the P-part E165 Id-ref increases by 10 %.


E165 Id-ref (optimum curve)E165 Id-ref (curve for magnetisation parameters that are too high)

field weakening area E05 f1-Motorbasic speed range


Value range in %: 1.0 ... 12 ... 800.0


223Ah 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 183


04


address

B59 Axis

r=3, w=3

Minimum magnetization in part-load range: Control mode SLVC-HP has an efficiency controller which attempts to set the motor to its energy-optimized operating point. Output variable for this controller is E169 reference-flux. The parameter B59 Minimum magnetization part load is the lower limit for the nominal magnetization in the part-load range. In the field-weakening range, smaller magnetizations can also occur than those set in B59. NOTE - The larger B59 is set, the larger is the possible dynamism. 100% means maximum dynamics and

minimum efficiency. - With small values for B59 it may be necessary to adjust C31 Proportional gain n-control as the

motor otherwise tends to vibrate.

Value range in %: 35.0 ... 100 ... 100.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 02 0E C0 00 hex

223Bh 0h

B61 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

T-Motor (thermal): Time constant of motor heatup in seconds.

Value range in s: 0.1 ... 1080 ... 3276.7

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1s; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 0F 40 00 hex

223Dh 0h

B62 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

Motor inertia: Inertia J of the motor in kg cm². For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in kg cm2: 0.0001 ... 0,127 ... 2.147.483.647

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,0001kg cm2; Type: I32; (raw value:1LSB=0,0001); USS-Adr: 02 0F 80 00 hex

223Eh 0h

B63 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Mmax/Mnom: Relationship of breakdown torque of the motor to its nominal torque.

Value range: 1.0 ... 2,5 ... 8.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 8.0); USS-Adr: 02 0F C0 00 hex


223Fh 0h

B64 Axis

r=3, w=3

Integral time lq: Integral time of the current controller for the torque-generating share in msec. A setting under 0.6 msec causes an integral gain of 0 (corresponds to an infinite integral time). For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 3,1 ... 100.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 10 00 00 hex

2240h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 184


04


address

B65 Axis

r=3, w=3

Proportional gain torque controller: Proportional gain of the torque controller. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in %: 0.0 ... 74,4 ... 800.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 02 10 40 00 hex

2241h 0h

B66 Axis

r=3, w=3

Integral time Id: Integral time of the current controller for the flow-generating share in msec. A setting under 0.6 msec causes an integral gain of 0 (corresponds to an infinite integral time). For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 3,1 ... 100.0


Only visible when B20 is not 0:V/f-control.

2242h 0h

B67 Axis

r=3, w=3

Proportional gain flux: Proportional gain of the flow controller. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in %: 0.0 ... 37,2 ... 800.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 02 10 C0 00 hex


2243h 0h

B68 Axis

r=3, w=3

Kd-iq: D share of the torque controller. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in %: 0.0 ... 22,3 ... 595.8



2244h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 185


04


address

B70 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

TW: Thermal time constant of the winding. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in s: 0.01 ... 90 ... 327.67

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 11 80 00 hex

2246h 0h

B72 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

TH: Is used for the thermal motor model. The parameter specifies in % the ratio of housing temperature and winding temperature at steady thermal factor. Example: During stationary operation at nominal point, the housing has a temperature of 110 °C, the winding 150 °C, and the ambient temperature is 25 °C. This results in: B72 = (110°C-25°C) / (150°C-25°C) * 100 % = 68 %. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in %: 5.0 ... 52,4 ... 95.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I32; (raw value:409600·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 02 12 00 00 hex

2248h 0h

B73 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

tr0: Specifies the speed-independent friction of the motor. Is used in the calculation of the thermal motor model (i2t motor E23). For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in Nm: -32.768 ... 0,026 ... 32.767

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001Nm; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 12 40 00 hex

2249h 0h

B74 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

tr1: Specifies the speed-dependent friction of the motor. Is used in the calculation of the thermal motor model (i2t motor E23). For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in Nm/1000rpm: -32.768 ... 0,001 ... 32.767

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,0001Nm/1000rpm; Type: I16; (raw value:1LSB=0,0001·rpm); USS-Adr: 02 12 80 00 hex

224Ah 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 186


04


address

B82 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

I-max: Maximum current before the motor is de-magnetized. Specification in A. The specification is taken into account for the calculation of the permitted maximum torque for servo motors. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in A: 0.000 ... 3,48 ... 2.147.483.647


2252h 0h

B83 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

n-max motor: Maximum permissible speed for the motor. Specification in Rpm. For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the relevant parameters can be found in B04.

Value range in rpm: 0 ... 12500 ... 17 Bit

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 02 14 C0 00 hex

2253h 0h

B92 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Voltage limit of field weakening: Determines the entry point for field weakening. The inverter starts with field weakening when its output voltage reaches the part of A36 mains voltage entered in B92. Setting note The set value affects the dynamic properties of the drive: the smaller the value, the better the dynamic properties. the larger the value, the smaller the electrical consumption at an operating point.

Value range in %: 55.0 ... 80 ... 95.0


225Ch 0h

B295 Global

read (3)

Double transmission motor-encoder: Indicates whether double transmission monitoring is active for the SSI encoder used as the motor encoder. Evaluation of the encoder begins without double transmission monitoring but double transmission monitoring is automatically activated after a short time if the SSI encoder being used supports this. When monitoring is inactive, data security is reduced significantly. If the motor encoder is not an SSI encoder, the parameter has no meaning. NOTE The parameter can only be used when an SSI encoder is evaluated on the inverter.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 02 49 C0 00 hex

Only visible when SSI or EnDat®Encoder is used as the motor encoder.

2327h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 187


04


address

B296 Global

read (3)

Error-counter motor-encoder: Counts the number of tolerable errors of the motor encoder since the last device new start.

NOTE The parameter can only be used when an SSI or EnDat® encoder is evaluated on the inverter.



2328h 0h

B297 Axis

r=3, w=3

Maximum-speed motorencoder: B297 can be used for a plausibility check of the motor encoder signals for EnDat® and SSI encoders. The difference between two consecutive encoder positions are monitored. If this difference exceeds the speed specified in B297, a fault is triggered (37:n-feedback / double transmission, starting with V5.2: 37:Encoder / X4-speed or X120-speed).



Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 02 4A 40 00 hex


2329h 0h

B298 Axis

r=3, w=3

Error-tolerance motorencoder: Sets the tolerance of the inverter to errors of the motor encoder. This tolerance can be used to prevent a fault 37:Encoder when encoder errors occur sporadically. The inverter extrapolates an encoder value in this case. The parameter B298 specifies how many errors will be tolerated before the inverter malfunctions. Error evaluation is structured as shown below: Each arriving encoder value is checked. When an encoder error is determined, B299 and B298 are compared. If the error evaluation counter B299 is greater than or equal to B298, fault 37:Encoder is triggered. If B299 is less than B298, the error is tolerated. The counter status B299 is incremented by 1.0. If the arriving encoder value is correct, the error evaluation counter B299 is decremented by 0.1. Decrementation continues until the value 0 is reached. Example: With a setting in B298 of 1.0, one error is tolerated; at least 10 correct values must be determined before the next error so that a malfunction is not triggered. The following errors are tolerated: - EnDat®-CRC - EnDat®-Busy - SSI-double transmission - SSI-Busy - Violation of the maximum speed in B297 With other encoder errors (e.g., wire break), a fault is triggered immediately regardless of B298. Error tolerance may negatively affect the quality of movement. The wiring should be checked when encoder errors occur frequently.


Value range: 0.0 ... 1 ... 3.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1; Type: I8; USS-Adr: 02 4A 80 00 hex


232Ah 0h

B299 Global

read (3)

Error-evaluation motorencoder: Shows the current status of the error evaluation counter (see B298).


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1; Type: I8; USS-Adr: 02 4A C0 00 hex


232Bh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 188


04


address

B300.0 Global,

OFF

r=2, w=2

Brake test & start: WARNING Danger of injury or property damage due to defective motor halting brake. Starting the brake test action releases the motor brakes one after the other. During the encoder test and/or in the case of a faulty brake, the drive axis may move. Take special cautionary measures particularly in case of gravity-stressed axes. Restrict the direction of rotation in B306 if the drive is not permitted to rotate in a particular direction. Information The brake test requires a motor encoder. Only the configured (slip-free) motor encoder is evaluated. The brake test checks to see whether the brakes can still provide the necessary stopping torque. For this purpose an encoder test is performed initially with the brake released. Then brake 1 is applied and the drive is taught a parameterizable testing torque in every permissible direction of rotation. If the drive determined a movement and the brake could not provide the required counter torque, the test is considered failed. The parameterizable testing torques are entered in the parameters B304.x (positive torque) and B305.x (negative torque). This is repeated for brake 2 (if brake 2 exists). Afterwards, the encoder is tested again. Information Remember that the motor torque is limited to the values in C03 and C05. If greater values are entered in B304.x and B305.x, they cannot be achieved. Check E62 and E66 to determine whether additional torque limits are also in effect. Information Remember that, with thrust axes, the torque to be provided by the motor for the direction of revolution in which loads are reduced is calculated as follows: MParameter = MBrake - MLoad MParameter: Torque to be entered in B304.x or B305.x MBrake: Stopping torque to be provided by the brake MLoad: Load torque Information During the brake test action, the cycle time is set internally to 32 ms. This occurs when the action is activated. After conclusion of the action, the previous cycle time is used again. Prerequisites for the performance of a brake test: You have parameterized the brake activation with the parameter F08 and F09. In B304.0 you specified for brake 1 the torque which must stop the brake in the positive direction

of revolution. In B305.0 you specified for brake 1 the torque which must stop the brake in the negative direction

of revolution. In B304.1 you specified for brake 2 the torque which must stop the brake in the positive direction

of revolution. In B305.1 you specified for brake 2 the torque which must stop the brake in the negative direction

of revolution. If the drive may only revolve in one direction, you have restricted the direction of revolution for the

test in parameter B306. You have entered the angle of revolution in B307 which the drive evaluates as standstill.

232Ch 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 189


04


address

Information If you would like to perform the action and brake management considers a brake test mandatory (fault 72), the fault must be acknowledged before the action starts. However, the acknowledgment is only in effect for 5 minutes. If a valid brake test B300 is not performed during this time, the fault appears again. Once you have acknowledged the malfunction, you can continue with the perform brake test instruction. To perform the brake test, proceed as follows: 1. Change to the device state Ready for switch on. 2. Set the action B300.0 brake test & start to 1:active. 3. Switch on the enable signal. (1) The inverter starts the brake test and the motor begins rotating. The drive may move during

this process. 4. Wait until B300.1 indicates the result 100 % and B300.2 indicates the result 0:error free. 5. Switch the enable signal off. The brake test was performed successfully. If you did not achieve the result, parameter B300.2 will give you information on the cause. The inverter keeps an internal brake test memory with the last 20 events from B300.2 as well as the actually achieved stopping torques for brakes 1 and 2 in the positive and negative direction. When the result is 0: error free, these correspond to the values parameterized in B304.x and B305.x. If the values stored in the brake test memory are less than these, the brake test was not successful. The maximum positioning path for the brake test is approx. 45° in both directions. If a direction of revolution is restricted, the positioning path is 2 x 45° in the permitted direction. A stopping distance based on the torque and the inertia ratio is added in both cases. With coupled mechanics, you will have to include the gear ratio in the calculations. When both directions of revolution are permitted in B306, positioning in the positive direction occurs first. Remember that this calculation is only valid for an intact brake. When the tested brake cannot provide the required stopping torque, the positioning path cannot be calculated. In this case, the inverter switches off within < 10 ms and activates a second brake (if one exists). The standstill of the drive is then primarily affected by the application time and functional efficiency of the second brake. If there is no second brake, the motor coasts down. (1) If the enable signal is not switched on within 30 seconds, the function is interrupted automatically.


B300.1 Global

read (2)

Process: Progress of the brake test in %.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 02 4B 00 01 hex

232Ch 1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 190


04


address

B300.2 Global

read (2)

Result: After conclusion of the brake test action, the result can be queried here. The achieved test torques (in positive and negative directions - for brakes 1 and 2) of the last 20 tests are stored in a brake test memory. These can only be indicated in POSITool.

0: error free 1: aborted. The brake test action was aborted. Reasons for the abortion may be: - The enable was switched off during the test. - The enable signal has not been switched on within 30 seconds. Perform the brake test again. 2: maximal torque not reached for brake 1. During the test, brake 1 could not maintain the required

torque. Perform the grind-brake function for brake 1 or replace brake 1. Then perform the brake test again.

3: maximal torque not reached for brake 2. During the test, brake 2 could not maintain the required torque. Perform the grind-brake function for brake 2 or replace brake 2. Then perform the brake test again.

4: Fault; Possible reasons for this message: - No brake is parameterized. Set F08 to 1:active and F09 to the brake being used. - No encoder is parameterized. Determine whether an encoder exists and whether the

connected motor can be operated in Servo control or Vector control control mode. Set B20 accordingly.

- Brake test has not been activated in the state "Ready for switch on" (e.g. in the state "Switch on inhibit").

5: encoder defective. Reasons for this message may be: - The brake(s) does/do not release. Test the brakes. - The encoder is defective. Contact the STÖBER hotline at +49 (0) 180 5 786323. 6: E62/E66 torque limit; Possible reasons for this message: - C03/C05 is not set high enough. - Other application-dependent torque limits are in effect. - The device is overloaded.


232Ch 2h

B301.0 Global,

OFF

r=2, w=2

Brake 1 grind &start: WARNING Danger of injury or property damage due to defective motor halting brake. Starting the brake grinding function releases the motor brakes one after the other. During the encoder test and/or in the case of a faulty brake, the drive axis may move. Take special cautionary measures particularly in case of gravity-stressed axes. Restrict the direction of rotation in B306 if the drive is not permitted to rotate in a particular direction. WARNING Danger due to movement of the drive. During the action, the motor rotates at approx. 20 Rpm and with the torque entered in C03 or C05. Check E62 and E66 to determine whether additional torque limits are also in effect. Ensure the following: - Before the function starts, make sure the drive is in a position in which it is permissible for it to

move at this speed and torque. Information Note that this function can only be used with the SDS 5000 in conjunction with a BRS 5000 and encoder feedback. Information

The brake grinding function can, unlike the function B300 Brake test, also be used on asynchronous motors without encoder.

232Dh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 191


04


address

Information Please note that the brake grinding function is defined for the STÖBER drive system (gear motor with brake and, if applicable ServoStop). For example, you cannot use the brake grinding function with brakes that are attached to the output power of the gear unit. It is essential to clarify the technical demands on a system from another manufacturer before you use this function. During the brake grinding function, the brake is repeatedly applied for approx. 0.7 s and then released for approx. 0.7 s while the motor is rotating with approx. 20 rpm. This grinds off any deposits from the friction surface which may affect the halting function. Action B301.0 starts the grind-brake function for brake 1. You can parameterize: - how often the brake is applied (B308) during rotation - how often the drive is to rotate in each direction (B309) - whether one direction of revolution is inhibited (B306) Information During the brake grinding action, the cycle time is set internally to 32 ms. The change occurs when the action is activated. After the action is concluded, the previous cycle time is used again. Prerequisites for the use of the grind-brake function: You have parameterized brake activation. In B308 you have entered how often the brake is to be applied while rotating in one direction. In B309 you have entered how often the drive is to grind in each direction. In B306 you have specified whether one direction of rotation is inhibited. The brake should be ground with its maximum holding torque. For normal motor-controller

combinations this is the case with C03/C05 = ±200 %. Check E62 and E66 to see whether other torque limits are also in effect. Information If you would like to perform the action and brake management considers a brake test mandatory (fault 72), the fault must be acknowledged before the action starts. However, the acknowledgment is only in effect for 5 minutes. If a valid brake test B300 is not performed during this time, the fault appears again. Once you have acknowledge the malfunction, you can continue with the brake grinding function instruction. To perform the brake grinding function, proceed as shown below: 1. Change to the device state Ready for switch on. 2. Set parameter B301.0 grind brake 1 & start to 1:active. 3. Switch on the enable signal. (1) The drive begins to revolve in accordance with the parameter specifications. 4. Wait until parameter B301.1 indicates the result 100 % and parameter B301.2 the result 0: error

free. 5. Turn the enable off. You have successfully performed the brake grinding function.

If you did not achieve the result, parameter B301.2 will provide you with information on the cause. The inverter maintains an internal memory with the operating times of the last 40 successful grinding procedures. All grinding procedures are counted in parameter E176 regardless of the result. The maximum positioning path is B308 x 0.5 motor revolutions. With coupled mechanics, you will have to include the gear ratio in your calculations. When both directions of revolution are permitted in B306, positioning in the positive direction occurs first. (1) If the enable signal is not switched on within 30 seconds, the function is interrupted automatically.


Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 192


04


address

B301.1 Global

read (2)

Process: Progress of the grind-brake 1 action in %.


232Dh 1h

B301.2 Global

read (2)

Result: After conclusion of the grind-brake 1 action, the result can be queried here. The operating times of the last 40 error-free grind-brake X actions are saved. This memory can only be indicated in POSITool.

0: error free 1: aborted. The brake grinding function was terminated. Reasons for the termination may be: - The enable was switched off during the test. - The enable signal has not been switched on within 30 seconds. Perform the brake grinding function again. 4: Fault; Possible reasons for this message: - Brake 1 is not parameterized. Set F08 to 1:active and F09 to 1:brake1 or 3:brake1and2. - Brake grinding 1 has not been activated in the state "Ready for switch on" (e.g. in the state

"Switch on inhibit").


232Dh 2h

B302.0 Global,

OFF

r=2, w=2

Brake 2 grind &start: WARNING Danger of injury or property damage due to defective motor halting brake. Starting the brake grinding function releases the motor brakes one after the other. During the encoder test and/or in the case of a faulty brake, the drive axis may move. Take special cautionary measures particularly in case of gravity-stressed axes. Restrict the direction of rotation in B306 if the drive is not permitted to rotate in a particular direction. WARNING Danger due to movement of the drive. During the action, the motor rotates at approx. 20 Rpm and with the torque entered in C03 or C05. Check E62 and E66 to determine whether additional torque limits are also in effect. Ensure the following: - Before the function starts, make sure the drive is in a position in which it is permissible for it to

move at this speed and torque. Information Note that this function can only be used with the SDS 5000 in conjunction with a BRS 5000 and encoder feedback. Information

The brake grinding function can, unlike the function B300 Brake test, also be used on asynchronous motors without encoder.

Information

Please note that the brake grinding function is defined for the STÖBER drive system (gear motor with brake and, if applicable ServoStop). For example, you cannot use the brake grinding function with brakes that are attached to the output power of the gear unit. It is essential to clarify the technical demands on a system from another manufacturer before you use this function.

232Eh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 193


04


address

During the brake grinding function, the brake is repeatedly applied for approx. 0.7 s and then released for approx. 0.7 s while the motor is rotating with approx. 20 rpm. This grinds off any deposits from the friction surface which may affect the halting function. Action B302.0 starts the grind-brake function for brake 2. You can parameterize: - how often the brake is applied (B308) during rotation - how often the drive is to rotate in each direction (B309) - whether a direction of revolution is inhibited (B306) Information During the brake grinding action, the cycle time is set internally to 32 ms. The change occurs when the action is activated. After the action is concluded, the previous cycle time is used again. Prerequisites for the use of the grind-brake function: You have parameterized brake activation. In B308 you have entered how often the brake is to be applied while rotating in one direction. In B309 you have entered how often the drive is to grind in each direction. In B306 you have specified whether one direction of rotation is inhibited. The brake should be ground with its maximum holding torque. For normal motor-controller

combinations this is the case with C03/C05 = ±200 %. Check E62 and E66 to see whether other torque limits are also in effect. Information If you would like to perform the action and brake management considers a brake test mandatory (fault 72), the fault must be acknowledged before the action starts. However, the acknowledgment is only in effect for 5 minutes. If a valid brake test B300 is not performed during this time, the fault appears again. Once you have acknowledge the malfunction, you can continue with the brake grinding function instruction. To perform the brake grinding function, proceed as shown below: 1. Change to the device state Ready for switch on. 2. Set parameter B302.0 grind brake 2 & start to 1:active. 3. Switch on the enable signal. (1) The drive begins to revolve in accordance with the parameter specifications. 4. Wait until parameter B302.1 indicates the result 100 % and parameter B302.2 the result 0: error

free. 5. Turn the enable off. You have successfully performed the brake grinding function. If you did not achieve the result, parameter B302.2 will provide you with information on the cause. The inverter maintains an internal memory with the operating times of the last 40 successful grinding procedures. All grinding procedures are counted in parameter E176 regardless of the result. The maximum positioning path is B308 x 0.5 motor revolutions. With coupled mechanics, you will have to include the gear ratio in your calculations. When both directions of revolution are permitted in B306, positioning in the positive direction occurs first. (1) If the enable signal is not switched on within 30 seconds, the function is interrupted automatically.


Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 194


04


address

B302.1 Global

read (2)

Process: Progress of the grind-brake 2 action in %.


232Eh 1h

B302.2 Global

read (2)

Result: After conclusion of the grind-brake 2 action, the result can be queried here. The operating times of the last 40 error-free grind-brake X actions are saved. This memory can only be indicated in POSITool.

0: fehlerfrei 1: aborted. The brake grinding function was terminated. Reasons for the termination may be: - The enable was switched off during the test. - The enable signal has not been switched on within 30 seconds. Perform the brake grinding function again. 4: Fault; Possible reasons for this message: - Brake 2 is not parameterized. Set F08 to 1:active and F09 to 2:brake2 or 3:brake1and2. - Brake grinding 2 has not been activated in the state "Ready for switch on" (e.g. in the state

"Switch on inhibit").


232Eh 2h

B304.0 Axis

r=2, w=3

Max-positive torque for B300: The maximum positive torque to be impressed during the B300 brake test action as a percentage of motor standstill torque M0 for servo motors and nominal torque Mn for asynchronous motors. If the maximum torque is not maintained by the brake during the brake test, the action terminates with the result B300.2 = maximum torque not achieved for brake 1/2. Enter the maximum torque for brake 1 in B304.0 and in B304.1 for brake 2.

Value range in %: 0 ... 100 ... 200

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800%); USS-Adr: 02 4C 00 00 hex

Only visible when F08 brake is not 0:inactive.

2330h

Array

0h

B304.1 Axis

r=2, w=3

Max-positive torque for B300: The maximum positive torque to be impressed during the B300 brake test action as a percentrage of motor standstill torque M0 for servo motors and nominal torque Mn for asynchronous motors. If the maximum torque is not maintained by the brake during the brake test, the action terminates with the result B300.2 = maximum torque not achieved for brake 1/2. Enter the maximum torque for brake 1 in B304.0 and in B304.1 for brake 2.

Value range in %: 0 ... 100 ... 200



2330h

Array

1h

B305.0 Axis

r=2, w=3

Max-negative torque for B300: The maximum negative torque to be impressed during the B300 brake test action as a percentrage of motor standstill torque M0 for servo motors and nominal torque Mn for asynchronous motors. If the maximum torque is not maintained by the brake during the brake test, the action terminates with the result B300.2 = maximum torque not achieved for brake 1/2. Enter the maximum torque for brake 1 in B305.0 and in B305.1 for brake 2.

Value range in %: -200 ... -100 ... 0



2331h

Array

0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 195


04


address

B305.1 Axis

r=2, w=3

Max-negative torque for B300: The maximum negative torque to be impressed during the B300 brake test action as a percentrage of motor standstill torque M0 for servo motors and nominal torque Mn for asynchronous motors. If the maximum torque is not maintained by the brake during the brake test, the action terminates with the result B300.2 = maximum torque not achieved for brake 1/2. Enter the maximum torque for brake 1 in B305.0 and in B305.1 for brake 2.

Value range in %: -200 ... -100 ... 0



2331h

Array

1h

B306 Axis

r=2, w=3

Move direction for B300-B302: With axes which have only one mechanically permissible direction, all actions for B300 brake test, B301 grind-brake 1 and B302 grind-brake 2 are only performed in the specified direction.

0: positive and negative. Both directions are permitted. 1: positive. Only the positive direction is permitted. 2: negative. Only the negative direction is permitted.



2332h 0h

B307 Axis

r=2, w=3

Standstill window for B300: The standstill window to be monitored in degrees during the B300 brake test action. If, during the brake test, the axis moves by more than the angle specified here, the action is terminated with the result B300.2 = maximum torque not achieved for brake 1/2.

Value range in °: 0.0 ... 1,8 ... 360.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1°; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 2879.9 °); USS-Adr: 02 4C C0 00 hex


2333h 0h

B308 Axis

r=2, w=3

No of intervals for B301/B302: B308 contains how often the brake is to be applied per direction during the actions B301 brake1 grind and B302 brake 2 grind during a grinding procedure.

Value range: 1 ... 5 ... 255



2334h 0h

B309 Axis

r=2, w=3

No of cycles for B301/B302: The repetitions of the grinding positioning movements in the positive and negative direction to be performed for actions B301 grind-brake 1 and B302 grind-brake 2.

Value range: 1 ... 1 ... 255



2335h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 196


04


address

B310 Global

r=2, w=3

Brake management: Activates or deactivates brake management. Active brake management forces the regular performance of the B300 brake test action.

Information When brake management is inactive, all E177 time passed since last brake test timers are cleared.

0: inactive: Brake management is switched off. 1: global; Brake management is globally active. Common monitoring is performed for all

parameterized axes. The settings in F08 brake and B311 timeout for brake test B300 on axis 1 apply to brake management, regardless of the number of configured axes.

2: axis spec.: Brake management is active axis-specifically. An independent monitoring procedure is performed for each parameterized axis. This setting must be selected when several motors are connected to the inverter via POSISwitch®. The settings must be made for brake management on each configured axis (e.g., in 1.F08 for axis 1 and in 3.F08 for axis 3).


2336h 0h

B311 Axis

r=2, w=3

Timeout for brake test B300: Defines the time within which action B300 brake test should be performed. After the set time expires, the device indicates a message. After the set time expires for the second time, the device changes to the device fault state. Gerätezustand Störung. To avoid interrupting your production process, the malfunction is only generated if there is no enable. This makes it possible to delay the timeout. The fault must be acknowledged before the actions B300 brake test, B301 brake 1 grind and B302 brake 2 grind can be performed.

Value range in hours: 1 ... 168 ... 8760

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1hours; Type: U32; (raw value:4294967295 = 298261 hours); USS-Adr: 02 4D C0 00 hex

Only visible when B310 exists and is not 0:inactive.

2337h 0h

C.. Machine Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

C01 Axis

r=2, w=2

n-max: Maximum permissible speed. The speed is related to the motor shaft speed. When C01*1.1 + 100 Rpm is exceeded, the inverter assumes fault "56:Overspeed." C01 may not exceed the maximum permissible motor speed B83. For positioning application the n-forwardfeed is limited to C01.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 03 00 40 00 hex

2401h 0h

C03 Axis

r=1, w=1

Max-positive Torque: Positive maximum torque in % of motor standstill torque M0 with servo motors and nominal torque Mn for asynchronous motors. If the maximum torque is exceeded, the controller reacts with the message "47:M-MaxLimit." Depending on the operational status and the configuration being used, the actual, active, positive, maximum torque may differ from C03. The active, positive maximum torque can be monitored in E62. See also E22 and C06 (if present).

Value range in %: 0 ... 150 ... 750


2403h 0h

C05 Axis

r=1, w=1

Max-negative Torque: Positive maximum torque in % of motor standstill torque M0 with servo motors and nominal torque Mn for asynchronous motors. When the maximum torque is exceeded, the controller reacts with the message "47:M-MaxLimit" and E180 = 1. Depending on the operational state and the configuration being used, the actual, active, negative maximum torque may differ from C05. The active, negative, maximum torque can be monitored in E66. See also E22 and C06 (if present).

Value range in %: -750 ... -150 ... 0


2405h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 197


04


address

C06 Axis

r=2, w=2

Factor torque limit: Weighting factor for the torque limits. The reference value can be selected for most standard applications via C130. When the parameterized torque limits C03, C05 specify other limit values, the smaller value becomes the active torque limit. C06 must be increased for some standard applications to allow torques over 200 % to take effect in C03, C05.

Value range in %: 0.0 ... 200 ... 800.0


2406h 0h

C08 Axis

r=2, w=2

Quick stop torque limit: Quick stop causes the inverter to switch to the torque limit set in C08. The limits specified in C03, C05 or other limits specified by the application are ignored during the quick stop. However, the effective torque limit can be automatically reduced if an operating limit of the inverter or the motor would be violated otherwise.

Value range in %: 0 ... 150 ... 750


2408h 0h

C20 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Startup Mode: Specifies the startup behavior of the drive.

0: normal; Default setting 1: load start; For machines with increased break away torque. During the time time-load start

(C22), the motor torque is increased to torque load start (C21) and the speed is controlled with a sixteenth of the current ramp.

2: cycle characteristic; A torque pre-control is performed, i.e. the inverter calculates the required torque from the specified motor-type (B00) and the ratio of the inertias J-load/J-motor (C30). This calculated torque is impressed on the drive. Forward feed is only calculated for acceleration or deceleration procedures. When reference value changes are less than the used ramp or the drive is in static operation, forward feed is deactivated. This provides a tolerance to reference value noise.

3: capturing; A turning motor is connected to the inverter. The inverter determines the actual speed of the motor, synchronizes itself and specifies the appropriate reference value.

4: cycle characteristic 2; A torque forward feed is performed with the setting 2:cycle characteristic (i.e., the inverter calculates the required torque from the specified motor type (B00) and the inertia ratio of load/motor (C30). This calculated torque is impressed on the drive.

In comparison to 2:cycle characteristic, the drive tends to vibrate with this setting.



2414h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 198


04


address

C21 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Torque load start: meaning dependent on B20 control mode. B20 = 1: Sensorless vector control Only when C20 = 1 (load start). Determination of the torque for the load start. B20 = 3: SLVC-HP C21 is used to specify a constant load torque (friction, weight for vertical axes, etc.) for the load start at speeds < 5% B13 nominal speed. Reference value for C21 is B18. The torque specified in C21 always refers to the motor shaft.

M load

Mmotor C21

n1

n2

C21 is irrelevant for speeds > 5% B13 nominal speed. The total torque is made up of an acceleration torque and C21. The acceleration torque calculated from the mass moment of inertia of the complete system, the acceleration (D00 for the speed application, derivation of the reference speed for position applications) and the load torque. C21 has no influence on the brake torque. This is only calculated from the brake ramp. The effects of C21 are visible at E166 Iq-ref. If the actual load torque is significantly smaller than C21, this leads to a jerky start and large stationary speed differences. If C21 is significantly smaller than the load torque, the motor can not accelerate.

E166 Iq-ref

acceleration torque

C21

constant travelacceleration brake

brake torque

Value range in %: 0 ... 10 ... 400


2415h 0h

C22 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Time load start: Only when C20 = 1. Time for the difficult startup with the torque defined under C21.

Value range in s: 0.0 ... 5 ... 10.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1s; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 32.8 s); USS-Adr: 03 05 80 00 hex


2416h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 199


04


address

C30 Axis

r=2, w=3

J-load/J-motor: Ratio of the mass inertia of load to motor. The meaning is dependent on B20 control mode. B20 = 1: Sensorless vector control When using the SLVC control mode, C30 affects the dynamics of the torque limit. If the drive is operated in this control mode in cycle operation, C30 is used for the calculation of the feed forward. B20 = 3: SLVC-HP When using the SLVC-HP control mode, C30 has an influence on the calculation of the acceleration and brake torque in the low speed range (< 5 % nominal speed). D00, D01 and C21 also have an influence on the acceleration and brake torque.

Value range: 0.0 ... 0 ... 512.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 512.0); USS-Adr: 03 07 80 00 hex

241Eh 0h

C31 Axis

r=2, w=2

Proportional gain n-controller: Proportional gain of the speed controller. With C31 = 100 % and a speed deviation of 32 Rpm, the P-share of the speed controller supplies the standstill moment M0 as reference value to the current or torque controller.

Value range in %: 0.0 ... 10 ... 800.0


241Fh 0h

C32 Axis

r=2, w=2

Integral time n-controller: Time constant of the I share in speed controller. A short integral time causes a high integration speed and thus increases the "static rigidity" of the drive. With dynamic processes, a short integral time can cause overswinging in the target position. In this case, increase C32. The I-controller is deactivated with C32 < 1 msec.

At C31 = 100 % and a speed deviation of 32 Rpm, the I share of the speed controller supplies the nominal motor torque for the current or speed torque controller precisely after the integral time C32.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 50 ... 3276.7


2420h 0h

C33 Axis

r=3, w=3

Low pass reference speed: Reference value smoothing. C33 should be increased in case of reference value noise, vibrating mechanics or large external masses.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 0 ... 500.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.12; USS-Adr: 03 08 40 00 hex

2421h 0h

C34 Axis

r=2, w=2

n-motor low pass: Smoothing time constant for the measured motor speed in msec. Any noise during the measurement of the motor speed causes disagreeable noise and an additional thermal motor load. C34 helps to reduce speed noise and thus improve the smoothness of running. C34 should be kept as low as possible since an increase of C34 reduces the achievable controller gain C31 and thus the dynamics.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 0,8 ... 10.0


2422h 0h

C36 Axis

r=2, w=2

Reference torque low pass: Smoothing time constant for the torque reference value on the output of the speed controller in msec. Is used to suppress vibration and resonance. The effect of torque smoothing is dosed with C37.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 1 ... 40.0


2424h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 200


04


address

C37 Axis

r=3, w=3

Reference torque filter: The torque reference value is generated on the output of the speed controller from two components whose relationship is affected by C37. Direct output of the PI speed controller (share corresponds to 100 %-C37). Smoothed output of PI speed controller (share corresponds to C37). For maximum dynamics, set C37 = 0 %. The reference value low pass is cancelled out with the time constant C36. C37 can be increased to 100 % to attenuate the vibrations.

Value range in %: 0 ... 25 ... 100


2425h 0h

C38 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Derating speed-controller: derating of the speed controller in the field weakening area. C38 specifies what percentage of the speed controller gain set in C31 is still used for 200 % B15 nominal frequency. Derating is also performed for the I-Gain (ki = C31/C32). Derating starts with initial field weakening (E05 f1-Motor > C39 cutoff frequency) and reaches the value for double the nominal frequency entered in C38.

C32 integral time n-ctrl

C31 proportionalgain n-control

E07 n-post-ramp-

Proportional gain

Integralgain

Derating

Speed controller

E166 Iq-refMmax

PI controllerMmin

C38/100

1

C39 2*B15

X

X

E91 n-Motor Example: C31 = 10 %, C32 = 50 msec, C38 = 50 % Controller gains for E05 < C39: kp = C31 = 10 % ki = C31/C32 = 0,2 %/msec Controller gains for E05 = 2 * B15: kp = C31 = 5 % ki = C31/C32 = 0,1 %/msec

Value range in %: 25.0 ... 100 ... 800.0


2426h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 201


04


address

C39 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Cutoff frequency: Determines the cutoff frequency of the magnetisation feed forward. Influence on the controller The feed forward consists of a magnetisation frequency characteristic curve that controls the reference magnetisation (independent of the motor voltage). If E05 < C39 applies, the feed forward is constant. Magnetisation is reduced for larger frequencies. C39 also has some influence on the tracking of the speed controller gain with C38.

E05 f1-Motor

E165Id-ref

E168 Actual flux

E03 DC-link-voltage

E04 U-Motor

E169reference-flux

voltage controller

feed forwardMagn.

magnetisation controller

f

Note that the parameters E168 actual flux and E169 reference flux are not available in the standard application. Setting note The selection of C39 is determined by A36 supply voltage. A reference value for C39 can be calculated as follows: C39 = A36/B14 * B15 * 0.82.

E165 Id-ref (C39 )= DefaultE165 Id-ref C39(changes to )



E05 f1-Motor

Value range in Hz: 0.0 ... 50 ... 200.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1Hz; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 200.0 Hz); USS-Adr: 03 09 C0 00 hex

2427h 0h

C40 Axis

r=2, w=2

n-window: With applications without brake control (e.g., fast reference value), "standstill reached" is valid within a window of ±C40. This signal means "quick stop concluded" for the device controller.

Value range in rpm: -8191 ... 30 ... 8191

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 8191 rpm); USS-Adr: 03 0A 00 00 hex

2428h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 202


04


address

C41 Axis

r=3, w=3

Operating range source: The parameters C41 to C49 offer a universal comparator block for monitoring a working range. C41 specifies the source to be monitored. A coordinate such as "E90" (M-Motor) must be entered. Only parameters of the data type "I16" can be used as sources.

Value range: A00 ... 1.G333 ... A.Gxxx.yyyy (Parameter number in plain text)


2429h 0h

C42 Axis

r=3, w=3

Operating range factor: The signal with the source parameterized with C41 is multiplied by C42 before the comparison with the upper and lower limit occurs.

Value range in %: -800.0 ... 25 ... 800.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 03 0A 80 00 hex

242Ah 0h

C43 Axis

r=3, w=3

Operating range low pass: C43 specifies the time constant of a PT1 low pass. Useful when the signal to be monitored has noise. NOTE From firmware version V 5.6-F, C43 is used in the application Comfort reference value for smoothing E91 n-Motor for generation of the parameter D442 forward direction.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 10 ... 200.5

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.11; USS-Adr: 03 0A C0 00 hex

242Bh 0h

C44 Axis

r=3, w=3

Operating range mode: With C44 = 1, the amount (absolute value) of the signal to be monitored is generated.

0: range; 1: absolute;

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: I8; USS-Adr: 03 0B 00 00 hex

242Ch 0h

C45 Axis

r=3, w=3

Operating range lower limit: Lower limit (minimum) of the operating range.

Value range in %: -800.0 ... -100 ... 800.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 03 0B 40 00 hex

242Dh 0h

C46 Axis

r=3, w=3

Operating range upper limit: Upper limit (maximum) of the operating range.

Value range in %: -800.0 ... 100 ... 800.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 03 0B 80 00 hex

242Eh 0h

C48 Axis

read (3)

Operating range status: Result of the operating range. C48 assumes the value 1 when the signal to be monitored is less than C45. If C48 has the value 2, the signal to be monitored is greater than C46.

0: in range; 1: below range; 2: above range;


2430h 0h

C49 Axis

read (3)

Operating range actual value: Current value of the signal to be monitored whose source was specified by C41 after multiplication with C42. The value is indicated in the relative scaling of the limits C45 and C46 and not in the physical unit of the signal source.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 03 0C 40 00 hex

2431h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 203


04


address

C61 Axis

r=3, w=3

Speed limiter: Switches the speed limiter on. When n-limiter is on, the inverter still limits only the maximum speed and is in torque control mode. Remember that the parameter is automatically set by the comfort reference value application when torque control is parameterized. You must set C61 in the technology controller application if you want to use torque control. Torque control is not possible for any of the other applications.

0: inactive; Normal speed control (possible with higher-level position control, see C62). 1: active; Torque control with speed limiter.


243Dh 0h

C62 Axis

r=3, w=3

Position ctrl: Switch position control on and off. Position control is used, for example, for positioning or precise-angle synchronous operation. With all positioning applications (also without encoder), C62 = 1 is required.

0: inactive; 1: active; position control


243Eh 0h

C130 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

Torque limit source: Selection of the source for the signal of the external torque limit "M-Max." It can be permanently specified that the signal is supplied by the analog inputs or the fieldbus. With C130 = 4:Parameter, the (global) parameter C230 is used as the signal source. The resulting torque limit is indicated in C330.

0: 0 (zero); 1: AE1; 2: AE2; 3: AE3; 4: parameter;


2482h 0h

C180 Axis

read (1)

Rangecontrol upper limit: Binary signal, assumes the value "1" when the actual value of range monitoring (C49) exceeds the maximum permissible value (can be set with C46) on the output.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 03 2D 00 00 hex

24B4h 0h

C181 Axis

read (1)

Rangecontrol lower limit: Binary signal, assumes the value "1" when the actual value of range monitoring (C49) drops below the minimum permissible value (can be set with C45) on the output.



24B5h 0h

C230 Global

r=2, w=2

Torque limit: Specification for the torque limit (absolute value) via fieldbus if the signal source is C130 = 4:Parameter.

Value range in %: -200 ... 200 ... 200

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=200%); USS-Adr: 03 39 80 00 hex

24E6h 0h

C330 Axis

read (2)

Torque limit: Indication of the value of the Torque Limit signal on the interface for calculation of the torque limits. The internal, currently effective torque limits also depend on the fixed torque limits C03 and C05 as well as any possible torque limit due to the i²t model. The current limits are indicated in E62 and E66.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=200%); USS-Adr: 03 52 80 00 hex

254Ah 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 204


04

D.. Reference Value Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

D00 Axis

r=2, w=2

Acceleration ramp: Acceleration ramp of the speed ramp generator.

Value range in ms/3000rpm: 1 ... 100 ... 49152000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms/3000rpm; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.10; USS-Adr: 04 00 00 00 hex

2600h 0h

D01 Axis

r=2, w=2

Deceleration ramp: Deceleration ramp of the speed ramp generator.



2601h 0h

D02 Axis

r=2, w=2

Speed (max.ref.value): D02 is used to scale a speed reference value. A reference value is

specified in Volt or % via an analog input or via the fieldbus. This relative reference value is multiplied by D02 to obtain a reference speed in Rpm. In the application quick reference value, D02 is the reference value speed at 10 V on the analog input if the scaling of the analog input corresponds to the default setting. In the application quick reference value, D02 does not act as speed limitation. When the application includes a complete reference value characteristic curve, D02 is then the speed when reference value specification = D03.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 8191 rpm); USS-Adr: 04 00 80 00 hex

2602h 0h

D80 Axis

r=2, w=2

Ramp smoothening: An acceleration or braking procedure is extended during ramp smoothening by the time specified in D80. At the beginning of an acceleration or braking procedure, the ramp is linearly adjusted from 0 to the full value in the time D80. Near the end of the procedure, the ramp is adjusted during this time from the full value to 0 (trapezoid-shaped progression of the ramp). This corresponds to conventional jerk limitation. The speed has a parabola-shaped progression. With D80 = 0, quick stop (e.g., due to a malfunction) and during a load start, ramp smoothening is not active. The ramp which the ramp smoothening affects is dependent on the application selected (see list below). NOTE The ramp is only extended by D80 when ramp smoothening, ramp and reference value change are adapted to each other in such a way that the maximum ramp value can be achieved (trapezoid-shaped progression of the ramp). In addition, all desired lengths of ramp smoothening times cannot be set. The maximum ramp smoothening time is first specified by the value range of D80 (maximum of 10000 ms). For long ramps, this range is restricted to the value 49152000 / current ramp. Application Parameter Fast reference value D00, D01 Technology controller D00, D01 Comfort reference value Depending on the valid main reference value

Value range in ms: 0 ... 0 ... 10000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 04 14 00 00 hex

2650h 0h

D81 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Quick stop deceleration (decel-q): Quick stop ramp. Takes effect when a quick stop is executed (also for fault reaction = quick stop). The drive is decelerated with the braking ramp set here.



2651h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 205


04


address

D93 Global

r=1, w=1

Reference value generator: For commissioning and optimization of speed control. If D93 = 0:bipolar, then +D95 and -D95 are specified alternately. If D93 = 1:unipolar, then 0 rpm and D95 are specified alternately. Each speed specification remains valid for the time D94.

0: bipolar; Normal reference value selection. 1: unipolar; ±D95 is cyclically specified as reference value. The time can be set in D94.


265Dh 0h

D94 Global

r=1, w=1

Ref. val. generator time: The reference value changes each time this period of time expires.

Value range in ms: -32768 ... 500 ... 32767


265Eh 0h

D95 Global

r=1, w=1

Ref. val. generator speed: Speed reference value of the reference value generator.

Value range in rpm: -8191 ... 250 ... 8191

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 8191 rpm); USS-Adr: 04 17 C0 00 hex

265Fh 0h

D96.0 Global

r=1, w=1

Reference value generator & start: Writing a one starts the reference value generator action. A square-shaped reference value is specified for the motor. The action can only be used with control modes servo-control and vector control (control mode B20). The enable must be LOW at the starting point. After D96.0 = 1, the enable must be switched HIGH. Any existing brake is automatically released. WARNING Starting the action releases the motor brake. Since, due to the action, the motor is not sufficiently energized, it is unable to carry any loads (e.g., in a lifting system). For this reason the action may only be performed with motors which are not installed in a system.


2660h 0h

D96.1 Global

read (1)

Process: Shows the progress of the reference value generator action in %.


2660h 1h

D96.2 Global

read (1)

Result: Shows the result of the reference value generator action.



2660h 2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 206


04


address

D100 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Reverse source: The Reverse (direction of revolution) signal reverses the direction of revolution of the motor. The parameter D100 specifies the source for the Reverse signal. Possible selections 0:low and 1:high are the same as fixed values. With D100 = 3:BE1...28:BE13-inverse , the Reverse signal can be executed via the selected binary input. With D100 = 2:Para-meter, the control byte or the control word of the selected application is used as the signal source. This setting is provided for fieldbus operation. The control word can be assigned to various parameters in the different applications. The list below shows the control words for the different applications. The Reverse signal can be monitored in D300 - regardless of the parameterized signal source. Application Parameter Bit Fast reference value D210 0 Technology controller G210 0 Comfort reference valuew D210 0



2664h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 207


04


address

D101 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

External fault source: Selection of the source for the "44:ext.Fault" signal (external fault). With D101 = 2:Parameter, the control word is used as the signal source. This is designed for operation with a fieldbus system. The control word can be assigned to various parameters in the different applications. The list below shows the control words for the different applications. The signal can be directly monitored on the block input via D301. Application Parameter Bit Fast reference value D210 1 Technology controller G210 1 Comfort reference value D210 1



2665h 0h

D130 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Reference value source: Selection of the source for the "relative reference value" signal. The signal can be permanently specified as supplied by the analog inputs or the fieldbus. With D130 = 4:Parameter, the (global) parameter D230 is used as the signal source. It can be written for use with a fieldbus system.



2682h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 208


04


address

D180 Axis

read (1)

Standstill: The signal is 1:active when the speed actual value is within the window of ±C40. With fieldbus operation, the signal can be read in D200 Bit 0.



26B4h 0h

D181 Axis

read (1)

Reference value reached: Binary signal is 1:active when the input and output of the ramp generator differ by a maximum of 10 Rpm after expiration of the ramp. In the application for the "comfort reference value," the signal is also 1:active when the output of the motorised pot is constant. The signal can only be set when the enable has been given. With fieldbus operation, the signal can be read in D200 Bit 1.



26B5h 0h

D182 Axis

read (1)

Torque limit: Binary signal, assumes the value "1" when the required torque exceeds the maximum permissible torque (C03, C05, C330, C331, C332, C333). D182 triggers for negative and positive limit. When positive and negative limit must be distinguished between, use E180 and E181. To distinguish between motoring and generating limits, E186 and E187 must be read. With fieldbus operation, the signal can be read in D200 Bit 2.



26B6h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 209


04


address

D210 Global

r=2, w=2

Speed reference value control word: This word contains reference value signals to the application. In the application for the fast reference value, only bits 0 and 1 can be used. Bits 2 to 13 are exclusively for use with the application for the comfort reference value. The parameter which is specified with the bit names specifies the indication parameter which shows the signal regardless of its source. Bit 0: Reverse (D300): With the high level, the reference value is negated before the addition with

n-reference high resolution takes place. Bit 1: External fault (D301): With the high level, the fault "44:externalfault1" is triggered. Bit 2: Stop (D302): With the high level, reference value 0 is specified and the motor stops. Bit 3: Limit switch+ (D303): With the high level, an event is triggered. In the standard, the inverter

switches to the fault state. Bit 4: Limit switch- (D304): With the high level, an event is triggered. In the standard, the inverter

switches to the fault state. Bit 5: Jog enable (D305): If the drive reaches standstill (speed in window ±C40) with an active

Stop signal, jogging mode is enabled with the high level. Bit 6: Jog+ source (D306): When jogging mode is enabled, the jog reference value signal is output

unchanged with the active signal. Bit 7: Jog- source (D307): When jogging mode is enabled, the jog reference value signal is output

negated with the high level. Bit 8: Positive blocking (D308): With the high level, no positive reference value is processed. Bit 9: Negativ blocking (D309): With the high level, no negative reference value is processed. Bit 10: Torque switch (D310): The signal is used to switch between the absolute torque limits. With

the low level, torque limit is valid (C330). With the high level, torque limit 2 is active (C331). Bit 11: Master / slave switch (D311): With the high level, the master reference (D340) is active. Bit 12: Speed / torque switch (D312): The signal is used to switch between speed and torque

control. With the low level, speed control is active. With the high level, torque control is used.Bit 13: Additional enable 2 (D313): The Additional enable 2 signal is logically linked with the

reference value enables. With the high level, one of the reference value enables must also exist before the drive is enabled.

Bit 14: Reserved Bit 15: Reserved



26D2h 0h

D230 Global

r=2, w=2

n-reference value relative: Relative speed reference value of the application quick reference value as related to D02. Is added to high-resolution speed reference value D231. The reverse signal (D100, D210.0) negates D230.

Value range in %: -200.0 ... 0 ... 200.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=200,0%); USS-Adr: 04 39 80 00 hex

26E6h 0h

D231 Global

r=2, w=2

n-reference value high resolution: High-resolution speed reference value of the application quick reference value. The function differs in the applications "fast reference value" and "comfort reference value." Fast reference value: The reference value Is added to relative reference value D230. The reverse signal (D100, D210.0) has no effect on D231. Comfort reference value: For an exact description of the n-reference high resolution signal, please see the application description of the comfort reference value, ID 441883.

Value range in rpm: -131.072.000 ... 0 ... 131.072.000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001rpm; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 04 39 C0 00 hex

26E7h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 210


04


address

D300 Axis

read (2)

Reverse: Indicator parameter for the current signal state on the input of the speed block (reverse). D300 shows the state regardless of the source selected in D100. The following table shows the source for fieldbus operation (D100 = 2:parameter). Application Parameter Bit Fast refernece value D210 0 Technology controller G210 0 Comfort reference value D210 0


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 04 4B 00 00 hex

272Ch 0h

D301 Axis

read (2)

External fault: Indicator parameter for the current signal state on the input of the speed block (extFault). D301 shows the status regardless of the source selected in D101.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 04 4B 40 00 hex

272Dh 0h

D330 Axis

read (2)

n-reference value relative: Indicator parameter for the current signal value on the input of the speed block (RVrelat.). D330 shows the value regardless of the source selected in D130.

When weighted with D02, this signal provides one component of the speed reference value. The high-resolution speed reference value (RefVal) is then added to this.


274Ah 0h

D331 Axis

read (2)

n-reference value high resolution: Indicator parameter for the current signal value on the input of the quick reference value block (RefVal).

The value of D331 is added to the relative reference value.


274Bh 0h

E.. Display Value Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

E00 Global

read (0)

I-Motor: Indicates the current motor current as amount in amperes.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1A; PDO ; Type: I16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.3; USS-Adr: 05 00 00 00 hex

2800h 0h

E01 Global

read (0)

P-Motor: Indicates the current active power of the motor in kW.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001kW; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:2147483647 = 3435.973 kW); USS-Adr: 05 00 40 00 hex

2801h 0h

E02 Global

read (0)

M-Motor filtered: Indication of the current motor torque in Nm. With asynchronous types of control as related to the nominal motor torque, with servo types of control as related to the standstill moment M0. Smoothed for indication on the device display. Access to unsmoothed amount is possible with E90.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1Nm; PDO ; Type: I16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.7; USS-Adr: 05 00 80 00 hex

2802h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 211


04


address

E03 Global

read (1)

DC-link-voltage: Indication of the current DC link voltage. Value range with single-phase inverters: 0 to 500 V, with three-phase inverters 0 to 800 V.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; PDO ; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 05 00 C0 00 hex

2803h 0h

E04 Global

read (1)

U-Motor: Chained effective voltage present on the motor.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 2317.0 V); USS-Adr: 05 01 00 00 hex

2804h 0h

E05 Global

read (1)

f1-Motor: Frequency of the voltage applied to the motor.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1Hz; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:2147483647 = 512000.0 Hz); USS-Adr: 05 01 40 00 hex

2805h 0h

E06 Global

read (0)

n-reference: With speed operation. Indication of the current speed reference value as related to the motor shaft.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1rpm; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 05 01 80 00 hex

2806h 0h

E07 Global

read (1)

n-post-ramp: Indication of the current speed reference value as related to the motor shaft after the ramp generator and the n-reference value lowpass. In operating mode position (C62 = 1), the sum of output position control and n-forwardfeed (= speed control reference value) is indicated.


2807h 0h

E08 Global

read (0)

n-motor filtered: Indication of the current motor speed. Smoothed for indication on the device display. Access to the unsmoothed motor speed is possible with E91. When the drive is operated without feedback, this speed is determined mathematically via the motor model (in this case, the actual motor speed may differ from the calculated speed).

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 05 02 00 00 hex

2808h 0h

E09 Global

read (0)

Rotor position: Position of the motor shaft and the motor encoder respectively. With absolute value encoders, the encoder position is continuously read from the encoder and entered in this parameter. The value range is limited to ±128 U. This position is available for all operating modes. With types of control without motor encoders, E09 is simulated (not precise). The display shows whole motor revolutions with 3 positions after the decimal point. The full resolution of 24 B bit/U is supplied via fieldbus. Accuracy and maximum value range varies with the encoder. When E09 is evaluated by a higher-level controller for position acquisition, the following must be true: The encoder increment number must be an even power of two. E09 must be read cyclically The position must be accumulated on the controller.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001revolutions; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:24 Bit=1·revolutions); USS-Adr: 05 02 40 00

hex

2809h 0h

E10 Global

read (1)

AE1-Level: Level of the signal available on analog input 1 (X100.1 - X100.3) (without consideration of F11, F12). To compensate for an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter when the controller specifies 0 V), this must be entered with the opposite sign in F11.


280Ah 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 212


04


address

E11 Global

read (1)

AE2-Level: Level of the signal on analog input 2 (X100.4 - X100.5) (without consideration of F21, F22). To compensate for an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter when the controller specifies 0 V), this must be entered in F21 with the opposite sign.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 05 02 C0 00 hex

280Bh 0h

E12 Global

read (1)

Motor temperature: Temperature measured on X2 by the motor temperature sensor.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1°C; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 328 °C); USS-Adr: 05 03 00 00 hex

Only if B38 is not equal to 0.

280Ch 0h

E14 Global

read (2)

Chargerelay: Status of the internal charging relay. Active means that the relay contact is closed and the charging resistors from the power network to the DC link are bypassed. When the network voltage is turned on, the charging relay remains open at first. It closes when the DC link is charged up via the charging resistors. NOTE Make sure that the charging relay contacts are open (E14 = 0:inactive) before you connect the power supply. Particularly in a DC link network, remember that the charging relays of all connected inverters are open before the power supply is connected.



280Eh 0h

E15 Global

read (1)

n-motor-encoder: Speed calculated from the motor encoder specified in B26. This indication also functions when the control type in B20 does not require an encoder.


280Fh 0h

E16 Global

read (1)

Analog-output1-level: Indication of the level on the analog output (X100.6 and X100.7). ±10 V corresponds to ±16384.


2810h 0h

E17 Global

read (1)

Relay1: Status display of relay 1. The function of the relay contact on X1.1 and X1.2 (NO) depends on the firmware version of the inverter. Firmware up to and including V 5.5A Status display 1:active means that the relay contact is closed. There is no malfunction. Firmware beginning with V 5.5B The function of relay 1 depends on parameter F10 Relay 1 function. The basic setting of parameter F10 is 0: No malfunction.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 05 04 40 00 hex

2811h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 213


04


address

E18 Global

read (1)

Relay2: MDS 5000 and FDS 5000: state of relay 2 (motor halting brake, X2.1, X2.2). Active means that the relay contact is closed and the motor halting brake is released.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 05 04 80 00 hex

2812h 0h

E19 Global

read (2)

Binary inputs: Indicates level of all binary inputs as binary word. Bit 0 = enable, Bit 1 = BE1 to Bit 13 = BE13 and so on.


2813h 0h

E20 Global

read (1)

Device utilisation: Indicates the current utilization of the inverter in %. 100 % corresponds to the nominal power of the inverter.


2814h 0h

E21 Global

read (1)

Motor utilisation: Indicates current utilization of the motor in %. Reference number is the nominal motor current entered under B12.


2815h 0h

E22 Global

read (1)

i2t-device: Level of the thermal device model (i2t model). The fault "59:overtemp.device i2t" occurs at 105 % of full load. When the 100 % limit is reached, the inverter triggers the event "39:overtemp.device i2t" with the level specified in U02. The output current is limited to the permissible device nominal current for servo and vector control (B20 = 2 or 64).

Value range in %: 0 ... 80 ... 255

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: U8; (raw value:100·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 05 05 80 00 hex

2816h 0h

E23 Axis

read (1)

i2t-motor: Level of the thermal motor model (i2t model). 100 % corresponds to full utilization. The thermal model is based on the design data entered under group B.. (Motor) (i.e., continuous operation - S1 operation). With more than 100 %, the reaction parameterized in U10, U11 is triggered for the event "45:overtemp.device i2t." If the motor is fitted with a KTY, the I2t model will be tracked using the motor temperature measurement. If the nameplate is active in this case, U10 = 2.warning and U11 = 1 s will be set.

Value range in %: 0 ... 80 ... 255

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: U8; (raw value:100·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 05 05 C0 00 hex

2817h 0h

E24 Global

read (1)

i2t-braking resistor: Level of the thermal braking resistor model (i²t model). 100 % corresponds to full utilization. The data of the braking resistor are specified with A21 ... A23. With more than 100 %, the fault "42:tempBrakeRes" occurs.

Value range in %: 0 ... 80 ... 255

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: U8; (raw value:100·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 05 06 00 00 hex

2818h 0h

E25 Global

read (1)

Device-temperature: Current device temperature in °C. (Upper temperature limit R05 / Lower temperature limit R25)


2819h 0h

E26.0 Global

read (2)

Brake: The parameter only exists with the SDS 5000. Element 0 indicates the control status of brake 1 (on X5 or on brake module X302).


281Ah

Array

0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 214


04


address

E26.1 Global

read (2)

Brake: The parameter only exists with the SDS 5000. Element 1 indicates the control status of brake 2 (on X5 or on brake module X302).


281Ah

Array

1h

E27 Global

read (2)

Binary outputs: The status of all binary outputs is indicated as binary word. Bit0 = BA1 to Bit9 = BA10. NOTE Note that an encoder simulation on BA1 and BA2 is not indicated in E27.


281Bh 0h

E28 Global

read (1)

Analog-output2-level: Indication of the level on the analog output (X1.7 and X1.8). ±10 V corresponds to ±16384.


281Ch 0h

E29 Axis

read (2)

Warning: Perform brake test!: If the brake management is not active (B310=0:inactive) the warning remains at 0:inactive. With the activation of the brake management it is monitored whether the time set in B311 Timeout for brake test B300 has elapsed but the action B300 Brake test has not been performed.

0: Warning inactive; 1: Brake test necessary, reasons for this message can be: - The time set in B311 Timeout for brake test B300 has elapsed but the action B300 Brake test has

not been performed. - The time set in B311 Timeout for brake test B300 has elapsed twice but the action B300 Brake

test has not been performed (Malfunction 72:Brake test is present). - The action B300 has been completed with an error.


281Dh 0h

E30 Global

read (1)

Run time: Indication of how long the inverter controller section was supplied with voltage (operating hours counter).


281Eh 0h

E31 Global

read (1)

Enable time: Indication of how long the inverter controller section was supplied with voltage and the power section enable was active.


281Fh 0h

E32 Global

read (1)

Energy counter: Indication of the total supplied energy in Wh.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1Wh; PDO ; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 05 08 00 00 hex

2820h 0h

E33 Global

read (1)

Vi-max-memorized value: The DC link voltage is monitored continuously. The greatest measured value is stored here non-volatilely. This value can be reset with A371.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; PDO ; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 05 08 40 00 hex

2821h 0h

E34 Global

read (1)

I-max-memorized value: The motor current is monitored continuously. The greatest measured value is stored here non-volatilely. This value can be reset with A371.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1A; PDO ; Type: I16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.3; USS-Adr: 05 08 80 00 hex

2822h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 215


04


address

E35 Global

read (1)

Tmin-memorized value: The temperature of the inverter is monitored continuously. The smallest measured value is stored here non-volatilely. This value can be reset with A371.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1°C; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 328 °C); USS-Adr: 05 08 C0 00 hex

2823h 0h

E36 Global

read (1)

Tmax-memorized value: The temperature of the inverter is monitored continuously. The greatest measured value is stored here non-volatilely. This value can be reset with A371.


2824h 0h

E37 Global

read (3)

Braking energy can be reset: The energy dissipated through the braking resistor (in watt-hours) is not saved in non-volatile memory. This value can be reset with A37 = 1.


2825h 0h

E38 Global

read (3)

Braking energy life cycle: The energy dissipated by the braking energy (in watt-hours) is not saved in non-volatile memory here. In contrast to E37, this value can not be reset.


2826h 0h

E39 Global

read (3)

Application start time: When the configuration has started successfully on the device, E30 operating time is copied to E39.


2827h 0h

E41 Global

read (3)

i2t maximum braking resistance: The maximum value of the thermal load of the braking resistance is saved in non-volatile memory here. This value can be reset with A37 = 1. NOTE - This parameter does not specify the maximum value of E24. - E24 is initialized with 80 % when the device starts, in contrast the parameter based on the model is 0 %. - For a meaningful maximum value measurement, the braking resistance when the device starts must be approximately at ambient temperature.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: U8; (raw value:100·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 05 0A 40 00 hex

2829h 0h

E43 Global

read (3)

Event cause: Diagnostic information concerning the fault which occurred last. The currently active event is indicated in E82 event type. Event "34:hardware fault" 1: FPGA; Fault while loading the FPGA block to the control section. 2: NOV-ST; The non-volatile memory of the control section board is defective. 3: NOV-LT; The non-volatile memory of the power section board is defective. 4: brake 1; Activation of brake 1 is defective or the brake module has no 24 V power. 5: brake 2; Activation of brake 2 is defective or the brake module has no 24 V power. 11: currentMeas; Deviation in current offset measurement during device startup is too great.

Event "37:n-feedback" 1: Para<->encoder; parameterization does not match the connected encoder. 2: ParaChgOffOn; Parameterchange; encoder parameterization cannot be changed during

operation. Save and then turn device off and on so that the change takes effect. 4: X4 chan.A/Clk; wire break, possibly track A / clock 5: X4 chan.B/Dat; wire break, possibly track B / data 6: X4 chan.0; wire break, track 0 7: X4EnDatAlarm; The EnDat® encoder reported an alarm.

282Bh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 216


04


address

8: X4EnDatCRC; The EnDat® encoder reported that too many errors were found during the redundancy check. The cause can be wirebreak or errors in the cable shield.

10: resol.carrier; resolver is not or wrong connected, wirebreak is possible 11: X140-undervol; wrong transmission factor, wire break 12: X140-overvolt.; wrong transmission factor, wire break 14: resol.failure; wirebreak 15: X120-double t; Different values were determined during the double transmission to X120. 16: X120-Busy; encoder gave no response for too long; For SSI slave: No telegram for the last 5

ms and drive is enabled. 17: X120-wirebreak; A wire break was discovered on X120. 18: X120-Timeout; 19: X4-double tr.; Different values were determined during the double transmission to X4. 20: X4-Busy; encoder gave no response for too long 21: X4-wirebreak; 22: AX5000; Acknowledgment of the axis switch is not effected. 23: Ax5000require; comparison of E57 and E70. 24: X120-speed; B297, G297 or I297 exceeded for encoder on X120. 25: X4-speed; B297, G297 or I297 exceeded for encoder on X4. 26: No Enc. found; either no encoder was found on X4 or the EnDat®/SSI encoder has a wire

break. 27: X4-AX5000 found; a functional AX 5000 option board was found on X4 although incremental

encoder or EnDat® encoder was parameterized, or no EnDat® encoder is connected to the AX 5000 option board.

28: X4-EnDat found.; an EnDat® encoder was found on X4 although another encoder was parameterized.

29: AX5000/IncEnc; either X4 has a faulty AX 5000 option board or the A-track of an incremental encoder has a wire break.

30: opt2 incomp.; Version of option 2 is not current. 31: X140-EnDatAlar; The EnDat® encoder on X140 reports an alarm. 32: X140-EnDatCRC; The EnDat® encoder on X140 reports that too many faults were found during

the redundancy test. Possible causes may be wire break or a cable shield fault. 33: IGB-speed; G297 exceeded on the IGB. 34: Battery low; While switching on the inverter it was determined that the voltage of the battery has

fallen below the warning limit of the encoder. Referencing of the axis remains intact. However, the remaining service life of the backup battery is limited. Replace the AES battery before the next time the inverter is switched off. Note also the operating instructions for the Absolute Encoder Support AES.

35: Battery empty; While switching on the inverter it was determined that the voltage of the battery has fallen below the minimum voltage of the encoder. Referencing of the axis has been deleted. The backup battery is no longer able to retain the position in the encoder over the time during which the inverter in switched off. Referencing the axis. Replace the AES battery before the next time the inverter is switched off. Note also the operating instructions for the Absolute Encoder Support AES.

Event "40:invalid data" 0 ... 7: Fault on the non-volatile memory of the control section board. 1: fault; Low-level write/read error or timeout 2: blockMiss; Unknown data block. 3: dataSecurity; Block has no data security 4: checksum; Data block has checksum error. 5: r/o; Data block is "read only." 6: readErr; Startup phase: block read error 7: blockMiss; Block not found. 16 ... 31: Non-volatile power module memory 17: fault; Low-level write/read error or timeout 18: blockMiss; Unknown data block. 19: dataSecurity; Block has no data security

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 217


04


address

20: checksum; Data block has checksum error. 21: r/o; Data block is "read only." 22: readErr; Startup phase: block read error 23: blockMiss; Block not found. 32 ... 47: Non-volatile encoder memory 32: el.mot-type; No nameplate data exists 33: el.typeLim; A parameter from the electrical motor nameplate could not be entered (limit value or

non existent). 48 bis 59: Non-volatile option 2 memory 48: optionBoard2; Error in non-volatile memory of option 2 with REA 5000 and REA 5001

respectively and XEA 5000 and XEA 5001 respectively

Event "46: low voltage" 1: Low Voltage; the value in E03 DC-link-voltage has dropped below the value parameterized in

A35 low voltage limit. 2: Network phase; phase monitoring has found that a switched-on power unit is missing a phase. 3: Drop in networ; when phase monitoring finds that the network voltage is missing, the charging

relay is immediately switched off. Normal operation is maintained. If the power unit is still switched on after network voltage returns, a fault is triggered after 0.5 s.

Event "52:communication" 1: CAN LifeGuard; The device recognized the "life-guarding-event" (master no longer sends RTR). 2: CAN Sync Error; the sync message was not received within the time set in parameter A201

cycle period timeout. 3: CAN Bus Off; went off when bus went off. The driver started it again. 4: PZD-Timeout; failure of the cyclic data connection (PROFIBUS). 5: USS; (under preparation) failure of the cyclic data connection (USS). 6: EtherCAT PDO-Ti; The inverter failed to receive process data within the time set in A258. 7: EtherCAT-DcSYNC0; There is a malfunction on the synchronization signal "SYNC 0". This

malfunction can only occur with EtherCAT synchronization activated using "Distributed Clock (DC)".

8: IGB µC failure; The controller for IGB communication has failed. 9: IGB lost frame; IGB-Motionbus fault. The station discovered the loss of at least 2 consecutive

data frames (double error). This cause can only occur when the IGB state = 3:motionbus and the motor is energized.

10: IGB P.lostFra; IGB-Motionbus fault. Another station discovered a double error and reported this via A163. This causes that inverter to also malfunction with this cause. The cause can only occur when the IGB state = 3:motionbus and the motor is energized.

11: IGB sync erro; The synchronization within the inverter has malfunctioned because the configuration was stopped by POSITool. This fault can only occur when the IGB state equaled 3:motionbus and the motor was energized.

12: IGB configTim; A block was not executed at the beginning of the global area in real-time. The runtime sequence of blocks may have been set incorrectly. This fault can only occur when the IGB state equaled 3:motionbus and the motor was energized.

13: IGBPartnerSyn; Another station in the IGB network has a synchronization fault (see cause 11). This station reported its fault via A163. This causes that inverter to also malfunction with cause 13. This fault can only occur when the IGB state equaled 3:Motionbus and the motor was energized.

Event "55:Option board" 1: CAN5000failure; CAN 5000 was recognized , installed and failed. 2: DP5000failure; DP 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 3: REA5000failure; REA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 4: SEA5000failure; SEA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 5: XEA5000failure; XEA 5000 or XEA 5001 was recognized, installed and failed. 6: EncSim-init; could not be initialized on XEA. The motor may have turned during initialization. 7: WrongOption; Incorrect or missing option board (comparison of E54/E58 with E68/E69) 8: LEA5000failure; LEA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed.

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 218


04


address

9: ECS5000failure; ECS 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 10: supply; Failure of the 24 V supply for XEA 5001 or LEA 5000. 11: SEA5001failure; SEA 5001 was recognized, installed and failed. 12: REA5001failure; REA 5001 was recognized, installed and failed. 13: PN5000 fail 1; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. Basic hardware tests have

detected an error. 14: PN5000 fail 2; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. Basic software tests have

detected an error. 15: PN5000 fail 3; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. The Watchdog function of the PN-

5000 monitoring system has detected an error. 17: Option2 too old; on SDS 5000: option board with old hardware version (XEA 5001: from HW 10,

REA 5000: from HW 19)

Event "57:Runtime usage" A cyclic task cannot be completely processed within its cycle time. Cause is the number of the affected task.

Event "69:Motor connection" 1: motorNotDiscon; The contactor is not released while the axis is being changed. The cause of

this can only be determined when at least two phase contacts are stuck and the DC link is charged (see E03). With asynchronous motors, magnetization could not be established.

2: no motor; No motor connected at all or the line to the motor is disconnected.

Event "70:Parameter consistency" 1: encoder type; control mode B20 is set to "servo" but no appropriate encoder is selected (B26,

H.. parameter). 2: X120 direction; X120 is used as source in one parameter but is parameterized in H120 as drain

(or vice versa). 3: B12<->B20; Control mode B20 is not set to servo but the nominal motor current (B12) exceeds

the 4-kHz nominal current (R24) of the device by more than 1.5 times. 4: B10<->H31; Resolver/motorpoleno.; the set motor pole number (B10) and the resolver pole

number (H31) do not match. 5: Neg. slip. With use of control modes V/f, SLVE or Vector Control (B20): Control mode to "ASM":

A negative slip results from the values for nominal motor speed (B13), nominal motor frequency (B15) and motor pole number (B10).

6: torque-lim; When the values entered in C03 or C05 are used, the maximum current of the inverter would be exceeded. Enter lower torque limits.

7: B26:SSI-Slave; SSI slave may not be used as motor encoder (synchronization problems) 8: C01>B83; C01 may not be greater than B83. 9: E102/E103 miss; An attempt was made to obtain a master position via the IGB but parameters

E102 and E103 which are required for this do not exist. 10: G104<->G27; A master position is sent via the IGB-Motionbus (i.e., G104 is not set to

0:inactive), but G27 does not have the settings 0:inactive and 6:IGB which are valid for this case.

Event "71:Firmware" 1: FW defective; The firmware states of the communication processor and the drive processor are

not consistent. The firmware must be downloaded again. 2: activate FW; New firmware was loaded to the inverter but not yet activated. Power supply must

be turned off/on. 3: CRC-error; The cyclic check discovered a checksum error. Power supply must be turned off/on.

If the error occurs again on renewed OFF/ON, the device hardware is faulty and must be replaced.

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 219


04


address

Event "72:Brake test" 1: B311timeout; The time set in B311 timeout for brake test B300 has expired without action B300

brake test having been executed. 2: Brake defective; During the execution of the brake test action, the stopping torque entered in

B304 or B305 could not be maintained or the encoder test run included in the brake test was concluded with errors.

Event "73:Ax2braketest" 1: B311timeout; The time set in B311 timeout for brake test B300 has expired without action B300

brake test having been executed with active axis 2. 2: Brake defective; During the execution of the brake test action with active axis 2, the stopping

torque entered in B304 or B305 could not be maintained or the encoder test run included in the brake test was concluded with errors.







Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 0A C0 00 hex

E44 Global

read (0)

Event cause: Diagnostic information for the fault which occurred last. The cause is indicated in plain text. The currently active event in indicated in E82 event type.

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0B 00 00 hex

282Ch 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 220


04


address

E48 Global

read (0)

Device control state: State of the device state machine. The device state machine enables or disables the drive function and the power module (application on the active axis).

0: Self-test; The inverter is executing a self test and calibration procedure and cannot be enabled yet. The drive function is disabled. The device state automatically changes after a short time to 1:switch on inhibit.

1: Switch-on disable; This device state prevents an automatic restart during device startup and with the fault acknowledgment. The drive function is disabled.

The device state can change to 2:ready for switch-on under the following conditions: Enable on low level or A34 autostart active during first startup AND DC link charged AND Axis activated Additional conditions for the SDS 5000: - No IGB Motionbus is configured or - An IGB Motionbus is configured and the IGB is either located in the state 3:IGB Motionbus or

A124 IGB exceptional motion is activated. Information Remember that the change in device status from 1:switch on inhibit to 2:ready for switch-on

depends on parameter A34. 2: Ready for switch-on; The DC link is charged; E67 starting lockout is inactive; any possible axis

switch is finished. The drive function is disabled. If the enable becomes active now, the device state changes to 3:switched on. 3: Switched on; The DC link is charged; E67 starting lockout is inactive; the power module is being

prepared for operation. The drive function is disabled. The device state changes to 4:enabled after the longer of the two times 4 msec or A150 cycle time. 4: Enabled; The drive function is enabled. Reference values are processed. 5: Fault; A fault has occurred. The fault memory was written. The drive function is disabled. The

device state can changed to 1:switch on inhibit when the fault is acknowledged. Information Remember that the change in device state from 1:switch on inhibit to 2:ready for switch-on depends

on parameter A34. 6: Fault reaction; A fault has occurred. The fault memory is being written. When A29 fault-quick

stop occurs, the drive function remains enabled for the time of the quick stop. The device state changes to 5:fault when:

- The fault memory is written AND either - The power module must be switched off (e.g., for short circuit or ground fault) - A67 Start up inhibit becomes = 1:active or - A29 Fault quick stop is = 0:inactive or - The quick stop ends (in standstill after maximum A39 t-max Q-Stop or with enable = inactive)

or - When E06 DC-link-voltage becomes less than 130 V. 7: Quick stop; A quick stop was triggered; the inverter moves with the quick stop ramp, speed-

controlled, to a standstill. The drive function remains enabled for the time of the quick stop. After the quick stop is concluded, the device state changes (depending on the device control in the global area, A39 t-max. Q-stop, A44 enable quick-stop, A45 quick stop end).

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 0C 00 00 hex

2830h 0h

E50 Global

read (0)

Device: Indication of the device type (e.g., MDS 5015).


2832h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 221


04


address

E51.0 Global

read (0)

Firmware version: Software version of the inverter (e.g., V5.0). With the SDS 5000, the version of the active firmware is indicated in element 0 and the version of the firmware in the firmware download memory is indicated in element 1.

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0C C0 00 hex

2833h

Array

0h

E51.1 Global

read (0)

Firmware version: Software version of the inverter (e.g., V5.0). With the SDS 5000, the version of the active firmware is indicated in element 0 and the version of the firmware in the firmware download memory is indicated in element 1.

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0C C0 01 hex

2833h

Array

1h

E52 Global

read (1)

Serial number: Number of the device from a manufactured series. Corresponds to the number on the nameplate.


2834h 0h

E53 Global

r=1, w=4

Configuration identification global: Indicates the abbreviation for the configuration of the global area (independent of axis). If the configuration was changed, a leading asterisk (*) appears. 3:Klemmen (or IGB motion bus for SDS 5000) 4:USS 5:CANopen® 7:PROFIBUS 19:DSP402 device controller CANopen® 20:DSP402 device controller PROFIBUS 23:EtherCAT® 24:DSP402 device controller EtherCAT® 26:PROFINET 27:DSP 402 PROFINET

Default setting: 5:CAN IGB

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0D 40 00 hex

2835h 0h

E54 Global

read (1)

Option board 1: Indication of the upper option board (e.g., CAN 5000) which was detected during initialization.


2836h 0h

E55 Axis

r=1, w=4

Configuration identification axis: Indicates the abbreviation for the configuration of the axis. If the configuration was changed, a leading asterisk (*) appears. 0: Fast reference value 1: Command positioning endless 2: Command positioning limited 8: Electronic gear limited 9: Motion block positioning limited 10: Motion block positioning endless 11: Electronic gear endless 12: Electronic gear limited PLCopen® 13: Electronic gear endless PLCopen® 15: Interpolated positioning 16: Technology controller 18: Comfort reference value 21: Electronic cam endless 22: Electronic cam limited 25: Fast reference value with brake

Default setting: 16:TecControl

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0D C0 00 hex

2837h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 222


04


address

E56.0 Global

r=1, w=2

Parameter identification: Indicates whether parameters of the axis 1 were changed via the operator panel (display and keys). When "0:axis 1" is selected in A11 axis edit and at least one parameter was changed via the operator panel, the value of E56.0 Parameter identification is set to 255. When"1:axis 2" is selected in A11, the value of E56.1 is set to 255 if changes were made. The same also applies to axis 3 and 4. This can be used as an indication of unauthorized manipulation of parameters.

1: Default setting of POSITool. 2..254: Value was purposely set by the user in POSITool or fieldbus and has not been changed yet. 255: At least one value was changed via the operator panel! Exceptions: When A11 is set on the operator panel or A00 save values is triggered, this has no effect on E56.

Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 255


2838h

Array

0h

E56.1 Global

r=1, w=2



Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 255


2838h

Array

1h

E56.2 Global

r=1, w=2



Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 255


2838h

Array

2h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 223


04


address

E56.3 Global

r=1, w=2



Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 255


2838h

Array

3h

E57 Global

read (1)

POSISwitch: Indication of a POSISwitch® which was detected during initialization.

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0E 40 00 hex

2839h 0h

E58 Global

read (1)

Optional board 2: Indication of the lower option board (e.g., SEA 5000) which was detected during initialization.


283Ah 0h

E59 Global

r=1, w=4

Configuration identification: Indicates the abbreviation for the complete configuration (global area and all four axes). If the configuration was changed, an asterisk (*) is shown.

Default setting: user

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0E C0 00 hex

283Bh 0h

E60 Global

read (3)

Safe firmware version: Only with SDS 5000. Version of the boot firmware of the inverter (e.g., V 4.1).

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0F 00 00 hex

283Ch 0h

E61 Global

read (3)

ParaModul: Size of the ParaModul memory in kilobytes. This parameter makes it possible to differentiate between the different sizes of ParaModul memory (128 kBytes, 256 kBytes or 1024 kBytes). 1024 kBytes are only supported from firmware V 5.5. A size of 0 kBytes means that a ParaModul has not been found or the ParaModul size is not supported.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1kBytes; Type: U32; (raw value:10 Bit=1·kBytes); USS-Adr: 05 0F 40 00 hex

283Dh 0h

E62 Global

read (1)

Act. pos. T-max: Currently effective positive torque limit in relation to B18.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 05 0F 80 00 hex

283Eh 0h

E66 Global

read (1)

Act. neg. T-max: Currently effective positive torque limit in relation to B18.


2842h 0h

E67 Global

read (1)

Starting lockout: Indication of the status of the ASP 5001 option.

0: inactive; The starting lockout (startup disable) is inactive. The power section can be enabled. 1: active; The starting lockout (startup disable) is active. The power section is reliably disabled.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 05 10 C0 00 hex

2843h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 224


04


address

E68 Global

read (3)

Required optional board 1: Is entered by the POSITool configuration assistant. When the configuration is transferred via Paramodul to another device, a comparison of E68 and E54 ensures that all hardware resources are present. If not, the fault "55:option board" is triggered with E43 event cause = 7:wrong or missing option board. The fault can then not be acknowledged.

Default setting: CAN 5000


2844h 0h

E69 Global

read (3)

Required optional board 2: Is entered by the POSITool configuration assistant. When the configuration is transferred via Paramodul to another device, a comparison of E69 and E58 ensures that all hardware resources are present. If not, the fault "55:option board" is triggered with E43 event cause = 7:wrong or missing option board. The fault can then not be acknowledged.

Default setting: SEA 5001


2845h 0h

E70 Global

read (3)

Required Ax5000: Is entered by the POSITool configuration assistant. When the configuration via Paramodul is transferred to another device, a comparison of E70 with E57 ensures that all hardware resources are present. If not, the fault "37:n-feedback" (from V5.2: 37:encoder) with E43 event cause = 23:Ax5000-n-reference is triggered. The fault can then not be acknowledged.

Default setting: AX 5000


2846h 0h

E71 Global

read (1)

AE1 scale: AE1 signal by offset and gain. E71 = (E10 + F11) * F12.


2847h 0h

E72 Global

read (1)

AE2 scale: AE2 signal by filter, offset and gain. E72 = (E11 + F21) * F22.


2848h 0h

E73 Global

read (1)

AE3 scale: AE2 signal by filter, offset and gain as well as PID controller and offset 2. E73 = (E74 + F31) * F32


Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the bottom option slot.

2849h 0h

E74 Global

read (1)

AE3-Level: Level of signal queued on the analog input 3 (X102.1 - X102.2) (without consideration of F31, F32). To allow for an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter when the controller specifies 0 V), this must be entered in F31 with the opposite sign.



284Ah 0h

E75 Global

read (2)

X1.Enable-inverted: The level of the X1.Enable binary input is displayed inverted. This signal can, for example, be used for inverted acknowledgement of X1.Enable via any binary output if this is required for dual-channel activation together with the ASP 5000.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 05 12 C0 00 hex

284Bh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 225


04


address

E80 Axis

read (0)

Operating condition: Indication of the current operating status as per the operating indication. Useful for fieldbus queries or serial remote control.

10: PLCO_init; Initialize position control (applications motion block positioning or electronic cam). 11: PLCO_Passive; Position control is in the state 1:passive (applications motion block positioning

or electronic cam). 12: standstill; Position control is in the state 2:standstill (applications motion block positioning or

electronic cam). 13: discr.motion; Position control is in the state 3:discrete motion (applications motion block

positioning or electronic cam). 14: cont.motion; Position control is in the state 4:continuous motion (applications motion block

positioning or electronic cam). 15: sync.motion; Position control is in the state 5:synchronous motion (applications motion block

positioning or electronic cam). 16: stopping; Position control is in the state 6:stopping (applications motion block positioning or

electronic cam). 17: errorStop; Position control is in the state 7:errorstop (applications motion block positioning or

electronic cam). 18: homing; Position control is in the state 8:homing (applications motion block positioning or

electronic cam). 19: limit switch; One of the limit switches has tripped. Remember that not every application has the

limit switch function (applications motion block positioning or electronic cam). 20: denied; Position control has determined one of the following events (applications motion block

positioning or electronic cam): - The drive is not referenced but the motion job requires the reference. - A motion job was triggered whose target position is located outside the software limit switch. - A motion job was triggered which moved in a direction of rotation which is inhibited. The message combines faults 1 to 4 in /90 ErrorCode. 21: limited; Position control has determined that one of the following limits was reached

(applications motion block positioning or electronic cam): - Torque limit - Following error - M-limitation by i2t 22: aborted; Position control has determined one of the following events (applications motion block

positioning or electronic cam): - An MC_Stop was triggered. - The enable was switched off. - A quick stop was triggered. 23: waiting; The drive is located in a chain of motion blocks and is waiting for the advance signal

(application motion block positioning). 24: delay; The drive is located in a chain of motion blocks with pause and the pause is still in effect

(application motion block positioning). 30: fault; The inverter ist in the state fault. 31: self test; The inverter ist in the state self test. 32: switch-on disable; The inverter ist in the state switch-on diable (see the Operating Manuals of

the inverters). 33: param.lock; reserved 34: quick stop; The inverter performs a quick stop. 35: switched on; The inverter is in the state switcjed on (see the Operating Manuals of the

inverters). 36: jog active; Tipping operation is active in the comfort reference value application (D437 =

1:active). 37: stop active; During the comfort reference value application, a halt command is queued and the

speed has reached the range +C40 to -C40 once (D438 = 1:active). 38: stop; During the comfort reference value application, a halt command is queued (D302 =

1:active) and the drive delays with the ramp D84.

2850h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 226


04


address

39: not allowed direction; During the comfort reference value application, a reference value is specified for a certain direction of rotation which is inhibited (D184 = 1:active, see also D308 and D309).

40: capturing; During the comfort reference value application, the inverter is in scan active mode (D433 = 1:active).

41: heavy duty starting; During the comfort reference value application, the inverter is in startup under load mode (D434 = 1:active).

42: accelerating; During the comfort reference value application, the amount of motor speed increases (D443 = 1:active).

43: decelerating; During the comfort reference value application, the amount of motor speed decreases (D444 = 1:aktiv).

44: reference > max reference; During the comfort reference value application, the speed limit is reached which limit is indicated in D336 (torque control) or D338 (speed control) (D185 = 1:active).

45: reference < min reference; During the comfort reference value application, the speed limit is reached which limit is indicated in D337 (torque control) or D339 (speed control) (D186 = 1:active).

46:zero torque=0; During torque control mode in the comfort reference value application, the current torque is in the range of -5 % MN to +5 % MN.

47: positive torque; During torque control mode in the comfort reference value application, the current torque (E90) is greater than 5 % as related to the user direction of rotation (D57) (D440 = 1:active).

48: negative torque; During torque control mode in the comfort reference value application, the current torque (E90) is lower than -5 % as related to the user direction of rotation (D57) (D441 = 1:active).

49: standstill; During speed control mode in the comfort reference value application, the speed has reached the range of +C40 to -C40 (D180 = 1:active).

50: forward direction; During speed control mode in the comfort reference value application, the speed (E91) is greater than C40 as related to the user direction (D57) (D442 = 1:active).

51: backward direction; During speed control mode in the comfort reference value application, the speed (E91) is lower than -C40 as related to the user direction (D57).

52: limit switch wrong; During the comfort reference value application, the limit switches are mixed up (i.e., the -limit switch triggered for a positive reference value (D304 = 1:active) or vice versa).


E81 Global

read (1)

Event level: Indicates whether a current event is queued. The corresponding event type is indicated in E82. Useful for fieldbus polling or serial remote control.

0: inactive. The event system is inactive. The inverter is running in normal operating mode. 1: Message. A message is waiting. Operation continues. 2: Warning. A warning is waiting. Operation can be continued until expiration of the warning time

for this event (indicated in E83 warning time). After that a fault is triggered. 3: Fault. A fault has occurred. The drive function is blocked.


2851h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 227


04


address

E82 Global

read (0)

Event type: Indication of the currently queued event/fault. Useful for fieldbus polling or serial remote control. The cause is stored in E43 / E44.

30: inactive; 31: Short/ground; The hardware overcurrent switch off is active because the motor demands too

much current from the inverter (interwinding fault, overload). 32: Short/ground internal; During the enabling of the inverter, a short circuit was determined. An

internal device error has probably occurred. 33: Overcurrent; The total motor current exceeds the permissible maximum. Could be acceleration

times are too short or torque limits in C03 and C05 were set incorrectly. 34: Hardware fault; A hardware error has occurred (e.g., in the memory of the control section). See

E43. 35: Watchdog; The watchdog of the microprocessor has triggered. The microprocessor is being

used to full capacity or its function may be faulty. 36: High voltage; The voltage in the DC link exceeds the permissible maximum. This can be due to

excessive network voltage, the feedback of the drive during braking mode, too low a braking resistor or due to a brake ramp which is too steep.

37: Encoder; An error in the parameterized encoder was determined (for details, see E43). 38: Overtemp.device sensor; The temperature measured by the device sensor exceeds the

permissible maximum value. The cause may be that ambient and switching cabinet temperatures are too high.

39: Overtemp.device i2t; The i2t-model for the inverter exceeds 100 % of the thermal capacity. Causes may be an inverter overload due to a motor blockage or a switching frequency which is too high.

40: Invalid data; While the non-volatile memory was being initialized, a data error was found (for details, see E43).

41: Temp.MotorTMP; The motor temperature sensor reports excessive temperature. The motor may be overloaded or the temperature sensor is not connected.

42: TempBrakeRes.; The i2t model for the braking resistor exceeds 100 % of the capacity. The braking resistor may not be designed to handle the application.

43: inactive; 44: External fault 1; Triggering is programmed application-specifically. 45: Overtemp.motor i2t; The i2t model of the motor reaches 100 % of the load. The motor may be

overloaded. 46: Low voltage; The DC link voltage is below the limit value set in A35. The cause can be drops in

the network voltage, the failure of a phase with three-phase connection or the acceleration times are too short.

47: Torque limit; The torque permitted for static operation is exceeded in the controller types servo controller, vector controller or sensorless vector controller. The limits may have been set incorrectly in C03 and C05.

48: inactive; 49: inactive; 50: inactive; 51: inactive; 52: Communication; A fault in communication was determined (for details, see E43). 53: inactive; 54: inactive; 55: Option board; A fault in the operation of an option board was determined (for details, see E43). 56: Overspeed; The measured speed was greater than C01 x 1.1 + 100 Rpm. The encoder may be

defective. 57: Second activation; The cycle time of a real-time task was exceeded (for details, see E43). 58: Grounded; The power module has determined an error (starting with module 3). 59: Overtemp.device i2t; The i2t model of the inverter exceeds 105 % of the capacity. The cause

may be an overload of the inverter due to a motor blockage or a switching frequency which is too high.

60: <u102>; 61: <u112>;

2852h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 228


04


address

62: <u122>; 63: <u132>; 64: <u142>; 65: <u152>; 66: <u162>; 67: <u172>; 68: External fault 2; Triggering is programmed application-specifically. 69: Motor connection; A connection error of the motor was determined (for details, see E43). 70: Parameter consistency; The parameterization has inconsistencies (for details, see E43). 71: firmware; 72: Brake test timeout; Brake test timeout. Brake management reports that a brake test is necessary

(see E43). 73: Axis 2 brake test timeout; Brake management reports that a brake test of axis 2 is necessary



(see E43).


E83 Global

read (1)

Warning time: While warnings are running, the time remaining until the fault is triggered is indicated. Useful for fieldbus polling or serial remote control.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1s; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 14 C0 00 hex

2853h 0h

E84 Global

read (1)

Active axis: Indication of the current axis. Useful for fieldbus polling or serial remote control.

0: Axis 1; 1: Axis 2; 2: Axis 3; 3: Axis 4; 4: All axes inactive. Axis 1 was active last. 5: All axes inactive. Axis 2 was active last. 6: All axes inactive. Axis 3 was active last. 7: All axes inactive. Axis 4 was active last.


2854h 0h

E90 Global

read (3)

M-Motor: Indication of the current motor torque in Nm. In contrast to E02, not smoothed.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01Nm; PDO ; Type: I16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.16; USS-Adr: 05 16 80 00 hex

285Ah 0h

E91 Global

read (3)

n-motor: Indication of the current motor speed in Rpm. In contrast to E08, not smoothed. When the drive is operated without feedback, this speed is mathematically determined via the motor model (in this case, the actual motor speed may differ from the calculated speed).


285Bh 0h

E92 Global

read (3)

I-d: Flux current in %.


285Ch 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 229


04


address

E93 Global

read (3)

I-q: Torque-generating current in %.


285Dh 0h

E94 Global

read (3)

I-a: Measured a-current components in ab-system.


285Eh 0h

E95 Global

read (3)

I-b: Measured b-current components in ab-system.


285Fh 0h

E96 Global

read (3)

I-u: Measured u-current components in uvw-system.


2860h 0h

E97 Global

read (3)

I-v: Measured v-current component in uvw-sysstem.


2861h 0h

E98 Global

read (3)

Ud: Voltage in d-direction in V (chained peak voltage).

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 05 18 80 00 hex

2862h 0h

E99 Global

read (3)

Uq: Voltage in q-direction in V (chained peak voltage).

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 05 18 C0 00 hex

2863h 0h

E100 Global

read (1)

n-motor: Indication of the current motor speed as % in space-saving 16-bit format. The specification is related to C01 n-max.


2864h 0h

E101 Global

read (1)

I-Motor: Indicates the current motor current in % of the nominal device current at 4 kHz switching frequency.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 19 40 00 hex

2865h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 230


04


address

E102 Global

r=2, w=3

Lead position consumer: Receiving parameter for a lead position via IGB. E102 must be allocated to parameter E163 of the lead position in IGB mapping. The parameter value is indicated scaled in revolutions. The internal scaling raw value is 1 MSB = 2048 revolutions. MSB = most significant Bit Information When POSITool establishes a connection to the inverter, this parameter is always read, even when "write parameter" was specified in POSITool as the data communication direction.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1E-6revolutions; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:20 Bit=1·revolutions); USS-Adr: 05 19 80 00 hex

2866h 0h

E103 Global

r=2, w=3

Lead position consumer timestamp: Receiving parameter for a time stamp for the lead position (E102) via IGB. E103 must be allocated to parameter E164 of the lead position in IGB mapping. The parameter value is indicated scaled in µs. The internal scaling raw value is 1 LSB = 7.63 ns. LSB = least significant Bit Information When POSITool establishes a connection to the inverter, this parameter is always read, even when "write parameter" was specified in POSITool as the data communication direction.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; PDO ; Type: U32; (raw value:4294967295 = 32767999 µs); USS-Adr: 05 19 C0 00 hex

2867h 0h

E120 Global

r=1, w=5

Equipment: The text entered in the field "equipment" during step 1/6 of the device configuration.


2878h 0h

E121 Global

read (1)

User: The text entered in the field "user" during step 1/6 of the device configuration.


2879h 0h

E122.0 Global

read (3)

Download information: Contains information on the active firmware: User/login name on the PC with which the download was performed.


287Ah

Array

0h

E122.1 Global

read (3)

Download information: Contains information on the active firmware: Computer name of the PC with which the download was performed.


287Ah

Array

1h

E122.2 Global

read (3)

Download information: Contains information on the active firmware: Date and time of the firmware download.


287Ah

Array

2h

E122.3 Global

read (3)

Download information: Contains information on the active firmware: Number of previously performed downloads on the connected inverter.


287Ah

Array

3h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 231


04


address

E123.0 Global

read (3)

Download information 2: Contains information on the firmware download memory. User/registration name on the PC on which the download was performed.


287Bh

Array

0h

E123.1 Global

read (3)

Download information 2: Contains information on the firmware download memory. Computer name of the PC with which the download was performed.


287Bh

Array

1h

E123.2 Global

read (3)

Download information 2: Contains information on the firmware download memory. Date and time of the firmware download.


287Bh

Array

2h

E123.3 Global

read (3)

Download information 2: Contains information on the firmware download memory. Number of downloads to the connected inverter that have been performed up to now.


287Bh

Array

3h

E149 Global

read (1)

Hardware Version: Device family (FDS/MDS/SDS), hardware version of the power section (layout version), power section manufacturing date (calendar week and year).


2895h 0h

E151 Global

read (2)

Active switching frequency: The current switching frequency used by the inverter.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1kHz; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 25 C0 00 hex

2897h 0h

E152 Global

read (3)

SSI simulation raw value: Indicates the position which is output via the SSI simulation. With a 25-bit SSI simulation, the upper 25 bits (31..7) of E152 correspond to the position output via SSI. With a 13-bit SSI simulation, bits 19..7 correspond to the position output via SSI. Bits 6..0 are hidden when SSI is used.


Only visible when E58 = XEA 5000 (and XEA 5001 respectively) and H120 is greater than 80:Incremental-Encoder-Simulation.

2898h 0h

E153 Global

read (3)

Accumulated raw-motor-encoder: Supplies an accumulated raw value of the motor encoder parameterized in B26. The value contains the value of B35 as the adding offset. Since these values are raw values, scaling depends on the motor encoder being used. EnDat®, SSI: MSB = 2048U Resolver: 65536LSBs = 1U (i.e., MSB = 32768U) Incremental encoder: 1LSB = 1Count (4-fold evaluation of the number of markers) MSB = Most Significant Bit LSB = Least Significant Bit



2899h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 232


04


address

E154 Global

read (3)

Raw motor-encoder: Supplies the raw value of the motor encoder parameterized in B26. The value contains the value of B35 as the adding offset. Since these values are raw values, scaling depends on the motor encoder being used. EnDat®, SSI: MSB = 2048 U Resolver: 65536LSBs = 1U (i.e., MSB = 32768U) Incremental encoder: 1LSB = 1Count (4-fold evaluation of the number of markers), Counter

resolution: 16 bits MSB = Most Significant Bit LSB = Least Significant Bit



289Ah 0h

E155 Global

read (3)

Raw position-encoder: Raw value of the encoder parameterized in I02. The format varies depending on which encoder is used. For EnDat® and SSI encoders, the data word is specified left-justified by the encoder. Example: - EnDat® Multiturn, SSI: MSB = 2048 encoder revolutions - EnDat® Singleturn, resolver: MSB = 0.5 encoder revolutions - Incremental encoder: Only the upper 16 bits are used. They contain the counted increments after 4-fold evaluation. MSB = Most Significant Bit


289Bh 0h

E156 Global

read (3)

Raw master-encoder: Raw value of the encoder parameterized in G27. The format varies with the encoder being used. Example: - EnDat® Multiturn, SSI: MSB = 2048 encoder revolutions - EnDat® Singleturn, resolver: MSB = 0.5 encoder revolutions - Incremental encoder: Only the upper 16 bits are used. They contain the counted increments after

4-fold evaluation. MSB = Most Significant Bit


289Ch 0h

E161 Global

read (3)

n-rmpg: The speed reference value on the output of the ramp generator.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1rpm; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 05 28 40 00 hex

28A1h 0h

E163 Global

read (2)

Lead-Position Producer: The parameter provides a lead axis position for the further distribution via IGB. The source of this lead axis position can be selected in G104. The parameter value is indicated scaled in revolutions. The internal scaling raw value is 1 MSB = 2048 revolutions. (MSB = Most Significant Bit)

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1E-6revolutions; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:20 Bit=1·revolutions); USS-Adr: 05 28 C0 00 hex

28A3h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 233


04


address

E164 Global

read (2)

Lead-Position Prod. Timestamp: The parameter provides a timestamp for the lead axis position in E163 for the further distribution via IGB. The parameter value is indicated scaled in µs. The internal scaling raw value is 1 LSB = 7.63 ns. (LSB = Least Significant Bit)

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; PDO ; Type: U32; (raw value:4294967295 = 32767999 µs); USS-Adr: 05 29 00 00 hex

28A4h 0h

E165 Global

read (3)

Id-ref: Reference value for the flux current in %.


28A5h 0h

E166 Global

read (3)

Iq-ref: Reference value for the torque generating current in %.


28A6h 0h

E167 Global

read (3)

Power module state: Specifies whether the power end stage is enabled.

192: power module off; 248: activate power module; 255: power module on;


28A7h 0h

E168 Global

read (3)

Actual flux: Actual value of the flux in %.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I32; (raw value:2147483647·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 05 2A 00 00 hex

28A8h 0h

E169 Global

read (3)

Reference-flux: Reference value of the flux in %.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I32; (raw value:4096·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 05 2A 40 00 hex

28A9h 0h

E170 Global

read (2)

T-reference: Only for control types with torque specification. Reference torque currently required by the speed controller.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 05 2A 80 00 hex

28AAh 0h

E174 Global

read (3)

CRC-counter: Counts non-volatilely the CRC and Busy errors which occurred on EnDat® encoders. The occurrence of CRC errors indicates EMC problems. This value can be reset with A371.


28AEh 0h

E175 Global

read (3)

SSI-errors: Counts the erroneous protocols which occur with SSI encoders. Erroneous protocols are recognized when the maximum incremental value contained in H900 exceeds two consecutive protocols. The erroneous value is rejected. When the second error occurs in succession, the system malfunctions (maximum following error, encoder). NOTE The parameter H900 can only be read/changed by level-4 users.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 05 2B C0 00 hex

28AFh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 234


04


address

E176.0 Axis

read (2)

Counter grind actions: Counts all B301 grind-brake 1 actions, regardless of result B301.2.


28B0h

Array

0h

E176.1 Axis

read (2)

Counter grind actions: Counts all B301 grind-brake 2 actions, regardless of result B302.2.


28B0h

Array

1h

E177 Axis

read (2)

Time passed since last brake test: Indicates the time in hours which has passed since the last B300 brake test action. If brake management is not active (B310 = 0:inactive), the time remains zero. The time begins to run when brake management is activated. The time remaining until event 72 is indicated as the "brake test" message is calculated as follows: (B311 timeout brake test B300) - (E177 time since last brake test). The next brake test should be performed within this time. The time remaining until event 72 is indicated as the "brake test" fault is calculated as follows: 2 * B311 - E177 The inverter is blocked due to the fault. The fault must be acknowledged before the functions B300 brake test and B301/B302 brake 1/2 grind can be performed. Information This parameter applies similarly to events 73, 74 and 75 in axes 2, 3 and 4.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1hours; Type: U32; (raw value:4294967295 = 298261 hours); USS-Adr: 05 2C 40 00 hex

28B1h 0h

E178 Global

read (2)

Counter ASP switching cycles: The parameter counts each request and deselection of the ASP 5001 when the control part is active.


28B2h 0h

E180 Global

read (3)

Status positive T-limit: The positive torque limit is in effect. In the "comfort reference value" application, the signal can be read in D200 Bit 3 in fieldbus mode.



28B4h 0h

E181 Global

read (3)

Status negative T-limit: The negative torque limit is in effect. In the "comfort reference value" application, the signal can be read in D200 Bit 4 in fieldbus mode.



28B5h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 235


04


address

E182 Global

read (3)

Status positive n-limit: With operation with speed limiter or with torque control (C61 = 1), the positive maximum speed was reached. With operation without speed limiter or with speed control (C61 = 0), a too large positive reference value speed was limited to +C01.



28B6h 0h

E183 Global

read (3)

Status negative n-limit: With operation with speed limiter or torque control (C61 = 1), the negative maximum speed was reached. With operation without speed limiter or with speed control (C61 = 0), an excessively negative reference value speed was limited to -C01.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 2D C0 00 hex

28B7h 0h

E191 Global

r=2, w=4

Runtime usage: Indication of the relative utilization of the real-time task by the graphic configuration. The maximum value is calculated for each cycle of the configuration. When utilization is too high (> approx. 75 %), the cycle time in A150 should be set to a higher value. With changes of A150, E191 starts at 0 %.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.9; USS-Adr: 05 2F C0 00 hex

28BFh 0h

E200 Global

read (2)

Device status byte: This byte contains status signals of the device controller.

Bit 0: Enabled. The drive is ready. No faults, the device status corresponds to E84 = 4:oper. enabled.

Bit 1: Error. Device status is "fault reaction active" or "fault." Bit 2: Quick stop (also quick stop in "fault reaction active"). Bit 3,4: With multiple-axis operation, the active axis is shown here. Bit 4 Bit 3 Axis 0 0 Axis 1 0 1 Axis 2 1 0 Axis 3 1 1 Axis 4 Bit-5: Axis in E84 is active. Bit-6: Local: Local operation is activated. Bit-7: Bit 7 in A180 (device control byte) is copied once every device controller cycle to bit 7 in

E200 (device status byte). When bit 7 in A180 is toggled, the higher-level PLC is informed of a concluded communication cycle (send, evaluate, return data). For PROFIBUS for example, this permits cycle-time-optimized communication. The handshake bit 7 in A180 / E200 supplies no information as to whether the application has reacted to the process data. Depending on the application, other routines are provided for this (e.g., motion-Id for command positioning).

NOTE You can only use the toggle signal of bit 7 when device controllers 3:terminals, 4:USS, 5:CANopen, 6:PROFIBUS or 23:EtherCAT are used. If you configured a DSP 402 device controller, bit 7 always has signal status 0.


28C8h 0h

E941 Global

read (3)

Id-min: Display of the smallest value that the controller can request as a reference value for E92 Id. The current reference value is displayed in E165 Id-ref.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 05 EB 40 00 hex

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 236


04

F.. Control Interface Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

F09 Axis

r=2, w=2

Utilized brakes: WARNING Danger of injury and property damage! Selection of the actions B300 Brake test or B301/B302 brake 1/2 grind without an actually connected brake can cause dangerous, unintentional movements of the drive with maximum motor torque! It is very important to adjust the setting of this parameter to the wiring of the brake! Parameter F09 specifies which brake will have cyclic status monitoring. If the reported status of the brake does not coincide with that of the controller, fault 34 hardware defect, cause 4:brake1 or 5:brake2 will be triggered. Actions B300 brake test and B301/B302 brake 1/2 grind use parameter F09 to determine which brakes are present. The actions are only performed on brakes which were parameterized before as present. Information The settings for brake management must be performed for every configured axis (e.g., in 1.F09 for axis 1 and in 3.F09 for axis 3).

1: Brake1, Only one brake is connected to X300.1 of STÖBER's BRS 5000 brake module. 2: Brake2, Only one brake is connected to X300.3 of STÖBER's BRS 5000 brake module. 3: Brake 1and2; Two brakes are connected to X300 of STÖBER's BRS 5000 brake module.



2A09h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 237


04


address

F10 Global

r=3, w=3

Relay 1-function: The parameters for the behavior of relay 1 are set in F10. .

0: Function 0; Relay 1 is open if no configuration is active or E48 device status: 0: Self-test 5: Malfunction 6: Malfunction reaction active Relay 1 is closed if a configuration is active and E48 device status: 1: Switch on inhibit 2: Ready for switch on 3: Switched on 4: Operation enabled 7: Fast stop active . 1: Function 1; Relay 1 is open if no configuration is active or E48 device status: 0: Self-test 1: Switch on inhibit 5: Malfunction Relay 1 is closed if a configuration is active and E48 device status: 2: Ready for switch on 3: Switched on 4: Operation enabled 6: Malfunction reaction 7: Fast stop active


2A0Ah 0h

F11 Axis

r=2, w=2

AE1-Offset: F11 is added to E10. The result is multiplied by F12. This signal is supplied to the configuration. To compensate for an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter when the controller specifies 0 V), this must be entered in F11 with the opposite sign.

Value range in V: -10.000 ... 0 ... 10.000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 06 02 C0 00 hex

Only visible when a board is installed in the bottom option slot.

2A0Bh 0h

F12 Axis

r=2, w=2

AE1-gain: The result of the addition of F11 and E10 is multiplied by F12. This signal is supplied to the configuration.

Value range in %: -400.0 ... 100 ... 400.0



2A0Ch 0h

F13 Axis

r=2, w=2

AE1 ref low pass filter: The time constant for filtering a reference value specified on AE1 is parameterized in F13.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 10 ... 200.5


2A0Dh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 238


04


address

F14 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

AE1-mode selector: The reference value mode for AE1 is set in F14. When 0:-10V to 10V is selected, a voltage reference value can be connected to AE1 in the specified range. The selections 1 and 2 can be set when a current reference value is specified. With 1: 0 to 20mA the specification 0 mA is interpreted as the minimum reference value and 20 mA as the maximum reference value. This interpretation is reversed for the setting 2. In other words, at 0 mA (wire break) the motor is activated with the maximum reference value (pump control). Wire break monitoring can be activated in F15 for the settings 3 and 4. With these settings a current reference value of 4 to 20 mA is connected. With 3:4 to 20 mA, 4 mA is processed as the minimum reference value and 20 mA as the maximum reference value. When the selection is 4:20 to 4 mA, processing is reversed (i.e., at 4 mA the motor is activated with the maximum reference value).

0: -10V to 10V; 1: 0 to 20mA; 2: 20 to 0mA; 3: 4 to 20mA; 4: 20 to 4mA;


2A0Eh 0h

F15 Axis

r=2, w=2

Wire breakage sensing: When F14 is set to 3:4 to 20 mA or 4:20 to 4 mA, wire break monitoring can be activated in F15. Active wire break monitoring means that application event 4 will be generated as per the parameterization in U140 to U142 if a wire break occurs. The drive continues at the velocity which was valid before the wire break until either a fault is generated by the event parameterization, the enable is switched off or the drive is stopped with a stop or quick stop command.



2A0Fh 0h

F21 Axis

r=2, w=2

AE2-Offset: F21 is added to E11. The result is multiplied by F22. This signal is supplied to the configuration. To compensate for an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter when the controller specifies 0 V), this must be entered in F21 with the opposite sign.

Value range in V: -10.000 ... 0 ... 10.000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 06 05 40 00 hex


2A15h 0h

F22 Axis

r=2, w=2

AE2-gain: F21 is added to E11. The result is multiplied by F22. This signal is supplied to the configuration.

Value range in %: -400.0 ... 100 ... 400.0



2A16h 0h

F23 Axis

r=2, w=2


Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 10 ... 200.5

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.11; USS-Adr: 06 05 C0 00 hex

2A17h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 239


04


address

F31 Axis

r=2, w=2

AE3-Offset: F31 is added to E74. The result is multiplied by F32. This signal is supplied to the configuration. To compensate an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter when the controller specifies 0 V), this must be entered in F31 with opposite sign.

Value range in V: -10.000 ... 0 ... 10.000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 06 07 C0 00 hex


2A1Fh 0h

F32 Axis

r=2, w=2

AE3-gain: F31 is added to E74. The result is multiplied by F32. This signal is supplied to the configuration.

Value range in %: -400.0 ... 100 ... 400.0



2A20h 0h

F33 Axis

r=2, w=2


Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 10 ... 200.5



2A21h 0h

F40 Axis

r=2, w=2

Analog-output1-source: The value output in analog output AA1 is calculated as follows from the parameters F40 to F44: Up to and including V 5.6-C: 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F40) x F42 + F41 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F43. 3. If this is activated in F44, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. From V 5.6-D 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F40) x F42 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F43. 3. If this is activated in F44, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. 4. The offset F43 is then added. A voltage of ±10 V is output on the terminals. The resolution is approx. 10 mV. The scanning time corresponds to A150. Enter the coordinate of the parameter in F40 whose value you want to output to AA1. You can only enter parameters with the data type 16-bit with sign as the source (data type I16, ± 16384 = ± 10 V).




2A28h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 240


04


address

F41 Axis

r=2, w=2

Analog-output1-offset: The value output in analog output AA1 is calculated as follows from the parameters F40 to F44: Up to and including V 5.6-C: 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F40) x F42 + F41 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F43. 3. If this is activated in F44, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. From V 5.6-D 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F40) x F42 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F43. 3. If this is activated in F44, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. 4. The offset F43 is then added. A voltage of ±10 V is output on the terminals. The resolution is approx. 10 mV. The scanning time corresponds to A150. Enter the offset in F41.

Value range in V: -10.000 ... 0 ... 10.000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 06 0A 40 00 hex


2A29h 0h

F42 Axis

r=2, w=2

Analog-output1-gain: The value output in analog output AA1 is calculated as follows from the parameters F40 to F44: Up to and including V 5.6-C: 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F40) x F42 + F41 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F43. 3. If this is activated in F44, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. From V 5.6-D 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F40) x F42 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F43. 3. If this is activated in F44, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. 4. The offset F43 is then added. A voltage of ±10 V is output on the terminals. The resolution is approx. 10 mV. The scanning time corresponds to A150. Enter the ratio factor in F42.

Value range in %: -3198.9 ... 100 ... 3198.9

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:1024·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 06 0A 80 00 hex


2A2Ah 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 241


04


address

F43 Axis

r=2, w=2

Analog-output1-act low pass filter: The value output in analog output AA1 is calculated as follows from the parameters F40 to F44: Up to and including V 5.6-C: 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F40) x F42 + F41 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F43. 3. If this is activated in F44, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. From V 5.6-D 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F40) x F42 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F43. 3. If this is activated in F44, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. 4. The offset F43 is then added. A voltage of ±10 V is output on the terminals. The resolution is approx. 10 mV. The scanning time corresponds to A150. Enter the time constant for smoothing the intermediate result in F43.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 10 ... 200.5

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.11; USS-Adr: 06 0A C0 00 hex

2A2Bh 0h

F44 Axis

r=2, w=2

Analog-output1-absolut: The value output in analog output AA1 is calculated as follows from the parameters F40 to F44: Up to and including V 5.6-C: 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F40) x F42 + F41 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F43. 3. If this is activated in F44, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. From V 5.6-D 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F40) x F42 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F43. 3. If this is activated in F44, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. 4. The offset F43 is then added. A voltage of ±10 V is output on the terminals. The resolution is approx. 10 mV. The scanning time corresponds to A150. In F44, activate the amount generation for analog output AA1. Amount generation is activated when you set F44 = 1:active.



2A2Ch 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 242


04


address

F50 Axis

r=2, w=2

Analog-output2-source: The value output in analog output AA2 is calculated as follows from the parameters F50 to F54: Up to and including V 5.6-C: 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F50) x F52 + F51 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F53. 3. If this is activated in F54, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. From V 5.6-D 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F50) x F52 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F53. 3. If this is activated in F54, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. 4. The offset F53 is then added. A voltage of ±10 V is output on the terminals. The resolution is approx. 10 mV. The scanning time corresponds to A150. Enter the coordinate of the parameter in F50 whose value you want to output to AA2. You can only enter parameters with the data type 16-bit with sign as the source (data type I16, ± 16384 = ± 10 V).




2A32h 0h

F51 Axis

r=2, w=2

Analog-output2-offset: The value output in analog output AA2 is calculated as follows from the parameters F50 to F54: Up to and including V 5.6-C: 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F50) x F52 + F51 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F53. 3. If this is activated in F54, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. From V 5.6-D 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F50) x F52 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F53. 3. If this is activated in F54, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. 4. The offset F53 is then added. A voltage of ±10 V is output on the terminals. The resolution is approx. 10 mV. The scanning time corresponds to A150. Enter the offset in F51.

Value range in V: -10.000 ... 0 ... 10.000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 06 0C C0 00 hex


2A33h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 243


04


address

F52 Axis

r=2, w=2

Analog-output2-gain: The value output in analog output AA2 is calculated as follows from the parameters F50 to F54: Up to and including V 5.6-C: 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F50) x F52 + F51 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F53. 3. If this is activated in F54, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. From V 5.6-D 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F50) x F52 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F53. 3. If this is activated in F54, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. 4. The offset F53 is then added. A voltage of ±10 V is output on the terminals. The resolution is approx. 10 mV. The scanning time corresponds to A150. Enter the ratio factor in F52.

Value range in %: -3198.9 ... 100 ... 3198.9

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:1024·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 06 0D 00 00 hex


2A34h 0h

F53 Axis

r=2, w=2

Analog-output2-act low pass filter: The value output in analog output AA2 is calculated as follows from the parameters F50 to F54: Up to and including V 5.6-C: 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F50) x F52 + F51 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F53. 3. If this is activated in F54, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. From V 5.6-D 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F50) x F52 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F53. 3. If this is activated in F54, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. 4. The offset F53 is then added. A voltage of ±10 V is output on the terminals. The resolution is approx. 10 mV. The scanning time corresponds to A150. Enter the time constant for smoothing the intermediate result in F53.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 10 ... 200.5

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.11; USS-Adr: 06 0D 40 00 hex

2A35h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 244


04


address

F54 Axis

r=2, w=2

Analog-output2-absolut: The value output in analog output AA2 is calculated as follows from the parameters F50 to F54: Up to and including V 5.6-C: 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F50) x F52 + F51 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F53. 3. If this is activated in F54, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. From V 5.6-D 1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F50) x F52 2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F53. 3. If this is activated in F54, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. 4. The offset F53 is then added. A voltage of ±10 V is output on the terminals. The resolution is approx. 10 mV. The scanning time corresponds to A150. In F54, activate the amount generation for analog output AA2. Amount generation is activated when you set F54 = 1:active.



2A36h 0h

F61 Axis

r=2, w=2

BA1-source: The value of the parameterized coordinate is output on binary output 1 (X101.8). NOTE Please remember that binary output BA1 is already being used by the encoder simulation via the binary outputs. In this case no entry is permitted in F61.

Value range: A00 ... F181 ... A.Gxxx.yyyy (Parameter number in plain text)



2A3Dh 0h

F62 Axis

r=2, w=2

BA2-source: The value of the parameterized coordinate is output on binary output 2 (X101.9). NOTE Please remember that binary output BA2 is already being used by the encoder simulation via the binary outputs. In this case no entry is permitted in F62.




2A3Eh 0h

F63 Axis

r=2, w=2

BA3-source: The value of the parameterized coordinate is output on binary output 1 (X103.1).


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 06 0F C0 00 hex


2A3Fh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 245


04


address

F64 Axis

r=2, w=2





2A40h 0h

F65 Axis

r=2, w=2





2A41h 0h

F66 Axis

r=2, w=2





2A42h 0h

F67 Axis

r=2, w=2





2A43h 0h

F68 Axis

r=2, w=2





2A44h 0h

F69 Axis

r=2, w=2




2A45h 0h

F70 Axis

r=2, w=2




2A46h 0h

F80 Axis

r=2, w=2

BA1 on delay: A signal which is output on BA1 can be delayed with the parameters F80 and F81. When a value is entered in F80, the switchon procedure of the signal is delayed by this number of milliseconds.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: U32; (raw value:1LSB=0,00099999993131496·ms); USS-Adr: 06 14 00 00 hex


2A50h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 246


04


address

F81 Axis

r=2, w=2

BA1 off delay: A signal which is output on BA1 can be delayed with the parameters F80 and F81. When a value is entered in F81, the switchoff procedure of the signal is delayed by this number of milliseconds.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967



2A51h 0h

F82 Axis

r=2, w=2

BA1 inverting: When the parameter F82 is activated, the output of the signal entered in F61 is inverted on BA1.




2A52h 0h

F83 Axis

r=2, w=2

BA2 on delay: A signal which is output on BA2 can be delayed with the parameters F83 and F84. When a value is entered in F83, the switchon procedure of the signal is delayed by this number of milliseconds.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: U32; (raw value:1LSB=0,00099999993131496·ms); USS-Adr: 06 14 C0 00 hex


2A53h 0h

F84 Axis

r=2, w=2

BA2 off delay: A signal which is output on BA2 can be delayed with the parameters F83 and F84. When a value is entered in F84, the switch-off procedure of the signal is delayed by this number of milliseconds.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967



2A54h 0h

F85 Axis

r=2, w=2

BA2 inverting: When the parameter F85 is activated, the output of the signal entered in F62 is inverted on BA2.




2A55h 0h

F90 Global

r=2, w=3

Release time axis-switch: Specifies the release time of the contactor used for the axis switchover. This minimum time is waited before the inverter lets the next contactor be applied.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 20 ... 32767


2A5Ah 0h

F91 Global

r=2, w=3

Set time axis-switch: Specifies the set time of the contactor used for the axis switchover. This time is at least waited before the inverter lets the axis be electrified.

Value range in ms: 0 ... 20 ... 32767

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 06 16 C0 00 hex

2A5Bh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 247


04


address

F100 Global,

OFF

r=1, w=1

Brake release source: Selection of the source for the "release brake" signal. The signal can be permanently pre-specified as supplied by the binary inputs or the fieldbus. With F100 = 2:Para-meter, A180, bit 6 (global parameter) is used as the signal source. This is the setting for fieldbus operation.

CAUTION The "release brake" signal releases the brake regardless of the device state - this may cause accidental movements.



2A64h 0h

F181 Global

read (1)

BA1: Bit 0 from the BA control bits byte F210. In the "comfort reference value" application, the status of BE1 can be indicated based on F209.

0: Low; 1: High;



2AB5h 0h

F182 Global

read (1)


0: Low; 1: High;



2AB6h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 248


04


address

F183 Global

read (1)


0: Low; 1: High;

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 06 2D C0 00 hex


2AB7h 0h

F184 Global

read (1)


0: Low; 1: High;



2AB8h 0h

F185 Global

read (1)


0: Low; 1: High;



2AB9h 0h

F186 Global

read (1)


0: Low; 1: High;



2ABAh 0h

F187 Global

read (1)


0: Low; 1: High;

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 06 2E C0 00 hex


2ABBh 0h

F188 Global

read (1)


0: Low; 1: High;



2ABCh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 249


04


address

F210 Global

r=2, w=2

BA control bits: The parameter F210 is primarily used to permit a higher-level controller access to the binary outputs of the inverter. The individual bits of F210 are automatically extracted in the bit parameters F181 ... F188. With the help of the parameters F61 ... F70, the individual bits can be written to the binary outputs. In the "comfort reference value" application, the function of F210 can be changed with the parameter F209.




2AD2h 0h

G.. Technology Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

G00 Axis

r=2, w=3

PID closed loop gain: Total gain for the control error of the PID controller. The value of the control error indicated in G180 is amplified with the gain G00 and distributed in parallel to the P, I and D branch.

Value range in %: -200000.0 ... 100 ... 200000.0


2C00h 0h

G02 Axis

r=2, w=3

PID-controller Ki: Factor for the integral gain of the control error of the PID controller (see also G00). Example: With G00 = 100 % and G02 = 1 1/s and constant control error, the value of G180 is reached at G19 in one second.

Value range in 1/s: 0.00 ... 0 ... 30.00

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01·1/s; Type: I32; (raw value:2147483647 = 500000.00 x 1/s); USS-Adr: 07 00 80 00 hex

2C02h 0h

G03 Axis

r=2, w=3

PID-controller Kd: Factor for the differential gain of the control error of the PID controller (see also G00).

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 0 ... 32768.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I32; (raw value:16 Bit=1·ms); USS-Adr: 07 00 C0 00 hex

2C03h 0h

G06 Axis

r=2, w=3

PID-controller Kp2: Factor for the proportional gain of the control error of the PID controller (see also G00).

Value range in %: 0.0 ... 100 ... 20000.0


2C06h 0h

G07 Axis

r=2, w=3

PID-controller low pass: Time constant for the low pass filter of the differential portion.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 10 ... 200.5


2C07h 0h

G08 Axis

r=2, w=3

PID controller upper limit: Maximum value which the PID can reach. When this limit is reached, G181 or G200 Bit3 is set to 1.

Value range in %: -400.0 ... 150 ... 400.0


2C08h 0h

G09 Axis

r=2, w=3

PID controller lower limit: Minimum value which the PID can reach. When this limit is reached, G182 or G200 Bit4 is set to 1.

Value range in %: -400.0 ... -150 ... 400.0


2C09h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 250


04


address

G11 Axis

r=2, w=3

Tau lowpass actual value: Specifies the time constant of the PT1 low pass. When the actual signal which is queued has noise, this can be filtered out.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 0 ... 5040.6


2C0Bh 0h

G12 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

Parametersource actual technologie value: Specifies the source to be read out for the actual value. A coordinate such as "E90" (M-Motor) must be entered. Only parameters of data type I16 can be used as sources.



2C0Ch 0h

G13 Axis

r=2, w=3

PID initial value: Initial value for the working mode of the PID controller set in G14.

Value range in %: -200.0 ... 0 ... 200.0


2C0Dh 0h

G14 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=3

PID mode: Specifies the working mode of the PID controller. G13 is used as an auxiliary parameter for this. When a mode causes the valid working range to be exceeded, the working range is limited by the limit value in G08 or G09.

0: normal; 1: Out=I-Part=0; 2: Out=I-Part=G13; 3: Out=G13,I-Part=Out-P; 4: Out=PID keep,I-Part=G13;


2C0Eh 0h

G15 Axis

r=2, w=3

Technologie ref. value torque feedforward: Weighting ratio for feed forward of the torque reference value. When G15 = 0, feed forward is deactivated.

Value range in %: 0 ... 80 ... 100


2C0Fh 0h

G16 Axis

r=2, w=3

PID ratio: Weighting ratio of the PID controller. When G16 = 0, the PID controller is deactivated.

Value range in %: 0 ... 100 ... 400


2C10h 0h

G18 Axis

read (2)

PID P-Part: Observation parameter for monitoring the P portion of the PID controller.


2C12h 0h

G19 Axis

read (2)

PID I-Part: Observation parameter for monitoring the I portion of the PID controller.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I32; (raw value:16384·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 07 04 C0 00 hex

2C13h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 251


04


address

G90 Global

r=3, w=3

PLL: The parameter activates PLL control. PLL control synchronizes the inverter with the SYNC telegrams of the CAN bus or the SYNC signal of the EtherCAT bus. Information Do not change this parameter if you are using the EtherCAT PCB ECS 5000 or the Integrated Bus (IGB)! In these cases, the parameter is set automatically. A manual change can cause the synchronization to malfunction.



2C5Ah 0h

G91 Global

r=3, w=3

PLL phase-offset: Time offset value between the arrival of the SYNC telegram and the phase position of the cycle time on the inverter.

Value range in µs: -32768 ... -800 ... 32767

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 07 16 C0 00 hex

Only when the value of the parameter is not 0 for the next smaller coordinate divisible by 10.

2C5Bh 0h

G92 Global

r=3, w=3

PLL gain: Proportional gain of PLL control. The gain must be reduced when the jitter of the SYNC telegrams increases.

Value range in %: 0.0 ... 20 ... 100.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I32; (raw value:2,14748E9·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 07 17 00 00 hex


2C5Ch 0h

G93 Global

r=3, w=3

PLL low pass: Determines the limit frequency of the low pass filter of PLL control. The time must be increased when the jitter of the SYNC telegrams increases.

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 40 ... 200.0



2C5Dh 0h

G95 Global

read (3)

PLL status: Shows the status of PLL control. Bit-0: PLL status Bit-1: PLL status 00 PLL engaged 01 Engaged, but more than half the control range is utilized (frequency too high). 10 Engaged, but more than half the control range is utilized (frequency too low). 11 PLL not engaged. Bit-2: Is 1 when PLL has extended the internal cycle time (A150). Bit-3: Is 1 when control hits the limits of the control range. Bit-4: Is 1 when the measured cycle time (G96) is greater than the specification (G98). Bit-5: Is 1 when G90 = inactive (PLL is deactivated). Bit-6: Reserved Bit-7: Reserved



2C5Fh 0h

G96 Global

read (3)

PLL measured cycle-time: Cycle time (filtered value) of the SYNC telegrams determined by PLL control.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 07 18 00 00 hex


2C60h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 252


04


address

G97 Global

read (3)

PLL cycle-correction: Cycle correction specified by PLL control.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1clock-cycles; Type: I8; USS-Adr: 07 18 40 00 hex


2C61h 0h

G98 Global

r=3, w=3

Reference cycle-time: Specified value for the cycle time of the SYNC telegram.

Value range in µs: 0 ... 4000 ... 8000

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 07 18 80 00 hex

2C62h 0h

G100 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Source negate technologie reference value: Selection of the source for the "neg.ref.value" signal. When G100 = 2:parameter the control byte or control word is used as the signal source. This setting should be used for fieldbus operation. The control word can be set to different parameters for different applications. The list below indicates the control words for the different applications. The signal can be directly monitored via G300 on the block input. Application Parameter Bit Technology controller G210 2 Comfort reference value D211 4



2C64h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 253


04


address

G101 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Source PID controller disable: Disable selection of the source for the PID signal. When G101 = 2:parameter the control byte or control word is used as the signal source. This setting should be used for fieldbus operation. The control word can be set to different parameters for different applications. The list below indicates the control words for the different applications. The signal can be directly monitored via G301 on the block input. Application Parameter Bit Technology controller G210 3 Comfort reference value D211 5



2C65h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 254


04


address

G102 Axis

r=1, w=1

Source PID controller set: Set selection of the source for the PID controller signal. When G102 = 2:parameter the control byte or control word is used as the signal source. This setting should be used for fieldbus operation. The control word can be set to different parameters for different applications. The list below indicates the control words for the different applications. The signal can be directly monitored via G302 on the block input. Application Parameter Bit Technology controller G210 4 Comfort reference value D211 6



2C66h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 255


04


address

G104 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Lead-Position Source: Selects the source encoder for a lead axis position which is indicated in parameters E163 and E164. These parameters can be distributed via the IGB to forward the lead axis position to other inverters. Information A plausibility check can be performed with parameters G297 and G298 for the encoder selected with this parameter. Remember that not all applications contain parameters G297 and G298!

0: inactive; No lead axis position is output. 1: BE-encoder; The signals on binary inputs BE3, BE4 and BE5 are output as the lead axis

position. 2: X4-encoder; The signals on X4 are output as the lead axis position. 3: X140-encoder; The signals on plug connector X140 are output as the lead axis position. 4: X120-encoder; The signals on X120 are output as the lead axis position. 5: virt. Master; The signals of the virtual master are output as the lead axis position.


Only visible when E163 Lead-position producer exists.

2C68h 0h

G132 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Source technology reference value: Selection of the source for the "Tech.ref.Value" signal. The reference value can be supplied by the analog inputs or by the fieldbus. When G132 = 4:parameter the parameter G232 is used as the signal source.



2C84h 0h

G133 Axis, OFF

r=1, w=1

Source actual technology value: Selection of the source for the "Tech.ActValue" signal. The actual value can be supplied by the analog inputs or by the fieldbus. When G133 = 4:parameter the parameter G233 is used as the signal source.



2C85h 0h

G180 Axis

read (2)

PID control error: Display parameter for the control error of the PID controller (G180 = G332 - G333).

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=200,0%); USS-Adr: 07 2D 00 00 hex

2CB4h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 256


04


address

G181 Axis

read (1)

PID upper limit: Binary signal, assumes the value "1" when the PID controller reaches the maximum permissible value (can be set with G08) on the output. In fieldbus mode the signal can be read for the following status words based on the selected application: Application Parameter Bit Technology controller G200 3 Comfort reference value D200 7



2CB5h 0h

G182 Axis

read (1)

PID lower limit: Binary signal, assumes the value "1" when the PID controller reaches the minimum permissible value (can be set with G09) on the output. In fieldbus mode the signal can be read for the following status words based on the selected application: Application Parameter Bit Technology controller G200 4 Comfort reference value D200 8



2CB6h 0h

G185 Axis

read (2)

PID set value: Display parameter for the PID controller output after the weighting ratio (G16).

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 07 2E 40 00 hex

2CB9h 0h

G200 Global

read (2)

Statusbyte technology controller: This byte contains status signals of the application. Bit 0: Standstill (D180) Bit 1: Reference value eached (D181): The ramp generator has reached its reference value Bit 2: Torque limit (D182): The positive or negative torque limit has been reached Bit 3: PID upper limit (G181): The upper limit of the PID controller has been reached Bit 4: PID lower limit (G182): The lower limit of the PID controller has been reached Bit 5: Rangecontrol upper limit (C180): The upper limit of range control has been reached Bit 6: Rangecontrol lower limit (C181): The lower limit of range control has been reached Bit 7: Reserved


2CC8h 0h

G210 Global

r=2, w=2

Controlbyte technology controller: This byte contains reference value signals to the application. Bit 0: Reverse (D300): When the bit = 1, the value of the feed forward (D230) is negated. Bit 1: External fault (D301): The fault "44:externalFault1" is triggered. Bit 2: Negate technology reference value (G300): When the bit = 1, the reference value of the

technology controller (G232) is negated. Bit 3: Disable PID controller (Status PID controller disable G301): When the bit = 1, the PID

controller is deactivated. Bit 4: Enable PID mode selection (Status PID Mode G302): When the bit = 1, the working mode of

the PID controller can be specified with PID mode (G14). When the bit = 0, the PID mode is always 0:normal

Bit 5: Reserved Bit 6: Reserved Bit 7: Reserved



2CD2h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 257


04


address

G232 Global

r=2, w=3

Technology reference value: Technology reference value of the "technology controller" application (control variable of the control loop). The value is processed when G132 is "4:parameter."

Value range in %: -200.0 ... 0 ... 200.0


2CE8h 0h

G233 Global

r=2, w=3

Actual technology value: Technology actual value of the "technology controller" application. The value is processed when G133 is 4:parameter. The actual value is filtered with a PT1 low pass (G11) before it is processed on the PID controller.

Value range in %: -200.0 ... 0 ... 200.0


2CE9h 0h

G290 Global

read (3)

Error-evaluation lead-position source: This parameter indicates the current state of the error evaluation counter (see G298) for the encoder selected in G104.

Value range: 0.0 ... 0 ... 12.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1; Type: I8; USS-Adr: 07 48 80 00 hex

2D22h 0h

G291 Global

r=3, w=3

Error-counter lead-position source: This parameter counts the errors tolerated by the encoder selected in G104 since the new start of the device.


2D23h 0h

G300 Axis

read (2)

Status negate technology reference value: Display parameter for the current signal state on the input of the technology controller. G300 shows the state regardless of the source selected in G100.



2D2Ch 0h

G301 Axis

read (2)

Status PID controller disable: Display parameter for the current signal state on the input of the technology controller. G301 shows the state regardless of the source selected in G101.



2D2Dh 0h

G302 Axis

read (2)

2D2Eh 0h

G332 Axis

read (2)

Status technology value: Display parameter for the current reference value of the technology controller after the inversion point.


2D4Ch 0h

G333 Axis

read (2)

Status actual technology value: Display parameter for the current actual value of the technology controller after the low pass filter.


2D4Dh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 258


04

H.. Encoder Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

H00 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X4-function: Function of encoder interface X4 (motor encoder).

NOTE Please remember that only the setting 3:Incremental-encoder In is available on the FDS 5000.

NOTE Also please remember that a change in H00 may cause position values to be rescaled (in positioning applications). Scaling can take several seconds.

0: inactive; 3: incremental encoder in; (only for asynchronous motors) 64: EnDat®; 65: SSI master;


2E00h 0h

H01 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X4-increments: Number of increments for the encoder set in H00. With incremental encoders, each increment supplies 4 counting increments via the edge evaluation and thus a four-fold higher resolution of the position. In the case of an SSI encoder, H01 functions as a gear factor, whereby 1024 is equivalent to 1. Please contact STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK for other settings to the parameters for SSI encoders.

Value range in inc/r: 30 ... 1024 ... 8191

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1inc/r; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 08 00 40 00 hex

Only visible when H00 = 3:EncoderIn.

2E01h 0h

H02 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X4-inverted: Inverts the sign of the angle supplied by the encoder in the encoder acquisition. Can be used for reversed phases. Adhere to B05!



Only visible when H00 is not 0:inactive.

2E02h 0h

H05 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X4-SSI-code: Type of coding of the angle via the SSI encoder.

0: gray; 1: binary;


Only visible when H00 = 65:SSI-Master.

2E05h 0h

H08 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

POSISwitch® encoder selector: Available as an option, the POSISwitch® control module permits the connection of several motors to one inverter. In H08 it can be set separately for each of the four (software) axes which connection on the POSISwitch® (i.e., which motor) is allocated to the particular axis configuration. This routine permits two or more applications to be run together on separate (software) axes with a single motor.

NOTE Following a change in parameter H08, correct evaluation of the electronic nameplate is not ensured until after a device new start.

0: Enc1; 1: Enc2; 2: Enc3; 3: Enc4;


Only visible when a POSISwitch® was detected on X4.

2E08h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 259


04


address

H10 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X4-SSI data bits: With 24 or 25-bit evaluation, the 12-bit highest significance for rotary encoders corresponds to whole encoder rotations (multi-turns). Afterwards 12 or 13 bits within one rotation can still be coded. When 24-bit is set, the bit with the least significance is forced to 0. When 13-bit is set, all 13 bits code the angle within one rotation (single-turn).

0: 25 1: 24 2: 13 short; Evaluation of a single-turn SSI encoder with 13-bit telegram. 3: 13 tree; Evaluation of a 13-bit single-turn SSI encoder with 25-bit telegram. The evaluation

ignores the upper 12 bits.



2E0Ah 0h

H11 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X4 double transmission: Switches off double transmission for SSI encoder. When double transmission is activated, the angle is scanned twice in immediate succession to increase data reliability. If the encoder does not support double transmission, the inverter automatically switches off the monitoring but continues to scan twice. When double transmission is switched off with this parameter, the inverter no longer generates a second scan. Double transmission should not be deactivated if the hardware permits this function.




2E0Bh 0h

H14 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

N-track monitoring: If there is an incremental encoder without zero track at X4, the cable monitoring for the zero track can be switched off at this point.



Only visible when H00 = 3:EncoderIn.

2E0Eh 0h

H18 Global,

OFF

read (2)

POSISwitch® port-status: Indicates as a binary word the POSISwitch® ports to which encoders are connected. This is determined by the inverter during startup.


Only visible when a POSISwitch® was detected on X4.

2E12h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 260


04


address

H40 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

BE-encoder: Function of the encoder evaluation on BE3 (X101.13), BE4 (X101.14) and BE5 (X101.15). The binary inputs have the following functions for the different settings: 1: incremental encoder in 2: stepmotor in BE3 Zero track - BE4 Track A+ (Increments) freq.+ BE5 Track B+ (Direction of rotation) sign+

NOTE Also please remember that a change in H40 may cause position values to be rescaled (in positioning applications). Scaling can take several seconds.

0: inactive; 1: incremental encoder in; 2: stepmotor In;



2E28h 0h

H41 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

BE-increments: Increments per encoder revolution of the encoder on BE4 (X101.14) and BE5 (X101.15). With incremental encoders, each increment supplies 4 counting steps via edge evaluation and thus four times as high a resolution of the position.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1inc/r; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 08 0A 40 00 hex

Only visible when a board is installed in the bottom option slot and H40 is not 0:inactive.

2E29h 0h

H42 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

BE-inverted: Inverts the sign of the angle supplied by the BE encoder in the encoder acquisition. Can be used for reversed motor phases.




2E2Ah 0h

H60 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

BA-encodersimulation: Function of the encoder simulation on binary outputs BA1 and BA2 (terminals X101.16 and X101.17). The encoder simulation is available as system function in all applications. Important: The encoder simulation only works when no other function is assigned to the binary outputs. If present at all in the application, the corresponding parameters F61 and F62 may not contain any entries (blank input).

0: inactive; 1: incremental encoder simulation; 2: stepmotor Simulation;



2E3Ch 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 261


04


address

H62 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

BA-inverted: Inverts the sign of the BA encoder simulation.




2E3Eh 0h

H63 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

BA-increments: Increments of the encoder simulation on BA1 / BA2. When the source is an absolute value encoder, H63 specifies the increments as with a real incremental encoder. When the source is an incremental encoder, the scaling factor determines the selection. 1:2 means that half of the source increments are output on the BAs.

1: 64 i/r(1:16); 2: 128 i/r(1:8); 3: 256 i/r(1:4); 4: 512 i/r(1:2); 5: 1024 i/r(1:1);



2E3Fh 0h

H67 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

BA-encodersimulation source: Specifies which source is used as position encoder for the BA encoder simulation.

0: motor-encoder; 1: Configuration; H67 = 1 provides an opportunity to calculate as desired the increments to be

output within the graphic configuration (e.g., as frequency proportionate to the motor torque). In standard applications, simulation with H67 = 1 usually does not take effect.

2: position-encoder;



2E43h 0h

H120 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X120-Function: Function of plug connector X120 on the I/O terminal module expanded (XEA 5000 and XEA 5001 respectively) and on the I/O terminal module resolver REA 5001 respectively. NOTE The X120 interface on the REA 5000 option board permanently simulates TTL encoder signals in reference to a resolver connected to X140. This is the reason why this interface cannot be affected with H120. NOTE Also please remember that a change in H120 may cause position values to be rescaled (in positioning applications). Scaling can take several seconds.

0: inactive; 4: incremental encoder in; 5: stepmotor In; 67: SSI master; 68: SSI slave; 80: incremental encoder simulation; 81: stepmotor Simulation; 82: SSI simulation;


2E78h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 262


04


address

H121 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X120-increments: Increments per encoder rotation of the encoder on X120. With incremental encoders each increment supplies 4 counting steps via edge evaluation and thus four times as high a resolution of the position.


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1inc/r; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 08 1E 40 00 hex

Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the bottom option slot and an encoder input is parameterized in H120.

2E79h 0h

H122 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X120-inverted: Inverts the sign of the angle supplied by the X120 encoder in the encoder acquisition. Can be used for reversed motor phases. Adhere to B05!



Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the lower option slot and H120 is not 0:inactive or when an REA board is installed in the lower option slot.

2E7Ah 0h

H123 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X120-encoder simulation increments: Increments of the encoder simulation on X120. When the source is an absolute value encoder, H123 specifies the increments as with a real incremental encoder. When the source is an incremental encoder, the scaling factor provides the selection. 1:2 means that half of the source increments are output on X120. 2:1 means that twice as many increments are output on X120. NOTE

The X120 interface on the REA 5000 option board permanently simulates TTL encoder signals in reference to a resolver connected to X140. This is the reason why the scaling factor set in H123 always refers to X140 in this case.

1: 64 i/r(1:16); 2: 128 i/r(1:8); 3: 256 i/r(1:4); 4: 512 i/r(1:2); 5: 1024 i/r(1:1); 6: 2048 i/r(2:1);

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 08 1E C0 00 hex

Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the lower option slot and an encoder simulation is parameterized in H120 or when an REA board is installed in the lower option slot.

2E7Bh 0h

H124 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X120-zero position offset: Shift the zero pulse during incremental encoder simulation.

Value range in °: 0.0 ... 0 ... 360.0

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1°; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 08 1F 00 00 hex

Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the lower option slot and an encoder simulation is parameterized in H120 or when an REA board is installed in the lower option slot.

2E7Ch 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 263


04


address

H125 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X120-SSI-Code: Type of angle coding via the SSI encoder and for the SSI simulation.

0: gray; 1: binary;


Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the bottom option slot and an SSI functionality is selected in H120.

2E7Dh 0h

H127 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X120-encoder simulation source: Specifies which source will be used as position encoder for the X120 encoder simulation.

0: Motorencoder; The encoder set in B26 is used as the source. 1: Configuration; The virtual master is used as the source. 2: Positions-encoder; The encoder set in I02 is used as the source.



2E7Fh 0h

H130 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X120-SSI-data bits: With evaluation or simulation with 24 or 25 bit, the 12-bit highest significance for rotary encoders corresponds to whole encoder rotations (multi-turns). Afterwards 12 or 13 bits can still be coded within one rotation. When 24 bit is set, the bit with the least significance is forced to 0. With a setting to 13 bits, all 13 bits code the angle within one rotation (single-turn). NOTE Note that the SSI data bits are set with the parameter H126 in version V 5.2. For questions concerning the documentation of H126, contact [email protected].

0: 25 1: 24 2: 13 short; Evaluation or simulation of a single-turn SSI encoder with 13-bit telegram 3: 13 tree; Evaluation or simulation of a single-turn SSI encoder with 25-bit telegram. The upper 12

bits are ignored for the evaluation. For simulation, 0 is forced.



2E82h 0h

H131 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X120 double transmission: Switches off double transmission for SSI encoder. When double transmission is activated, the angle is scanned twice in immediate succession to increase data reliability. If the encoder does not support double transmission, the inverter automatically switches off the monitoring but continues to scan twice with running switching cycle. When double transmission is switched off with this parameter, the inverter no longer generates a second scan. NOTE Double transmission should not be deactivated if the hardware permits this function.




2E83h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 264


04


address

H132 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

SSI-Timeout: The parameter activates timeout monitoring for SSI simulation on X120. Timeout monitoring triggers fault 37 when no position has been scanned during the last 5 ms for an MDS 5000 or during the last 1.25 ms for an SDS 5000. If timeout monitoring is deactivated, the higher-level controller must ensure that the SSI transmission is error-free and within the correct cycle. This monitoring is then switched off on the drive! When the SSI simulation is part of an SSI motion bus (e.g., synchronous operation, cam), monitoring must remain on. Otherwise the SSI motion bus is not safe and, with it, the application. When the simulation is ready for operation after the inverter starts up, it also takes approx. 5 s before monitoring starts even if timeout is already activated. This gives the evaluated device (controller, other inverter) a somewhat longer startup time before the fault is triggered.




2E84h 0h

H133 Global

r=3, w=3

SSI simulation offset: This parameter specifies an offset for the SSI simulation. This is added to the value from the evaluation of a real source encoder. The parameter has no effect if a virtual master encoder is used as the SSI source.



2E85h 0h

H134 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

N-track monitoring: If there is an incremental encoder without zero track at X120, the cable monitoring for the zero track can be switched off at this point.



Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the bottom option slot and an encoder input is parameterized in H120.

2E86h 0h

H140 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X140-function: Function of plug connector X140 on the resolver I/O terminal module (REA 5000, REA 5001). NOTE Also please remember that a change in H140 may cause position values to be rescaled (in positioning applications). Scaling can take several seconds.

0: inactive; 66: resolver; 71: EnDat with sine and cosine;


Only visible when a resolver option board is installed in the bottom option slot.

2E8Ch 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 265


04


address

H142 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X140-inverted: Inverts the sign of the angle supplied by the X140 encoder in the encoder acquisition. Can be used for reversed motor phases. Adhere to B05!



Only visible when a resolver option board is installed in the bottom option slot and H140 is not 0:inactive.

2E8Eh 0h

H148 Axis, OFF

r=2, w=2

X140-resolver poles: Number of poles of the resolver on X140 (Firmware versions prior to V 5.4 only permit the operation of two-pole resolvers). NOTE Only for use with an REA 5000. The incremental encoder simulation on X120 outputs a number of markers which is incremented by the factor H148/2 in comparison to the number of markers parameterized in H123.

Value range: 2 ... 2 ... 6

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; (raw value:255 = 510); USS-Adr: 08 25 00 00 hex

Only visible when E58 is parameterized as "REA 5000" or "REA 5001" and H140 = 66:Resolver.

2E94h 0h

H149 Axis

read (3)

Sinus-Cosinus-Periods: The sine-cosine periods for an EnDat encoder (with sine-cosine tracks) connected to the X140 are displayed. The parameter is invisible if the parameter H140 X140 function has not been set to 71: EnDat with sin-cos tracks. The parameter is also invisible if no REA 5000 or REA 5001 option board is planned.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1·1/revolution; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 08 25 40 00 hex

2E95h 0h

H300 Axis, OFF

r=3, w=3

Keep reference: With the setting "1:active" the status "In Reference" (I86) is not deleted on the occurrence of an EnDat® CRC error on X4, as would otherwise normally be the case. The setting of H300 is relevant for the following parameter combinations: 1. I02 = 2:X4-Encoder 2. I02 = 0:Motor encoder and B26 = 2:X4-Encoder

0: inactive; 1: active; Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 08 4B 00 00 hex

2F2Ch 0h

R.. Production data Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

R01.0 Global

read (3)

Hardware-version power-unit for hardware: Number specifying the hardware status of the power pack. All changes in the hardware states are counted here.


4201h 0h

R01.1 Global

read (3)

Hardware-version power-unit for software : Number specifying the hardware status of the power pack. Only changes in the hardware states which require a software adjustment are counted here.


4201h 1h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 266


04


address

R02 Global

read (3)

Power phases: Specifies whether the device is a single-phase or three-phase device.

0: Single-phase; 1: Three-phase;


4202h 0h

R03 Global

read (3)

Power supply: Power supply of the input rectifier.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1V; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 12 00 C0 00 hex

4203h 0h

R04 Global

read (3)

Nominal current async: Nominal current of the inverter for operation of asynchronous machines and normal switching (B24 = 4 kHz).


4204h 0h

R05 Global

read (3)

Upper temperature limit: Maximum permissible inverter temperature. When the measured inverter temperature E25 exceeds this value, a fault "38:Temperature device sensor" is triggered.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1°C; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 328 °C); USS-Adr: 12 01 40 00 hex

4205h 0h

R24 Global

read (3)

Nominal current servo: Nominal current of the inverter during operation with servo motors and normal switching (B24 = 8 kHz).


4218h 0h

R25 Global

read (3)

Lower temperature limit: Minimum permissible inverter temperature. When the measured inverter temperature E25 passes below this value, a fault "38:temperature device sensor" is triggered. May indicate that the temperature sensor is defective.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1°C; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 328 °C); USS-Adr: 12 06 40 00 hex

4219h 0h

R26 Global

read (3)

Maximum current async: Specifies the current strength above which the inverter triggers a fault "33:overcurrent" during operation with ASM. Specification is made in %, reference value is R04.


421Ah 0h

R27 Global

read (3)

Maximum current servo: Specifies the current strength above which the inverter triggers a fault "33:overcurrent" during operation with servo. Specification is made in %, reference value is R24.


421Bh 0h

R28 Global

read (3)

Upper voltage limit: Maximum permissible DC link voltage. When the measured DC link voltage E03 exceeds this value, a fault "36:high voltage" is triggered.


421Ch 0h

R29 Global

read (3)

Lower voltage limit: Minimum required DC link voltage. Represents the lower limit for parameter A35.


421Dh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 267


04


address

R30 Global

read (3)

Brake chopper available: Specifies whether a brake resistance can be connected to the inverter.

0: inactive; No brake resistance possible. 1: active; Brake resistance possible.


421Eh 0h

R31 Global

read (3)

Brake chopper on level: The brake chopper is turned on at the latest when this value is exceeded.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 3277 V); USS-Adr: 12 07 C0 00 hex

421Fh 0h

R32 Global

read (3)

Brake chopper off level: The brake chopper is switched off at the latest when this value is passed below.


4220h 0h

R33 Global

read (3)

Maximum motor power: Maximum power which a motor that is operated on this inverter may have. Represents the upper limit for B11.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001kW; Type: I16; (raw value:1LSB=0,01·kW); USS-Adr: 12 08 40 00 hex

4221h 0h

R34 Global

read (3)

Maximum brakeresistor power: Maximum power which a brake resistor that is connected to this inverter may have. Represents the upper limit for A22.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1W; Type: I16; (raw value:1LSB=10·W); USS-Adr: 12 08 80 00 hex

4222h 0h

R35 Global

read (3)

Minimum brakeresistor resistance: Minimum resistance value which a braking resistor connected to this inverter must have. Represents the lower limit for A21.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1Ohm; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 3277 Ohm); USS-Adr: 12 08 C0 00 hex

4223h 0h

R36.0 Global

read (3)

Hardware-version control-unit for hardware: Number specifying the hardware version of the control unit. All changes in the hardware states are counted here.


4224h 0h

R36.1 Global

read (3)

Hardware-version control-unit for software: Number specifying the hardware version of the control unit. All changes in the hardware states which require a software adjustment are counted here.


4224h 1h

T.. Scope

Par. Description Fieldbus- address

T25 Global

r=3, w=3

Automatic scope start: When T25 is "1:active," Scope starts automatically after the configuration is downloaded. With a device new start, Scope is also automatically started with the settings saved last.



4619h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 268


04

U.. Protection functions Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

U00 Global

r=3, w=3

Level low voltage: Level at which the event "46:low voltage" is triggered due to cause "1:low voltage DC link voltage limit."

2: Warning; After the tolerance time in U01 expires, the device assumes fault status. 3: Fault; When the value in A35 is passed below, the device immediately assumes fault status.


4800h 0h

U01 Global

r=3, w=3

Time low voltage: Can only be set with U00 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which the triggering of low voltage monitoring is tolerated. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault status.

Value range in s: 1.00 ... 1 ... 10.00

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: U8; (raw value:2 Bit=1·s); USS-Adr: 15 00 40 00 hex

Only visible when the appropriate event level is parameterized to 2:Warning.

4801h 0h

U02 Global

r=3, w=3

Level overtemperature Device i2t: Parallel to the monitoring of the heat dissipater temperature, an additional protective function is offered via i²t. The device load can be indicated as a percentage via parameter E22. If the value in E22 is greater than 100 %, event 39 is triggered. When the event is triggered, a current limitation occurs in the control modes Servo, Vectorcontrol and Sensorless Vectorcontrol (SLVC). At the same time a quick stop is triggered when U02 is parameterized as a failure. Reduction of the current can mean that the quick stop is no longer executed correctly. WARNING Undesired sinking of the gravity-stressed axes! Remember that the current limitation also causes a torque limitation. This may cause gravity-stressed axes to sink. NOTE Remember that event 59 is always triggered when E22 is greater than 105 %.

0: inactive; Device does not react to the triggering of U02. 1: Message; When U02 is triggered, this is only indicated. The device continues to remain ready

for operation. 2: Warning; After expiration of the tolerance time in U03, the device assumes fault status (for E39,

see chap. 17). 3: Fault; After U02 is triggered, the device immediately assumes fault status (for E39, see chap.

17).


4802h 0h

U03 Global

r=3, w=3

Time overtemperature Device i2t: Can only be set with U02 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which a trigger of the i²t monitoring is tolerated. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault status.

Value range in s: 1.00 ... 10 ... 60.00

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: U8; (raw value:2 Bit=1·s); USS-Adr: 15 00 C0 00 hex


4803h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 269


04


address

U10 Global

r=3, w=3

Level temperature motor i2t: Parallel to the monitoring of the positor line on the motor, the inverter simulates the motor temperature via an i²t model. The motor load is indicated as a percentage in parameter E23. If the value in E23 is greater than 100 %, event 45 is triggered. If a motor KTY evaluation has been entered on the nameplate, the parameter is set to 2:warning.

0: inactive; Device does not react to the triggering of U10. 1: Message; Triggering of U10 is only indicated. The device continues to be ready for operation. 2: Warning; After expiration of the tolerance time U11, the device assume fault status.


480Ah 0h

U11 Global

r=3, w=3

Time temperature motor i2t: Can only be set when U10 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which a trigger of i²t monitoring is tolerated. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault status. If a motor KTY evaluation has been entered on the nameplate, the parameter is set to 1 s.

Value range in s: 1.00 ... 30 ... 60.00



480Bh 0h

U12 Global

r=3, w=3

Level motor connection: When the axis switch via POSISwitch® is utilized, the inverter can test during switching whether the contactor of the motor to be switched off has actually broken contact (opened). In addition, under certain circumstances, it can be determined that no motor is connected.

0: inactive; 3: Fault;


480Ch 0h

U15 Global

r=3, w=3

Level MotorTMP: Trips when the motor temperature sensor on X2 triggers.

2: Warning; After expiration of the tolerance time U16, the device assume fault status. 3: Fault; The device immediately assumes fault status after the motor TMP is triggered.


480Fh 0h

U16 Global

r=3, w=3

Time MotorTMP: Can only be set when U15 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which triggering of the motor TMP is tolerated. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault status.

Value range in s: 1.00 ... 2 ... 60.00



4810h 0h

U20 Axis

r=3, w=3

Level M-Max limit: When the calculated motor torque exceeds the current torque limit in E62 during stationary operation, event 47 is triggered.

0: inactive; Device does not react to the triggering of U20. 1: Message; Triggering of U20 is only indicated. The device continues to remain ready for

operation. 2: Warning; After expiration of the tolerance time in U21, the device assumes fault status. 3: Fault; The device immediately assumes fault status after U20 is triggered.


4814h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 270


04


address

U21 Axis

r=3, w=3

Time M-Max limit: Can only be set when U20 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which a drive overload is tolerated. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault status.

Value range in s: 1.00 ... 10 ... 60.00



4815h 0h

U30 Axis

r=3, w=3

Emergency braking: In case of some malfunctions that normally result in the drive coasting down, emergency braking can be performed as an option. The emergency braking is treated like a malfunction fast stop for these malfunctions, however the emergency braking does not follow the fast stop ramp (D81), but is performed using an internally pre-calculated current. Emergency braking is only possible in the servo mode (B20=64:Servo). Only the malfunction reaction for the selected malfunctions is affected. In addition to the setting in U30, the malfunction fast stop must also be activated in A29. A39 (t-max. fast stop) should be set such that the emergency braking can be ceased. In the case of the following malfunctions in which the drive is switched so it is free of torque ("coasts down"), emergency braking can be performed as an option: Malfunction 37:Encoder, Malfunction 46:Overvoltage with cause 3:Line drop, Malfunction 56:Overspeed. NOTE At the start of the emergency braking, brake actuation is triggered simultaneously.

0: inactive; all malfunctions for which a fast stop is not possible result in coasting down. The setting in A29 applies to the malfunctions for which a fast stop can be used.

1: active; in the case of the malfunctions 37:Encoder, 56:Overspeed and 46:Undervoltage with cause 3:Line drop emergency braking is performed. The malfunction fast stop must be activated in A29. The malfunctions for which a fast stop can be used continue to react with the normal fast stop.



481Eh 0h

U80 Axis

r=3, w=3

Fault sample parameter 0: Each of the 10 fault memory entries has space for user-defined data which are also saved when a fault is triggered. The parameter to be recorded is set here.



4850h 0h

U81 Axis

r=3, w=3




4851h 0h

U82 Axis

r=3, w=3




4852h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 271


04


address

U83 Axis

r=3, w=3




4853h 0h

U100 Axis

r=3, w=3

Level application event 0: Application-specific event no. 60. Starting with the level "1:message," the display shows the event number with the text specified in U102 (e.g., "60:my fault") when this event occurs.

0: inactive; 1: Message; 2: Warning; 3: Fault;


4864h 0h

U101 Axis

r=3, w=3

Time application event 0: Can only be set with U100 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which the event remains a warning. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault status.

Value range in s: 0.00 ... 0 ... 63.75



4865h 0h

U102 Axis

r=3, w=3

Text application event 0: Text which appears on the display when the event is triggered.

Default setting: Ext0


4866h 0h

U110 Axis

r=3, w=3

Level application event1: Application-specific event no. Nr. 61. Starting with the level "1:message," the display shows the event number with the text specified in U112 (e.g., "61:my fault") when this event occurs.



486Eh 0h

U111 Axis

r=3, w=3

Time application event 1: Can only be set when U110 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which the event remains a warning. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault status.

Value range in s: 0.00 ... 0 ... 63.75

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: U8; (raw value:2 Bit=1·s); USS-Adr: 15 1B C0 00 hex


486Fh 0h

U112 Axis

r=3, w=3

Text application event 1: Indication which appears on the display when the event is triggered.



4870h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 272


04


address

U120 Axis

r=3, w=3

Level application event 2: Application-specific event no. 62. Starting with the level "1:message," the event number and the text specified in U122 (e.g., "62:my fault") appear on the display when this event occurs.



4878h 0h

U121 Axis

r=3, w=3

Time application event 2: Can only be set when U120 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which the event remains a warning. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault status.

Value range in s: 0.00 ... 0 ... 63.75

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: U8; (raw value:2 Bit=1·s); USS-Adr: 15 1E 40 00 hex


4879h 0h

U122 Axis

r=3, w=3




487Ah 0h

U130 Axis

r=3, w=3

Level application event 3: Application-specific event no. 63. Starting with level "1:message," the event number and the text specified in U132 (e.g., "63:my fault") appear on the display when this event occurs.



4882h 0h

U131 Axis

r=3, w=3

Time application event 3: Can only be set when U130 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which the event remains a warning. After this time expires, the device assumes fault status.

Value range in s: 0.00 ... 0 ... 63.75



4883h 0h

U132 Axis

r=3, w=3




4884h 0h

U140 Axis

r=3, w=3




488Ch 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 273


04


address

U141 Axis

r=3, w=3


Value range in s: 0.00 ... 0 ... 63.75



488Dh 0h

U142 Axis

r=3, w=3


Default setting: currentloop lost


488Eh 0h

U150 Axis

r=3, w=3




4896h 0h

U151 Axis

r=3, w=3


Value range in s: 0.00 ... 0 ... 63.75



4897h 0h

U152 Axis

r=3, w=3




4898h 0h

U160 Axis

r=3, w=3




48A0h 0h

U161 Axis

r=3, w=3


Value range in s: 0.00 ... 0 ... 63.75



48A1h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 274


04


address

U162 Axis

r=3, w=3




48A2h 0h

U170 Axis

r=3, w=3




48AAh 0h

U171 Axis

r=3, w=3


Value range in s: 0.00 ... 0 ... 63.75

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: U8; (raw value:2 Bit=1·s); USS-Adr: 15 2A C0 00 hex


48ABh 0h

U172 Axis

r=3, w=3



Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 15 2B 00 00 hex

48ACh 0h

U180 Axis

r=2, w=2

Text external fault 1: In addition to the 8 external events whose level (fault, warning, and so on) can be specified as desired by the user, two other events which always trigger a fault are available for application development. The related fault messages are specified by the parameters U180 and U181.

Default setting: ExtFault1


48B4h 0h

U181 Axis

r=2, w=2

Text external fault 2: See U180.

Default setting: ExtFault2


48B5h 0h

Z.. Fault counter Par. Description Fieldbus-

address

Z31 Global

read (3)

Short/ground.: The parameter indicates how frequently event 31:short/ground has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The hardware overcurrent switchoff is active. Cause: The motor requires too much current from the inverter (interwinding fault,

overload) Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. Other: The motor always coasts down. The brake chopper cuts out.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 07 C0 00 hex

521Fh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 275


04


address

Z32 Global

read (3)

Short/ground internal: The parameter indicates how frequently event 32:short/ground internal has occurred. Event description: Trigger: When the device switches on (switch on 24 V with power supply already

present) a short-circuit ground fault is detected. Cause: There is a device-internal bridge short-circuit or an internal or external ground

fault. Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment Other: The power stage is switched off on the hardware side. The motor always coasts

down. The brake chopper is switched off as long as the malfunction is present. Please send the device in for repair.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 08 00 00 hex

5220h 0h

Z33 Global

read (3)

Overcurrent: The parameter indicates how frequently event 33:overcurrent has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The total motor current exceeds the permissible maximum. Cause: Acceleration times too short Wrong torque limitations in parameters C03 and C05 Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. Other: The motor always coasts down.


5221h 0h

Z34 Global

read (3)

Hardware fault: The parameter indicates how frequently event 34:hardware fault has occurred. Event description: Trigger: A hardware error occurred. Cause: 1: FPGA; Error while loading the FPGA. 2: NOV-ST; Control unit memory defective (FERAM). 3: NOV-LT; Power unit memory defective (EEPROM). 4: brake 1; Activation of brake 1 is defective or the brake module has no 24 V

power. 5: brake 2; Activation of brake 2 is defective or the brake module has no 24 V

power. 11: currentMeas; Current offset measurement when device starts up - deviation

too great Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Cannot be acknowledged Other: The brake chopper is switched off as long as the malfunction is present. The

inverter must be sent in for repairs.


5222h 0h

Z35 Global

read (3)

Watchdog: The parameter indicates how frequently event 35:watchdog has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The watchdog of the microprocessor has triggered. Cause: The microprocessor is busy or it is faulty. Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. Other: The motor always coasts down. The brake chopper is switched off while the

inverter restarts.


5223h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 276


04


address

Z36 Global

read (3)

High voltage: The parameter indicates how frequently event 36:high voltage has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The voltage in the DC link exceeds permissible maximum (indication DC link

voltage in E03). Cause: Network voltage too high Feedback of drive in braking mode (no brake resistor connected brake

chopper deactivated with A22=0 or defective). Brake resistor too low (overcurrent protection) Ramp too steep Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. Other: The motor always coasts down. The brake chopper is switched off as long as the

malfunction is present.


5224h 0h

Z37 Global

read (3)

Encoder: The parameter indicates how frequently event 37:encoder has occurred. Event description: Trigger: Error by encoder. Cause: 1: Para <-> encoder; Parameterization does not match connected encoder. 2: ParaChgOffOn; Parameterchange; Encoder parameterization cannot be

changed during operation. Save and then turn device off and on so that the change takes effect.

4: X4 chan.A/Clk; Wire break, track A / clock 5: X4 chan.B/Dat; Wire break, track B / data 6: X4 chan.0; Wire break, track 0 7: X4EnDatAlarm; The EnDat® encoder reported an alarm. 8: X4EnDatCRC; The EnDat® encoder reported that too many errors were

found during the redundancy check. The cause can be wirebreak or errors in the cable shield.

10: resol.carrier; Resolver is not or wrong connected, wirebreak is possible 11: X140-undervol.; Wrong transmission factor 12: X140-overvolt; Wrong transmission factor 14: resol.failure; Wirebreak 15: X120-double t; X120 double transmission occurred 16: X120-Busy; Encoder gave no response for too long; bei SSI-Slave: bei

freigegebenen Antrieb seit 5 ms keine Telegramm 17: X120-wirebreak; A wire break was discovered on X120. 18: X120-Timeout; 19: X4-double tr.; X4 double transmission occurred 20: X4-Busy; Encoder gave no response for too long 21: X4-wirebreak; 22: AX5000; Acknowledgment of the axis switch is not effected. 23: Ax5000require; Comparison of E57 and E70. 24: X120-speed; B297, G297 or I297 exceeded for encoder on X120. 25: X4-speed; B297, G297 or I297 exceeded for encoder on X4. 26: No Enc. found; Either no encoder was found on X4 or the EnDat®/SSI

encoder has a wire break. 27: AX5000 found; A functional AX 5000 option board was found on X4

although incremental encoder or EnDat® encoder was parameterized, or no EnDat® encoder is connected to the AX 5000 option board.

28: EnDat found.; An EnDat® encoder was found on X4 although another encoder was parameterized.

29: AX5000/IncEnc; Either X4 has a faulty AX 5000 option board or the A-track of an incremental encoder has a wire break.

5225h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 277


04


address

30: opt2 incomp.; Version of option 2 is not current. 31: X140-EnDatAla; The EnDat® encoder on X140 reports an alarm. 32: X140-EnDatCRC; The EnDat® encoder on X140 reports that too many faults

were found during the redundancy test. Possible causes may be wire break or a cable shield fault.

33: IGB-speed; G297 exceeded on the IGB. 34: Battery low; While switching on the inverter it was determined that the

voltage of the battery has fallen below the warning limit of the encoder. Referencing of the axis remains intact. However, the remaining service life of the backup battery is limited. Replace the AES battery before the next time the inverter is switched off. Note also the operating instructions for the Absolute Encoder Support AES.

35: Battery empty; While switching on the inverter it was determined that the voltage of the battery has fallen below the minimum voltage of the encoder. Referencing of the axis has been deleted. The backup battery is no longer able to retain the position in the encoder over the time during which the inverter in switched off. Referencing the axis. Replace the AES battery before the next time the inverter is switched off. Note also the operating instructions for the Absolute Encoder Support AES.

Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn the device off/on for causes 7, 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14. Programmed

acknowledgment for other causes. Other: The motor always coasts down. CAUTION With positioning applications, the reference is deleted by the event "37:encoder."

After acknowledgment, referencing must be performed again.


Z38 Global

read (3)

Overtemp.device sensor: The parameter indicates how frequently event 38:overtemp.device sensor has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The temperature measured by the device sensor exceeds the permissible

maximum value or is below the permissible minimum value. Cause: Ambient/switching cabinet temperatures too high or to low. Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. Other: The permissible temperatures are stored on the power section of the inverter.


5226h 0h

Z39 Global

read (3)

Overtemp.device i2t: The parameter indicates how frequently event 39:overtemp.device i2t has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The i2t model for the inverter exceeds 100 % of the thermal load. Cause: Inverter overloaded (e.g., because motor blocked). Too high clock pulse frequency. Level: Inactive, message, warning or fault, can be parameterized in U02 (Default: fault).Other: When the event is triggered, a current limitation occurs initially for control types

servo and vector control. At the same time, a quick stop is triggered as a fault when parameterized in U02. Reduction of the current may mean that the quick stop is no longer executed correctly!


5227h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 278


04


address

Z40 Global

read (3)

Invalid data: The parameter indicates how frequently event 40:invalid data has occurred. Event description: Trigger: A data error was detected when the non-volatile memory was initialized. Cause: 1 to 7: Control unit memory 1: fault; Low-level read/write error or timeout. 2: blockMiss; Unknown data block. 3: dataSecurity; Block has no data security. 4: checksum; Block has checksum error. 5: r/o; Block is r/o. 6: readErr; Startup phase: block read error. 7: blockMiss; Block not found . 17 to 23: power unit memory 17: fault; Low-level read/write error or timeout. 18: blockMiss; Unknown data block. 19: dataSecurity; Block has no data security. 20: checksum; Block has checksum error. 21: r/o; Block is r/o. 22: readErr; Startup phase: block read error. 23: blockMiss; Block not found. 32 and 33: encoder memory 32: el.mot-type; No nameplate data present. 33: el.typeLim; Elecronic motor-type limit; nameplate parameters cannot be

entered (limit or existence). 48: optionBoard2; Error in memory of option 2 with REA 5000 and XEA 5000

and XEA 5001 respectively. Level: Fault Acknowledgment: The event cannot be acknowledged for cause 1 to 23 and 48. The inverter must be sent in for repairs. The event can be acknowledged for

causes 32 and 33.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0A 00 00 hex

5228h 0h

Z41 Global

read (3)

Temp.MotorTMP: The parameter indicates how frequently event 41:temp.MotorTMP has occurred. Event description: Trigger: Motor temperature sensor reports excess temperature. (Connection terminals

X2.3, X2.4). Cause: The motor is overloaded. The temperature sensor is not connected. Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment.


5229h 0h

Z42 Global

read (3)

TempBrakeRes: The parameter indicates how frequently event 42:tempBrakeRes has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The i2t model for the brake resistor exceeds 100 % of the load. Cause: The brake resistor may not be adequate for the application. Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Programmed acknowledgment. Acknowledgment by turning the device off/on is

not recommended since the i2t model would be reset to 80 % in this case and there is a danger of the deceleration resistor being damaged.

Other: The brake chopper is switched off as long as the malfunction is present.


522Ah 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 279


04


address

Z44 Global

read (3)

External fault 1: The parameter indicates how frequently event 44:External fault 1 has occurred.Event description: Trigger: Application specific or by free programming option. Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. Other: Should only be used for application events which may not be set lower than the

"fault" level.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0B 00 00 hex

522Ch 0h

Z45 Global

read (3)

Overtemp.motor i2t: The parameter indicates how frequently event 45:overtemp.motor i2t has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The i2t model for the motor has reached 100 % of load. Cause: The motor is overloaded. Level: Can be parameterized as inactive, message or warning in U10 and U11. Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment.


522Dh 0h

Z46 Global

read (3)

Low voltage: The parameter indicates how frequently event 46:low voltage has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The DC link voltage is lower than the limit value set in A35. Cause: 1: Low Voltage; The value in E03 DC-link-voltage has dropped below the value

parameterized in A35 low voltage limit. 2: Network phase; Phase monitoring has found that a switched-on power unit is

missing a phase. 3: Drop in network; When phase monitoring finds that the network voltage is

missing, the charging relay is immediately switched off. Normal operation is maintained. If the power unit is still switched on after network voltage returns, a fault is triggered after 0.5 s.

Level: Can be parameterized for cause 1 in U00 and U01. Warning with 10-second warning time for cause 2, fault for cause 3.

Acknowledgment: Can be acknowledged for "fault" level by turning device off/on or programmed acknowledgment.

Other: The motor always coasts down for cause 3.


522Eh 0h

Z47 Global

read (3)

Torque limit: The parameter indicates how frequently event 47:torque limit has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The maximum torque permitted for static operation is exceeded for the control

types servo control, vector control or senorless vector control (E62:act. pos. M-max, E66:act. neg. M-max).

Cause: Limitation by parameters C03 and C05. Level: Can be parameterized in U20 and U21.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0B C0 00 hex

522Fh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 280


04


address

Z52 Global

read (3)

Communication: The parameter indicates how frequently event 52:communication has occurred. Event description: Trigger: Communication fault Cause: 1: CAN LifeGuard; The device recognized the "life-guarding-event" (master no

longer sends RTR). 2: CAN Sync Error; The sync message was not received within the time set in

parameter A201 Cycle Period Timeout. 3: CAN Bus Off; Went off when bus went off. The driver started it again. 4: PZD-Timeout; Failure of the cyclic data connection (PROFIBUS). 5: USS; (under preparation) failure of the cyclic data connection (USS). 6: EtherCAT PDO; The inverter received no process data during the time set in

A258. 7: EtherCAT-DcSYNC0; There is a malfunction on the synchronization signal

"SYNC 0". This malfunction can only occur with EtherCAT® synchronization activated using "Distributed Clock (DC)".

8: IGB µC failure; The controller for IGB communication has failed. 9: IGB Lost Frame; IGB-Motionbus fault. The station discovered the loss of at

least 2 consecutive data frames (double error). This cause can only occur when the IGB state = 3:Motionbus and the motor is energized.

10: IGB P.LostFra; IGB-Motionbus fault. Another station discovered a double error and reported this via A163. This causes that inverter to also malfunction with this cause. The cause can only occur when the IGB state = 3:Motionbus and the motor is energized.

11: IGB Sync Erro; The synchronization within the inverter has malfunctioned because the configuration was stopped by POSITool. This fault can only occur when the IGB state equaled 3:Motionbus and the motor was energized.

12: IGB ConfigTim; A block was not executed at the beginning of the global area in real-time. The runtime sequence of blocks may have been set incorrectly. This fault can only occur when the IGB state equaled 3:Motionbus and the motor was energized.

13: IGBPartnerSyn; Another station in the IGB network has a synchronization fault (see cause 11). This station reported its fault via A163. This causes that inverter to also malfunction with cause 13. This fault can only occur when the IGB state equaled 3:Motionbus and the motor was energized.

Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0D 00 00 hex

5234h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 281


04


address

Z55 Global

read (3)

Option board: The parameter indicates how frequently event 55:option board has occurred. Event description: Trigger: Error during operation with option board. Cause: 1: CAN 5000 failure; CAN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 2: DP 5000 failure; DP5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 3: REA 5000 failure; REA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 4: SEA 5000 failure; SEA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 5: XEA 5000 failure; XEA 5000 or XEA 5001was recognized, installed and

failed. 6: EncSim-init; Incremental encoder simulation could not be initialized on

XEA. The motor may have turned during initialization. 7: WrongOption; Incorrect or missing option board (comparison of E54/E58

with E68/E69) or on SDS 5000: option board with old hardware version (XEA 5001: from HW 10, REA 5000: from HW19)

8: LEA5000 failure; LEA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 9: ECS5000 failure; ECS 5000 was recognized, installed and failed.. 10: 24V failure; Failure of the 24 V supply for XEA 5001 or LEA 5000. 11:SEA 5001 failure; SEA 5001 was recognized, installed and failed. 12:REA 5001 failure; REA 5001 was recognized, installed and failed. 13: PN5000 fail 1; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. Basic

hardware tests have detected an error. 14: PN5000 fail 2; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. Basic software

tests have detected an error. 15: PN5000 fail 3; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. The Watchdog

function of the PN-5000 monitoring system has detected an error. 17: Option2 too old; on SDS 5000: option board with old hardware version

(XEA 5001: from HW 10, REA 5000: from HW 19) Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on for all causes or programmed acknowledgment of causes 1 to

6 and 8 to 10.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0D C0 00 hex

5237h 0h

Z56 Global

read (3)

Overspeed: The parameter indicates how frequently event 56:overspeed has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The measured speed is greater than C01*1,1 + 100 rpm. Cause: Encoder defective Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. Other: The motor always coasts down (from V5.0D on).

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0E 00 00 hex

5238h 0h

Z57 Global

read (3)

Runtime usage: The parameter indicates how frequently event 57:runtime usage has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The cycle time of a real-time task was exceeded. Cause: 2: RT2; Cycle time of real-time task 2 exceeded (1 msec) 3: RT3; Cycle time of real-time task 3 exceeded (technology task) 4: RT4; Cycle time of real-time task 4 exceeded (32 msec) 5: RT5; Cycle time of real-time task 5 exceeded (256 msec) Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment.


5239h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 282


04


address

Z58 Global

read (3)

Grounded: The parameter indicates how frequently event 58:grounded has occurred. Event description: Trigger: Hardware signal from power section with MDS 5000 BG3 or SDS 5000 BG 3. Cause: Asymmetrical motor currents. Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. Other: The motor always coasts down. The brake chopper is switched off as long as the

malfunction is present.


523Ah 0h

Z59 Global

read (3)

Overtemp.device i2t: The parameter indicates how frequently event 59:overtemp.device i2t has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The i2t model calculated for the inverter exceeds 105 % of the thermal load. Cause: Inverter overloaded (e.g., because motor is blocked). Clock pulse frequency too high. Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0E C0 00 hex

523Bh 0h

Z60 Global

read (3)

Application event 0: The parameter indicates how frequently event 60:application event 0 has occurred. Event description: Trigger: Application specific or by free programming option. Cause: Can be programmed as desired for each axis separately. Level: Can be parameterized in system parameters U100. Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. Other: - Message/warning: Evaluation in 256-msec cycle. - Fault: Evaluation in parameterizable cycle time (A150). Texts, times and level

can be set in parameter group U.. starting with U100.

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0F 00 00 hex

523Ch 0h

Z61 Global

read (3)




523Dh 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 283


04


address

Z62 Global

read (3)




523Eh 0h

Z63 Global

read (3)



Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0F C0 00 hex

523Fh 0h

Z64 Global

read (3)




5240h 0h

Z65 Global

read (3)




5241h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 284


04


address

Z66 Global

read (3)




5242h 0h

Z67 Global

read (3)




5243h 0h

Z68 Global

read (3)

External fault 2: The parameter indicates how frequently event 68:external fault 2 has occurred. Event description: Trigger: Application specific or by free programming option. Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. Other: Should be used for application events which can only be parameterized at the

"fault" level.


5244h 0h

Z69 Global

read (3)

Motor connection: The parameter indicates how frequently event 69:motor connection has occurred. Event description: Trigger: Connection error of the motor. Cause: 1: motorNotDiscon; The contactor did not open when the axis changed. This

cause can only be determined when at least two phase contacts are stuck and the DC link is charged (see E03). No magnetization could be established with asynchronous motors.

2: no motor; Possibly no motor connected or line to motor interrupted. Level: Can be parameterized as inactive or warning in U12. Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment.


5245h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 285


04


address

Z70 Global

read (3)

Parameter consistency: The parameter indicates how frequently event 70:parameter consistency has occurred. Event description: Trigger: The parameterization is contradictory. Cause: 1: no servoencoder; No servo-type encoder; Control mode B20 is set to "servo"

but no appropriate encoder is selected (B26, H.. parameter). 2: X120 direction; X120 is used as source in one parameter but is

parameterized in H120 as drain (or vice versa). 3: B12<->B20; Control mode B20 is not set to servo but the nominal motor

current (B12) exceeds the 4-kHz nominal current (R24) of the device by more than 1.5 times.

4: B10<->H31; Resolver/motorpoleno.; the set motor pole number (B10) and the resolver pole number (H31) do not match.

5: neg.slip; With the control modes V/f, SLVC or VC (B20). The values for motor nominal speed (B13), motor nominal frequency (B15) and motor pole number (B10) indicate a negative slip.

6: torque-lim; When the values entered in C03 or C05 are used, the maximum current of the inverter would be exceeded. Enter lower torque limits.

7: B26:SSI-Slave; SSI slave may not be used as motor encoder (synchronization problems).

8: C01>B83; C01 may not be greater than B83. 9: E102/E103 miss.; An attempt is made to move to a master position via the

integrated bus but the required parameters E102 and E103 are missing. 10: G104<->G27; A master position is sent via the IGB-Motionbus (i.e., G104 is

not set to 0:inactive), but G27 does not have the settings 0:inactive and 6:IGB which are valid for this case.

Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. Other: With an incorrect parameterization, a fault is not triggered until enabling takes

place.


5246h 0h

Z71 Global

read (3)

Firmware: The parameter indicates how often the fault 71:firmware has occurred. Description of the event: Trigger: A firmware error was detected. Cause: 1: FW defective; Only for SDS 5000: An error of the active firmware was

discovered or faulty firmware was determined in the firmware download memory. Load the firmware again.

2: Activate FW; Only for SDS 5000: The firmware was loaded to the inverter but not yet activated. Activate the firmware and perform a device new start!

3: CRC-error; A firmware error was discovered. Turn the 24 V power off and on again. If the error occurs again on renewed OFF/ON, the device hardware is faulty and must be replaced.

Level: Fault Acknowledgment: Turn device off and on again. Other: Causes 1 and 2 only occur during device startup so that the inverter cannot be

enabled. Cause 3 can also occur during operation.


5247h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 286


04


address

Z72 Global

read (3)

Brake test timeout: The parameter indicates how often the fault 72:brake test has occurred. Description of the event: Trigger: Active brake management on the SDS 5000 means that the time set in B311 has

expired without the B300 brake test action having been performed. Cause: 1: B311timeout; The time set in B311 timeout for brake test B300 has expired

without action B300 brake test having been executed. 2: Brake defective; During the execution of the brake test action, the stopping


Level: Message until twice the time set in B311 timeout for brake test B300 has expired. After that, fault.

Acknowledgment: At the "fault" level, the event can be acknowledged for a period of 5 minutes so that the action B300 brake test can be executed. If this time expires without action B300 brake test having been executed successfully, the inverter resumes the "fault" state. If action B300 brake test is performed successfully, the event is automatically acknowledged.

Other: This error is only generated with enable switched off.


5248h 0h

Z73 Global

read (3)

Axis 2 brake test timeout: The parameter indicates how often the fault 73:ax2braketest has occured. Description of the event: Trigger: When brake management is active on the SDS 5000, the time set in B311 has

expired without action B300 brake test having been executed with active axis 2. Cause: 1: B311timeout; The time set in B311 timeout for brake test B300 has expired

without action B300 brake test having been executed with active axis 2. 2:Brake defective; During the execution of the brake test action with active axis

2, the stopping torque entered in B304 or B305 could not be maintained or the encoder test run included in the brake test was concluded with errors.


Acknowledgment: At the "fault" level, the event can be acknowledged for a period of 5 minutes so that the action B300 brake test can be executed. If this time expires without action B300 brake test having been executed successfully with active axis 2, the inverter resumes the "fault" state. If action B300 brake test is performed successfully, the event is automatically acknowledged.



5249h 0h

Used Parameters


ID 441823.04 287


04


address

Z74 Global

read (3)

Axis 3 brake test timeout: The parameter indicates how often the fault 74:ax3braketest has occurred. Description of the event: Trigger: When brake management is active on the SDS 5000, the time set in B311 has








524Ah 0h

Z75 Global

read (3)

Axis 4 brake test timeout: The parameter indicates how often the fault 75:ax4braketest has occured. Description of the event: Trigger: When brake management is active on the SDS 5000, the time set in B311 has








524Bh 0h

Notes

ID 441823.04

ww

w.s

toeb

er.d

e


__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

Global Presence

Address registers

Always up to date on the internet: www.stober.com → contact

• Technical Offices (TB) for advice and marketing in Germany

• Global presence for advice and marketing in about 25 countries

• Service Network Germany

• Service Network International

• STÖBER Subsidiaries:

Austria

Switzerland

China

USA

Great Britain

Japan

France

Italy

Singapore

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbHHauptstraße 41a4663 LaakirchenFon +43 7613 7600-0Fax +43 7613 7600-2525E-Mail: [email protected]

STÖBER SCHWEIZ AGRugghölzli 25453 RemetschwilFon +41 56 496 96 50 Fax +41 56 496 96 55eMail: [email protected]

STOBER CHINAGerman Centre BeijingUnit 2010, Landmark Tower 2,8 North Dongsanhuan RoadChaoyang District100004 BeijingFon +86 10 65907391Fax +86 10 65907393 eMail: [email protected]

STOBER DRIVES INC.1781 Downing DriveMaysville, KY 41056Fon +1 606 7595090 Fax +1 606 7595045eMail: [email protected]

STOBER DRIVES LTD.Upper Keys Business Village Keys Park Road, HednesfordCannock WS12 2HAFon +44 (0) 1543 458 858Fax +44 (0) 1543 448 688E-Mail: [email protected]

STOBER JapanP.O. Box 113-002, 6 chome15-8, Hon-komagomeBunkyo-kuTokyoFon +81 3 5395-6788Fax +81 3 5395-6799 eMail: [email protected]

STÖBER S.a.r.l.131, Chemin du Bac à TrailleLes Portes du Rhône69300 Caluire et CuireFon +33 4 78989180 Fax +33 4 78985901eMail: [email protected]

STÖBER TRASMISSIONI S. r. l.Via Risorgimento, 820017 Mazzo di Rho (Milano)Fon +39 02 93909-570 Fax +39 02 93909-325eMail: [email protected]

STOBER Singapore50 Tagore Lane#05-06BEntrepreneur CentreSingapore 787494Fon +632 241 89 - 01/02/03/04/05Fax +632 241 40 - 40/60 E-Mail: [email protected] w

ww

.sto

ber.c

om

m

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KGKieselbronner Str. 1275177 PFORZHEIMGERMANYTel. +49 (0)7231 582-0Fax. +49 (7231) 582-1000E-Mail: [email protected]

24/h service hotline +49(0) 180 5 786 323

Technische Änderungen vorbehaltenErrors and changes exceptedID 441823.0401/2013

www.stober.com

application technology controller

Documents